Radar

Operating Instructions
RADARPILOT Platinum
Up to Software Version 1.0.15
Combining the following applications:
RADARPILOT (with transceiver NG 3050 / NG 3051)
Item No.: ED 3100 G 130 Revision: 10W (2015-07) Order No.: 390008509
The radar transceivers of this NACOS Platinum system are FCC registered as follows:
X-Band 12.5 KW: Q07NG3050X12-5KW

X-Band 25 KW: Q07NG3050X25KW
S-Band 30 KW: Q07NG3051S30KW
For these units the following notes about FCC approval apply:
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
NOTICE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTICE:
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by SAM Electronics GmbH in
Hamburg may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
Radio-frequency radiation exposure information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 21 m between the radiator and your
body (30 KW S-Band Radar). For more details (i.e. X-Band and various antennas and transmitting power)
please refer to section A chapter 1.1.2 in this manual.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
© Wärtsilä SAM Electronics GmbH

The reproduction, distribution, and utilization of this document as well as the
communication of its content to others without explicit authorization is prohibited.
Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages.
All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model, or design.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
Wärtsilä SAM Electronics GmbH

D - 22763 Hamburg
Service
Customer Support Center
Phone:+ 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Fax:+ 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
E-mail: [email protected]
RADARPILOT Platinum List of Contents
GENERAL
1 About these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Aim, Scope and Validity of these Operating Instructions. . . . ... . . . . . . . . . 16
1.2 Structure of the Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . 17
1.3 How to Scroll through this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . 18
1.4 Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . 19
2 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating Instructions . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2 General Safety Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.3 Authorisation and Qualification of Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.5 Chart Updates and Safety Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1 What is the NACOS Platinum System . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2 Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.3 Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.4 General System Description MFD . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.5 Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.5.1 Pointing Devices – Trackball and Mouse ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.5.2 Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.5.3 The ASCII Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.5.4 The RADAR Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.5.5 The TRACKPILOT Keyboard . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.6 TFT Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.7 Start-up and Shut-down of MFDs . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 37
QUICK START GUIDE

1 The S-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.1 S-Mode Settings in ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.2 S-Mode Settings for RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2 Man Overboard Function (MOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3 Brief Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
1 The Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2 Graphical User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 3

printed 14.07.15
List of Contents RADARPILOT Platinum
2.1 Super Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

2.2 Application Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.3 Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.3.1 Brilliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.3.2 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.3.3 Alive Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3 The Navigation Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.1.1 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.1.2 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.1.3 Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.1.4 REF - Reference for CCRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.1.5 Screen Stabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2 Navigation Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.2.1 Integrity Marking of Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.2.2 General about Heading and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.2.3 HDG - Heading Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2.4 General about Speed Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.2.5 STW - Speed through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.2.6 COG - Course over Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.7 SOG - Speed over Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.2.8 Set Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.2.9 General about Position Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.2.10 Position Sensor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.2.11 Position Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2.12 General about Position Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.13 Correction by Position Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.3 Vector and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.3.1 Ground / Water Stabilization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.3.2 Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.3.3 Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.3.4 Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.3.5 Predict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.4 Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.4.1 The Chart Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.5 Display of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.6 Trial Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.6.1 Switching On the Trial Maneuver Dialogue Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.6.2 The Trial Maneuver in REL Vector Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.6.3 Simulating a Course Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.6.4 Setting the Delay and the Speed of the Simulated Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.6.5 The Trial Maneuver in True Vector Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.6.6 Checking the Trial Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.6.7 Further Information about the Trial Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Page 4 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4 The Menu Bar with Home, S-Mode and MOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

5 Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND TOOLS

1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
1.1 Structure of the Sidebar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2 Handling of Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2.1 Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.2 Alarm Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 107
2.3 ECDIS and Track Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.4 Ship Look Ahead Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 109
3 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.1 Draft Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.2 Dangerous Target Settings . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.3 Acquisition / Guard Zone Settings . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.4 Target Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.5 Route Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.6 MOB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.7 TM - True Motion Settings . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 118
4 Sensor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.1 Sensor Monitoring (Heading and Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.2 Sensor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5 AIS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.1 AIS Voyage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.2 Transmitter ON/OFF and Long-range Interrogation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.3 Display SART in Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.4 Reduce Transmitting Power During Loading of Tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.5 SOLAS Chapter VII - Carriage of Dangerous Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6 Display of Targets and Own Ship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.1 Display of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.2 Display of Aids-to-Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.3 Display of AIS SAR Aircrafts and Vessels . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.4 Display of AIS-SART, AIS-MOB, and AIS-EPIRB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.5 Display of Own Ship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7 ARPA and AIS Target Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 5

printed 14.07.15
7.1 ARPA Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

7.2 AIS Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.3 Target Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.4 Manual Target Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.5 Automatic Target Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.6 Prerequisites for the Collision Avoidance Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.7 Deletion and Loss of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.8 Target List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.9 Critical Target and Details of a Selected Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.10 Show List of Received AIS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.11 Transmit AIS Safety Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
8 NAV - Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
8.1 LOP - Lines of Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8.1.1 LOP - Known Bearing and Range to a Landmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8.1.2 LOP - Known Bearing to two Landmarks (Cross Bearing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.1.3 LOP - Known Bearing at two Times (Transferred Base Line). . . . . . . . . . 153
8.1.4 Further Hints on Lines of Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.2 PI - Parallel Index Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.3 EBL - Electronic Bearing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.4 VRM - Variable Range Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.4.1 Operating VRM and EBL Jointly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.5 User Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.5.1 Placing a User Symbol - Graphic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.5.2 Adjusting a Symbol - Numeric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.5.3 Adjusting a Symbol - UTM Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.5.4 Placing an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.5.5 Removing or Modifying an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.5.6 Placing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.5.7 Danger Bearing or Clearing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.5.8 Events and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.5.9 Switching Off the User Symbol Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.5.10 Assigning User Symbols to a Visibility Group (Later SW Versions only) . . 169
8.5.11 Switching on a User Defined Visibility Group (Later SW Versions only) . . 170
8.5.12 Modifying Assignment & Details of User Symbols (Later SW Versions). . . 171
9 Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
RADAR FUNCTIONS
1 RADAR Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
1.1 RADAR Safety – Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1.2 RADAR Safety – Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
1.3 RADAR Safety – Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Page 6 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2 RADAR Standards and Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

2.1 Overview about HW and SW Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.1 Layout with Five Workstations and Conning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.2 Overview about Failure Modes and Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3.3 RADAR Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.3.1 Recovery Time after Power Break-down at the Radar Scanner . . . . . . . . 184
4 The RADAR Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.1 Select the RADAR Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.2 Select the Master Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.3 Select the RADAR Pulse Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.4 Adjusting the RADAR Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.5 Setting the RADAR Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4.6 Setting the Anti-clutter Sea Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.7 Setting the Rain Clutter Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4.8 Setting the Enhance Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.9 Setting the Video Emphasis and Hiding Video or Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.10 Summary of the Recommended Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5 The RADAR Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6 The RADAR Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.1 The Pan and Zoom Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6.2 Presentation of Vessel Outline in Small Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6.3 Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7 RADAR Specific Target Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7.1 ARPA Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 202
7.2 AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.3 Target Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.4 Manual Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.5 Reference Target Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 206
8 ARPA Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
9 Chart Radar Mode (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.1 Selection of Charts and Hiding of the Chart Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.2 Reference, Range Scale and Matching of Chart with RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
9.3 Selecting the Display Group or a Category of Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
9.4 Chart Radar Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
9.5 Application Area Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 7

printed 14.07.15
9.6 Presentation of Depth Colors in the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

9.7 Main Differences between Chart Radar and ECDIS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
9.8 Priority of Layers in Chart Radar Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
10 Multi-Antenna Operation (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
10.1 Transceiver Group and Master-Slave Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.2 RADAR Video Settings and Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.3 Dead Zones and Target Handling between Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.4 Example for Multi-Antenna Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
11 Radar for HSC Operation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
12 Checking the RADAR Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
12.1 Performance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
13 Setting and Evaluation of the RADAR Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
13.1 RADAR Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
13.2 Achievable RADAR Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.3 Distortions of the RADAR Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
13.4 Undesirable Echo Displays and Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
13.5 Reduced Range by Rain in X-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
13.6 Reduced Range by Rain in S-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.7 Disturbances by Reflections from the Sea Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
13.8 Other Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
13.9 RADAR Setting for RACON Codes and Target Enhancers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
13.10 Sector Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
13.11 RADAR Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING

1 Route Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
1.1 Consider at the Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
1.2 Set the Display of the Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
1.3 Set the Display of the Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
1.4 Open a Catalog for Routes or Create a New Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
1.5 Open an Existing Route or Create a New Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
1.6 Add or Insert Waypoints in Graphical Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
1.7 Working with the Waypoint List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
1.7.1 Planning View of the Waypoint List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
1.7.2 Edit Further Waypoint Data in the Waypoint List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
1.8 Save, Rename or Delete a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
1.9 Start Check of the Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Page 8 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.10 Results of Geometrical Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

1.11 Results of the Check against ENC Chart and User Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
2 Route Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
2.1 Preconditions for Chart and Track Monitoring . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
2.2 Settings for Chart Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
2.3 Additional Settings for Track Monitoring . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
2.4 Activate a Route for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
2.5 Chart Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
2.6 Track Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
3 Route Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
3.1 Enter Time Schedule in WP List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
3.2 Monitoring the Time Schedule During a Voyage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
3.3 Automatic Rescheduling of a Voyage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4 Route Export and Import (Back Up and Printout). . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.1 Backup of Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . . . . . 270
4.2 Restoring of Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . . . . . 271
4.3 Exporting Routes to Third Party System . . . . . . ............... . . . . . 272
4.4 Importing Routes from Third Party System (also NACOS xx-4 or -5) . . . . . . 273
4.5 Printing out a Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . . . . . 274
5 Further Information for Route Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5.1 Overview of Route Parameters . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.2 Parameter Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 277
5.3 Predefined Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.4 Setting the Safety Corridor . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 279
5.5 Repetition of Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 279
ANCHOR MONITORING
1 Setting the Anchor Watch Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1.2 Set the Anchor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
1.3 Perform the Anchoring maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
2 Anchor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
2.1 Activate and Deactivate Anchor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
2.2 Delete the Monitoring Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
2.3 Alarms During Anchor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 9

printed 14.07.15
DATA MAINTENANCE
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
1.1 Chart Maintenance Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
1.2 Display Expander. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
2 Maintenance of IHO ENC and ARCS Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
2.1 Permits and Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.2 Installation of IHO ENC and ARCS Permits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
2.3 Installation of Certificates (only for IHO ENC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
2.4 Update of Charts from Media or from another Workstation (MFD) . . . . . . . 298
2.5 Messages during Chart Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.6 Display Contents of Your own MFD or another MFD (workstation) . . . . . . . 300
2.7 Maintenance of Charts on your Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.8 Installation/ Maintenance of Admiralty Information Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.8.1 Installing Overlay Permits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.8.2 Installing Overlay Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.8.3 Updating the Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
3 Manual ENC Update Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
3.1 Opening the Chart Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
3.2 Select Cell to be Updated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
3.3 Start Update Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4 Maintenance of C-Map Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
4.1 Request of C-Map Permits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.2 Installation of C-Map Permits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.3 Installation of C-Map Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . 309
4.4 Request of C-Map Real-time Update (RTU) . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.5 C-Map Real-time Update (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.6 Update of Charts with new Version from base media. . ..... . . . . . . . . . . 312
5 Remove Complete Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
6 Remote Update of Workstations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
7 Backup/Restore of Routes and User Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
WORKSTATION MAINTENANCE
1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
1.1 Display Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
1.2 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
1.3 Sensor Interface, Network Switch, 24 VDC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Page 10 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
2.1 SW Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
2.2 SW Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
ALARMS
1 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
1.1 Color Code for the Alarm Indications . . . . .. . . . . . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . 324
1.2 Overview of the Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . 325
1.3 Example of an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . 326
1.4 Behavior when an Alarm comes up. . . . . . .. . . . . . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . 327
2 List of Navigation Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
2.1 Navigation Sensor Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 330
2.2 Target Alarms . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 335
2.3 AIS Alarms . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 336
2.4 ECDIS Alarms . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 339
3 RADAR Transceiver Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
LISTS AND INDEXES

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Document History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 11

printed 14.07.15
Page 12 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
GENERAL
RADARPILOT Platinum GENERAL
Operating Instructions About these Operating Instructions
1 About these Operating Instructions
Do not forget to read the chapter on general safety measures. This is obligatory
to read! See page 21.
In this chapter, you will find general information about these operating instructions which have been
delivered with your RADARPILOT Platinum. It informs you about:
• Aim, scope and Validity on page 16
• Structure of these Operating Instructions on page 17
• How to use the hyper-links on
There will also be the case that you are basically familiar with the RADARPILOT Platinum but only
need punctual information on one specific topic or detail. In order to find information on such
specific subjects, you can use the
• List of contents
• Index of key words
• Quick start guide with brief operating instructions
• List of abbreviations
This document uses inter-active hyper-links to refer a text paragraph on another page.
You may click to a hyper-link like the one at the end of this paragraph and read more details on the
referenced page, and you can come back to the origin by just using the two keys
[ALT] + [ ] together (in Adobe Acrobat Reader, other readers may differ)
Please try it now to jump to page 18 and back.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 15

printed 14.07.15
GENERAL RADARPILOT Platinum
About these Operating Instructions Operating Instructions
1.1 Aim, Scope and Validity of these Operating Instructions
The RADARPILOT Platinum must only be operated by persons who have passed
the relevant mandatory training on the respective systems and applications. Only
reading these operating instructions cannot replace such training.
These operating instructions describe how the RADARPILOT Platinum and its software applications work,
and how to operate the applications.
Since the operating instructions are generic for a family of products, some information and functions or
features described may not be used in your specific installation. This depends on the customisation of
your system.
Page 16 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.2 Structure of the Operating Instructions
When reading through or skimming through the overall operating instructions, it is always a good idea
to go from general to more specific subjects, i.e. to start with this general part of the operating instruc-
tions and then continue with the part describing the application you wish to learn about. Again, in the
descriptions of the applications, read the introductory chapters before getting into detail. Otherwise you
might miss information which are assumed to be understood in the chapters describing specific details.
The structure of the RADARPILOT Platinum Operating Instructions is as follows:

- GENERAL
This is the part you are currently reading. It provides general information which is important in order
to be able to understand the other parts of the operating instructions.
- QUICK START GUIDE
Essential information on the individual applications giving a quick overview of important functions.
- GENERAL FUNCTIONS
Description of the navigation system platform
- DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND TOOLS
Description of the display specific functions for settings, presentation, and tools
- CHART FUNCTIONS and/or RADAR FUNCTIONS depending on the equipment, and describing the
application specific functions
- ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING
Description of Route Planning and Monitoring functions
- ANCHOR MONITORING
Description of the Anchor Monitoring functions
- Further optional functions like TRACKPILOT, SPEEDPILOT, CONNINGPILOT, and BNWAS
Description of these optional functions if included
- Optional subsystems like AIS, NAVTEX, and other
Description of the Platinum functions related to these subsystems if included
- DATA MAINTENANCE
Instructions regarding chart installation, update for ENC, ARCS and C-Map Professional, and back-
up of routes and user symbols
- WORKSTATION MAINTENANCE
Guidance for the maintenance of the HW and SW system components
- ALARMS, WARNINGS, AND CAUTIONS
Information about navigation and system alerts
- LISTS AND INDEXES
Lists figures, tables, abbreviations, and the document history
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 17

printed 14.07.15
1.3 How to Scroll through this Document
You may scroll from page to page by using the scroll down keys on your keyboard. You can also jump
to a dedicated page by entering the page number in your Adobe Acrobat Reader. The page number
which is shown in the top line of the reader is the same as printed in the bottom line of the document.
This document uses inter-active hyper-links to refer a text paragraph on another page.
You may click to a hyper-link like the one at the end of this paragraph and read more details on the
referenced page, and you can come back to the origin by just using the two keys
[ALT] + [ ] together (in Adobe Acrobat Reader, other readers may differ)
Please try it now to jump to page 15 and back.
Page 18 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.4 Typographical Conventions
The typographical conventions used in the operating instructions are kept simple, but still it is essential
that you are sure to understand their meaning before reading the instructions. The following special signs
are used for specific purposes:
• [ ] (square brackets)
• < > (triangular brackets)
• { } (curly brackets)
These signs are used as shown in the following examples on the next page:
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 19

printed 14.07.15
Expression Explanation
[KEY NAME] This convention is used to refer to a key an an onscreen keyboard or a

computer keyboard. Example:
Press [ALARM LIST] to view the Alarm List.
This means that you must press the key with the text "ALARM LIST" written
on it, in order to view the Alarm List.
[KEY] + [2nd KEY] This convention is used to refer to a key combination . Example:
Press [ALT]+[F4] to close the window.
This means that you must press and hold the [ALT] key, and while holding the
[ALT] key you have to press [F4].
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] The symbols in the square brackets refer to the respective arrow keys on
operator panels.
Abcd List Heading capitalization and bold typeface are used when directly referring to
names of RADARPILOT Platinum functions and UI elements. Example:
Select Color & in the main menu.
From any mode you can call up the Alarm List by pressing the [ALARM LIST]
key on the panel.
Main > Sub-menu This is an abbreviated way for:

> Sub-Sub-menu Click on Main, then on Sub-menu and afterwards on Sub-Sub-menu
☞ This symbol indicates a hint.
<variable> Describes a text string of variable length and contents. Example:

The display will show <duty engineer>.
This means that the display will show the name of the selected duty engineer,
e.g. "3RD ENGINEER".
{nnn} Describes a number with a fixed number of digits which is input or output.
The number of letters inside the brackets describes the number of digits.
Example:
Enter a channel number in the format {nnn}.
You have to use zeros (0) to fill the empty spaces, if the number is less than
100 (e.g. 056)
{nnn.} Like {nnn}, but there may be a decimal point at any place in the number, or
none.
Example
The value is displayed in the format {nnnn.}.
In the example the value may be, e.g. "12.35" or "450.6" or "0045". When
entering such values, the decimal point will sometimes be preset by the
system.
DD-MMM-YYYY The date in international format which is used in the system.

Example: 21 AUG 2009 for the 21st of August 2009.
HH:MM:SS The time format used in the system. The 24 hour format is used.
Examples: 06:30:00 stands for half past six and 0 seconds in the morning
(6:30 am) and 23:58:00 is two minutes to midnight.
Table I / 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions
Page 20 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Safety Precautions
2 Safety Precautions
This chapter describes general safety measures to be taken into account when working with or on the
RADARPILOT Platinum. In the chapters describing the RADARPILOT Platinum you will find further
important safety notes and warnings which are specific to the context.
2.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating Instructions
A three-level system of warnings is used in these operating instructions which is a mix of ANSI and ISO
standards. The different warning levels have the following meaning:
This sign is used whenever severe injuries or even death will occur as conse-
quence of un-awareness or disregard of the described safety rules.
This sign is used whenever severe injuries or even death may occur as conse-
quence of un-awareness or disregard of the described safety rules.
This sign is used when special care must be taken to prevent unexpected conse-
quences such as damage to equipment, incorrect or incalculable operation and
behavior of equipment.
☞ Notes & Hints: This symbol indicates useful notes and hints which will ease understanding the
system or speed up operation.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 21

printed 14.07.15
Safety Precautions Operating Instructions
2.2 General Safety Note
You are obliged to read these operating instructions prior to operation and to
adhere to the operating instructions in operation in order to prevent possible
danger and to ensure compliance with the designated use of the equipment.
Prevention of danger includes that operator personnel are trained and authorized
for safe operation of the equipment. We assume no liability for damage due to
improper operation which could have been prevented.
NOTE:
Further potential danger when working with and on the RADARPILOT Platinum is
described in the respective sections on these processes.
As a very general rule, keep your workplace clean and tidy, it helps preventing accidents! Ensure unob-
structed access to all workstations, operator panels, controls, and relevant switchgear cabinets in order
to enable instant response to alarms!
2.3 Authorisation and Qualification of Personnel
Only authorized persons may operate the RADARPILOT Platinum.

Danger for persons, things and the environment in case of improper operation or
maintenance and repair of the RADARPILOT Platinum.
Only authorized persons are permitted to carry out cleaning and maintenance
work, or troubleshooting on the RADARPILOT Platinum!
Persons authorized to operate the system are specially instructed and trained operating personnel of the
user. Persons authorized to carry out cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting are the specially
trained and skilled personnel of the user as well as Wärtsilä SAM Electronics personnel being qualified by
training, knowledge and experience. Persons operating or servicing the RADARPILOT Platinum must be
familiar with the general safety regulations and specific safety systems and they must have passed all
required training and must have read the relevant operating instructions and manuals before starting
work.
Page 22 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Safety Precautions
2.4 Commissioning
DANGER! WORK IN PROGRESS! DO NOT SWITCH!

It is not permissible to connect the ship’s mains to the system before setting-to-
work by a qualified and authorized person. The mains must be switched off (e.g.
by means of a common isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ship’s supply
or the mains cable must be disconnected until commissioning is carried out.
2.5 Chart Updates and Safety Inspections
Inspect and survey the safety systems at intervals prescribed by the responsible classification society or
other relevant authorities.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 23

printed 14.07.15
Safety Precautions Operating Instructions
Page 24 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions System Description
3 System Description
3.1 What is the NACOS Platinum System
The NACOS Platinum system is the state-of-the-art integrated Navigation-Automation-Control-System

from Wärtsilä SAM Electronics. It consists of separate applications which form the desired specific system
installed on a ship. In an installation, the set of applications may range from a stand-alone RADAR or
ECDIS installation to a full-featured comprehensive installation.
The NACOS Platinum design is the result of the efforts of a multidisciplinary usability team consisting of
specialists from Wärtsilä SAM Electronics, Chalmers University (Gothenburg, Sweden) and TNO Human
Factors (Soesterberg, The Netherlands). In addition to high quality and reliability of the cost-effective
solution, the main focus of the NACOS Platinum system is on usability, modularity and scalability, ease
of installation, commissioning and servicing, as well as integration with third-party systems.
NACOS Platinum products serve a large variety of possible installations in a professional shipborne envi-
ronment ranging from stand-alone RADAR or ECDIS installations meeting the minimum requirements
aboard up to complex installations on a large ship including RADAR, ECDIS, Route Planning, Heading-,
Track- and Speed Control, Conning, Machinery and various other applications to navigate the ship safely,
and reliably to monitor and control the processes aboard.
The applications of the NACOS Platinum system are operated using standardized workstations. The work-
stations will be called Multi Functional Display (MFD) further on. MFDs are the standardized operating
consoles used as MMI for the NACOS Platinum system. They are based on PCs running under Windows
7. From a MFD, you will have access to the applications installed in your NACOS Platinum so that the
workplaces aboard are standardized. All applications can be made available at any MFD.
Fig. I / 1 MFD console design
The full suite of NACOS Platinum applications and possibly integrated third-party products provide the
user with the required information and control functions and thus essentially support the user in
performing the assigned tasks both in everyday routines and in difficult situations or in case of problems.
The vast amount of information resulting from the ship's operation is always presented in a well-struc-
tured and concise manner so that users will have a clear overview of the ship's situation at all times.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 25

printed 14.07.15
System Description Operating Instructions
3.2 Customisation
Your NACOS Platinum has been customized by Wärtsilä SAM Electronics according to the ship-specific
requirements which were specified when the system was ordered. In this context, customizing means
installing the required hardware and setting up the configuration of the hardware according to the ship-
specific requirements.
Customisation covers the selection of available applications to meet your specific requirements but also
involves adaptations regarding the individual applications. For example, the number of operator panels
used in the Machinery application can be individually configured. This is done using special system tools
which are used by Wärtsilä SAM Electronics engineers and technicians only, and documented in the
delivery documents.
Hence, in these operating instructions, the words "customisation" and "configuration" refer to the custo-
misation provided by Wärtsilä SAM Electronics, unless specific NACOS Platinum functions such as, e.g.,
the printer configuration are dealt with. For exact and specific features and functional scope of your
particular installation, please refer to the relevant order and delivery documents.
NACOS Platinum products serve a large variety of possible installations in a professional shipborne envi-
ronment ranging from stand-alone RADAR installations meeting the minimum requirements aboard to
complex installations on a large ship including RADAR, ECDIS, Route Planning, Conning, Machinery (Auto-
mation) and various other applications to navigate the ship safely, and to monitor and control the
processes aboard.
Installation, customisation, configuration, as well as initial start-up are carried out by Wärtsilä SAM Elec-
tronics according to the order specifications upon delivery of the NACOS Platinum system. Thus, this is
not covered by these operating instructions. The actual installation aboard a ship is always specifically
customised to the individual needs. The scalability of the NACOS Platinum system enables individual
systems across the entire product range, e.g. a the minimum ship configuration in the figure below, the
so-called IMO set:
Fig. I / 2 Minimum installation – IMO set
Page 26 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
At a higher expansion stage, a small-ship configuration could include RADAR as well as Navigation &
Automation:
Fig. I / 3 Example of a small-ship installation
An example for a complex installation on a large ship is shown in the following figure below:
Fig. I / 4 Example of a large-ship installation
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 27

printed 14.07.15
3.3 Applicable Standards
Radar
IMO Resolution A.278(VIII) IEC 62388 Ed 2.0, 2013 1)
IMO Resolution A.694(17) IEC 62288 Ed 1.0, 2008
IMO Resolution A.823(19) IEC 60945 Ed 4.0, 2002 incl. Corr.1, 2008
IMO Resolution MSC.191(79) IEC 661162-1 Ed 4.0, 2010
IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) IEC 61162-2 Ed 1.0, 1998
ITU-R M.1177-3
1)
For SW version 1.1, until SW version 1.0.15 the Ed 1.0 is applicable
Table I / 2 Applicable Standards for Radar
ECDIS
IMO Resolution A.694(17) IHO S-57 Ed 3.1.1 IEC 61174 Ed 3.0, 2008
IMO Resolution MSC.232(82) IHO S-61 Ed 1.0 IEC 62288 Ed 1.0, 2008
IMO Resolution A.97(73)-(HSC- IHO S-52 Ed 6.0 Pres. Lib. 3.4 IEC 61993-2 Ed 1.0, 2001 1)
Code 2000)13
IMO Resolution MSC.191(79) IEC 60945 Ed 4.0, 2002 incl.
IHO S-63 Ed 1.1 Corr.1, 2008
UKHO ARCS IEC 661162-1 Ed 4.0, 2010
IEC 61162-2 Ed 1.0, 1998
1)
Limited to required data content to display and process other UAIS information as defined in IEC 61162-1 Ed 4.0
Table I / 3 Applicable Standards for ECDIS
Additional Standards for MULTIPILOT (Radar and ECDIS combined)

IMO Resolution A.817(19) IMO MSC.36(63)
IMO Resolution A.820(19) IMO MSC.97(73)
IMO SN.1/Circ. 266
Table I / 4 Additional Standards for MULTIPILOT
Additional Standards for TRACKPILOT (Heading Control)

IMO Resolution A.342(IX), as amended by ISO 11674 Ed 2.0, 2006
MSC.64(67) annex 3
Table I / 5 Additional Standards for TRACKPILOT (HCS)
Additional Standards for TRACKPILOT (Track Control)

IMO Resolution MSC.74(69) IEC 62065 (2002)
Table I / 6 Additional Standards for TRACKPILOT (TCS)
Page 28 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.4 General System Description MFD
The NACOS Platinum applications are operated using standardised MFDs. A MFD is based on a Personal
Computer running under Windows 7 which is used for input and output of data of the NACOS Platinum
system using the graphical user interface (GUI) of Windows. From a MFD, you will have access to the
applications installed in your system. The GUI handling is the same on each MFD, i.e. the workplaces
aboard are standardised. All applications can be made available at any MFD.
MFDs are installed in the consoles aboard, and they are equipped with a 22" or 26’’ TFT monitor and a
trackball. Optionally, MFDs can also be equipped with mouse and keyboard.
Fig. I / 5 MFD
The GUI is based on Microsoft Windows 7. However, you do not have direct access to Windows so that
the MFD cannot be used like a normal PC, e.g. to install software and run applications other than the
applications related to the RADARPILOT Platinum.
In these operating instructions, we assume that you are reasonably familiar with basic Windows functions
such as window operations, dialogue handling, menu and button operation, selecting list items or
options, and so on. Nevertheless, many of the screen elements and basic operations are explained in
these operating instructions.
When the MFD is started, a basic screen is displayed, which is referred to as Super Home from where
you have access to all functions and information which are available on the specific MFD.
If the MFD is already running, select Super Home from the main menu or click in the menu bar to
switch to Super Home.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 29

printed 14.07.15
3.5 Operating Devices
3.5.1 Pointing Devices – Trackball and Mouse
All user interface controls are operated by the mouse or trackball which is connected to the respective
MFD. Even if you are already familiar with using input devices like mouse or trackball, you will find one
or the other important note in this section.
DO key MORE key
No function MORE key... Scroll wheel
DO key
Built-in Desktop Mouse

trackball trackball
Fig. I / 6 Possible pointing devices
To start an operating step move the pointer on the screen by moving the trackball or mouse. Move the
pointer to the desired position on the screen, e.g. to a text item, a numerical value, a symbol, or any
desired position e.g. on the PPI. The shape of the pointer changes when you point at different elements
on screen. The pointer’s shape depends on the application and the element you point at.
When you point at a click-sensitive (clickable) element on screen then you can press and release (click)
one of the trackball keys to display information or activate a function. The possible types of clicks are
explained separately. The specific effect of clicking depends on the key used, the element you clicked,
and the operating situation. This is described in the specific parts of these operating instructions. Desktop
trackball or mouse have two different buttons, DO and MORE key. The functions of the DO and MORE
keys are described in the following.
DO Key
The most frequently used of the keys is the DO key, i.e. the middle key on the built-in trackball and the
left button of the desktop trackball and mouse. Most elements on screen respond to this key by opening
a menu from which you can select frequently used functions.
☞ In these operating instructions, "clicking" always means pressing the DO key. When you have to
press the MORE key or the right mouse/trackball button, this will be explicitly explained in the
instructions.
Page 30 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
MORE Keys
On the built-in trackballs the two keys are situated above the DO key, The right one is called MORE
key. The left key has no function. On the desktop trackball and mouse, this is the right button. The func-
tions of the MORE key depend on the element you point at on screen. In some cases pressing the MORE
key opens menus, in other cases additional information are displayed. However, not all elements which
can be operated by means of the DO key will also respond to the MORE key.
Scroll Wheel
If a scroll wheel is available, it can be used to scroll down lists or to zoom into or out of charts. Only
mouse and desktop trackball may be equipped with a scroll wheel.
Types of Clicks
In RADARPILOT Platinum you point at elements on screen and click or press the MORE key to display
information or cause action. The following types of clicks are possible:
Click Explanation
Single click of Perform action. This means pressing and immediately releasing again the
left key or DO key DO key of the built-in trackball, or the left mouse or trackball key respec-
tively.
When you click on a button, this will start a process or open a dialogue.
when you click on dropdown menus, this will open the menu. In a menu,
to select an item, click on the item with a single click. A single click will also
select and thus highlight an entry in a list.
Double-click of In tables, a double-click will open a cell for editing. A cursor is displayed,
left key or DO key and you can change the respective value like a text field. Editing resembles
editing cells in Microsoft Excel. An example for such a table is a waypoint
list that contains the waypoint number, name, position and some other
properties, which you can change in that table by double-clicking on the
cells.
When you click on a folder icon in folder structures, which you will find,
e.g., in the Machinery application, a double-click opens that folder and lists
the subordinated contents.
Press the MORE key or Get information, in many cases via a context menu. This is used for
right-click using mouse or providing you with object-specific menu items, such as menus for properties
desktop trackball and maintenance. These functions also provide access to adjustments,
particularly in the Machinery application. Examples are: acknowledging
alarms, displaying properties, etc.
Table I / 7 Types of clicks in RADARPILOT Platinum
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 31

printed 14.07.15
3.5.2 Keyboard
To enter alphanumerical values and also to operate the user interface, the MFD may be equipped with
a membrane keyboard, which is integrated in the console.
Fig. I / 7 Keyboard of a console
In some cases, an optional external keyboard is provided. For that purpose, a standard PC keyboard is
used. Depending on the application you are working with, the function keys in the top row may have
special functions. Please refer to the relevant descriptions of the individual applications. For example, in
the RADAR applications, function keys have different functions than in the Machinery application.
If no external keyboard is available at all, values can also be entered using the so-called onscreen
keyboard which is an optional feature of the RADARPILOT Platinum user interface. However, this
depends on customisation. There may be a separate icon for the onscreen keyboard.
Fig. I / 8 On-screen keyboard
You can use this keyboard to enter text and numeric values or press function keys, just as you do when
you use the physical PC keyboard. The onscreen keyboard thus emulates the PC keyboard and it can be
used if, for whatever reason, the PC keyboard does not work. Simply click on the buttons to enter the
respective letter or number, or activate the respective function of the key.
Note: For the RADAR application the left part and for the TRACKPILOT the right part of the MFD console
can be equipped with a dedicated keyboard panel. See the respective chapters for details.
Page 32 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.5.3 The ASCII Keyboard
The MFD can be equipped with an ASCII keyboard in the console. It works like a common computer
keyboard, except for the fact that the back-light can be dimmed and that the locations of the key-groups
like i.e. the numeric key block are different.
Back-light dimming
Fig. I / 9 The Optional ASCII Keyboard
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 33

printed 14.07.15
3.5.4 The RADAR Keyboard
If the RADARPILOT application is included in your system, several RADAR functions can be operated as
well from the RADAR Keyboard installed optionally in the left part of the operating console. For details
please refer to the main section about RADAR FUNCTIONS.
Fig. I / 10 The RADAR Keyboard
Page 34 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.5.5 The TRACKPILOT Keyboard
If the TRACKPILOT application is included in your system, it is operated from the TRACKPILOT Keyboard
installed in the right part of the operating console. For details please refer to the main section about
TRACKPILOT.
Fig. I / 11 The TRACKPILOT Keyboard
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 35

printed 14.07.15
3.6 TFT Monitor
The NACOS Platinum user interface is displayed on a 22" or 26’’ TFT monitor which is an integrated part
of the MFD. The monitor is switched on and off automatically together with the MFD. To adjust the
monitor’s settings, use the software functions and controls provided (see page 56).
Nominal Viewing Distance and Recommended Installation
The monitors are designed according to the requirements in IEC 62288. According to chapter 4.6.1.2 of
this IEC test standard the largest dimension of a symbol for operational information shall have at least
5 mm/m (17 min of arc) at the nominal viewing distance, and include at least 16 pixels.
The applications provide text heights as follows:
- Large font with 5.5 mm for operational information
- Medium size font with 4.5 mm for
- Normal size font with 3.5 mm
- Small font with 2.5 mm
The small font is not used for navigation related tasks.
-> The large size font is used for navigation related information (i.e. heading value, position, speed)
and determines the nominal viewing distance with 1 meter for both monitors.
This is sufficient for sitting positions in front of one of the workstations (typically 0.8 meter) as well as
for a standing position in front of the center steering console (typically 1.0 meter). In this case the
console has a depth of max. 0.8 meter.
Color Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors)

If the display content on a TFT monitor has remained unchanged for a long period of time and is then
replaced by a different display, an effect can occur which is known from cathode ray tubes: the previous
display is still faintly visible in the form of discoloration. In the case of TFT monitors, in contrast to moni-
tors with cathode ray tubes, this effect is reversible and therefore cannot be regarded as a defect. If the
monitor is operated for a long time (several hours or days) with a different display, the discoloration
disappears.
Page 36 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.7 Start-up and Shut-down of MFDs
As long as the ship is at sea and in operation, the RADARPILOT Platinum must
be fully operational, i.e. the RADARPILOT Platinum and its applications must not
be shut down. UPS systems must not be deactivated.
☞ The RADARPILOT Platinum and the related consoles and the electronics equipment are permanently
up and running. They are only completely shut down by qualified authorized service personnel in
case of servicing and repair. The system components are then separated from the mains using a
main switch on the bridge. When switching on the mains supply again, the equipment will start-up
automatically without further user action.
This section describes how to use the shut-down function, if this is required, e.g. if the power supply has
to be switched off during a dockyard period, or if an individual workstation (MFD) shall be switched off
for specific reasons. Proceed as follows to switch off a workstation (MFD):
1. Click to the Menu button in the bottom right corner and then to Display Off.
2. In the window which is displayed, select Power Off and click to OK.
(The other option Restart can be used to re-boot the workstation)
3. Separate the unit from the mains using the mains switch on the bridge.
This way, the RADARPILOT Platinum program is terminated and the PC is shut down. The display will be
switched off automatically.
If the option Exit instead of Restart or Power Off is selected, a service password is required, to enter the
operating system level (only for service purposes).
Please avoid to switch off a MFD without having completed the described shut-
down procedure. The TFT display will probably function in a normal manner when
just switching off the power and then switching it on again. However, and this
applies to all types of PCs used: if, at the moment it is switched off, the PC
accesses the hard disk, the hard disk might be in seldom cases permanently
damaged resulting in system failure of the MFD and loss of data.
To switch on the MFD use the main power switch at the front of the workstation PC (if appl., refer to
the drawings in the delivery documents). It will then automatically start up and run in normal operating
state, Super Home is displayed. From here select the RADAR or ECDIS application. If the MFD is already
up and running and displaying a screensaver, just move the trackball slightly to display the graphical user
interface of the MFD.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 37

printed 14.07.15
Page 38 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
QUICK START GUIDE
RADARPILOT Platinum QUICK START GUIDE
Operating Instructions The S-Mode
1 The S-Mode
1.1 S-Mode Settings in ECDIS
The S-Mode is a pre-defined setting of the ECDIS presentation in order to meet the most typical naviga-
tional scenarios. It can be used during change of the watch to give the next nautical officer a well-known
ECDIS presentation regardless of the last operating sequence carried out before. It might be also helpful
for the pilot on entering the bridge.
The S-Mode button can be found in the bottom left menu line (see red arrow below).
Pressing the S-Mode button for ECDIS leads to the following settings:
• Range: 6 NM
• Orientation: North Up and True Motion
• Data entry for user symbols: Latitude/ Longitude input (UTM input is switched off)
The S-mode button has no effect on other settings like ARCS or ENC selection, target handling, disabled
dangerous target alarm, sensor selection, vector length, disabled alarm horn, disabled AIS transmitter,
or other. The user has to ensure that these settings are suitable for the actual traffic scenario.
The resulting screen after pressing the S-Mode button is as follows:
S-Mode Button
Fig. II / 1 Overview of the S-Mode for ECDIS
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 41

printed 14.07.15
QUICK START GUIDE RADARPILOT Platinum
The S-Mode Operating Instructions
1.2 S-Mode Settings for RADAR
In RADAR mode with activated ENC (chart radar) pressing the S-Mode button will set the chart presen-
tation to Primary. All other settings are not changed.
Page 42 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Man Overboard Function (MOB)
2 Man Overboard Function (MOB)
In case of a man overboard event just click to the corresponding symbol in the
bottom line of the menu bar:
Further steps are described on page 117.
Man Overboard Button
Fig. II / 2 Man Overboard Function
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 43

printed 14.07.15
Man Overboard Function (MOB) Operating Instructions
Page 44 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Brief Operating Instructions
3 Brief Operating Instructions
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 45

printed 14.07.15
Brief Operating Instructions Operating Instructions
Page 46 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
RADARPILOT Brief Operating Instructions – Page 1 – General Operating, Routes and Targets ('*5HYLVLRQ
General Info about Operating Chart and Route Monitoring Target List
Switching the Radar On/Off: 3ODWLQXPVWDUWVDX &KDUWREMHFWVRQO\ZLWK&KDUWRSWLRQ2SHQ!$ODUPV!2ZQVKLS and set 'LVWDQFH and 2SHQZLWK7RROV!7DUJHW!/LVW&OLFNRQFROXPQWLWOHWRVRUWURZVIRULHLQFUHDVLQJ5DQJH
WRPDWLFDOO\DIWHUSRZHURQIURPPDLQVZLWFKERDUG WidthRIORRNDKHDGVHFWRUDVUHTXLUHG2SHQ!$ODUPV!(&',6$OHUWV and DFWLYDWH6DIH DVVKRZQKHUH&OLFNDJDLQIRUGHFUHDVLQJRUGHUVHHVPDOOEODFNWULDQJOH&KHFNER[IRU
ZLWK6XSHU+RPH0HQX6HOHFWWKH5DGDU$SSOLFD tion W\&RQWRXU$ODUP6SHFLDO$UHDDQG2EVWUXFWLRQDKHDGLQGLFDWLRQDVUHTXLUHG2ZQ6KLS $XWR6RUWWRVRUWHYHU\PLQXWHDJDLQ0RYHFXUVRUWR&DSDFLW\WRVHHWKHUHPDLQLQJRQH
VZLWFKRQ WUDQVFHLYHU DQG DQWHQQD PRWRU E\ 6H O H F W 'UDIW6HWGUDIWLQ6HWWLQJV!'UDIWPHQXDVUHTXLUHGIRUFKDUWPRQLWRULQJ6\VWHP5RXWH IRU$53$IRU$,6IRU$,6VOHHSLQJ&OLFNWRDWDUJHWOLQHRUWRDWDUJHWV\PERO
WKH5DGDU7KH3ODWLQXPV\VWHPLVSHUPDQHQWO\XS and 2SHQDVDERYHDQGDFWLYDWH&ULWLFDOSRLQWRQURXWHDODUPIRUZD\SRLQWDSSURDFKDQG LQWKH33,WKHOLQHLVKLJKOLJKWHGLQEOXHWKHWDUJHWV\PEROLVPDUNHG5LJKWFOLFNWRD
UXQQLQJLWLVRQO\VKXWGRZQE\VHUYLFHSHUVRQQHOLQFDVHRIUHSDLUOperating the Track- &URVVWUDFN DODUPIRUURXWHGHYLDWLRQ,QD'LVWDQFHDVVHWDERYHEHIRUHWKHQH[W:23 WDUJHWOLQHDQGVHOHFWShow DetailsIRUIXUWKHULQIRDERXWWDUJHW7KHWDUJHWOLVWLVXSGDWHG
ball:0DQ\GLVSOD\¿HOGVRQVFUHHQDOVRDFWDVEXWWRQVRULQSXW¿HOGVRUGLDORJXH8VH ZKHHORYHUSRLQWDQDODUPLVUDLVHG7KHFURVVWUDFNHUURUOLPLWIRUDODUPLVWDNHQIURP SHULRGLFDOO\&ROXPQ$JHVKRZVDFWXDOLW\RI$,6GDWD
WUDFNEDOOWRPRYHFXUVRUWRGHVLUHG¿HOGDQGWKHQEULHÀ\SUHVV'2 or 025( NH\FDOOHG WKHDFWXDOURXWHOHJLQWKH;7'/,0FROXPQRIZD\SRLQWOLVWVHHEHORZ
FOLFN0RVWIXQFWLRQVDUHRSHUDWHGZLWK'2FOLFNLQJZLWK025(RSHQVDSXOOGRZQPHQX
ZLWKVHYHUDOHQWULHVZKHUHRQHKDVWREHVHOHFWHGZLWK'2Radar Keyboard: With this
RSWLRQDOGHYLFHWKHPRVWIUHTXHQWRSHUDWLQJSURFHGXUHVFDQDOWHUQDWLYHO\EHSHUIRUPHGE\
VLPSOHSUHVVLQJRINH\VRUE\SRWHQWLRPHWHUVNavigation Sidebar:1DYLJDWLRQDOIXQFWLRQV
DUHDUUDQJHGLQWKHWRSOHIWSHUPDQHQWDUHDWKH\DUHGHVFULEHGRQSDJH Tab Area:
)XUWKHUIXQFWLRQVDUHDUUDQJHGRQWDEVLQWKHERWWRPOHIWSDUW6HOHFWPDLQWDEDQGVXEWDE
WRRSHQDVSHFL¿FIXQFWLRQJURXSDVGHVFULEHGRQWKLVSDJHRIWKHLQVWUXFWLRQ
Zoom and Pan Control
&OLFNRQVOLGHULQWRSOHIWFRUQHURI33,WRDGMXVWUDQJHVHWWLQJIRUUDGDURU]RRP Alarms Navigation and Automation

IDFWRUIRU(&',6FKDUWGLVSOD\8VHWKHSDQEXWWRQVWRRIIFHQWUHWKHRZQVKLS&OLFN
RQWKHFHQWUHEXWWRQWRUHFHQWUHWKHVFUHHQ DUH VKRZQ LQ WKH VDPH SODFH DQG
LQ WKH VDPH ZD\ 7KH ODWHVW XQDFN
QRZOHGJHGDODUPZLWKKLJKHVWSULRULW\
Routes VKRZVXSLQDSHUPDQHQWDODUPKHDGOLQH7KHSULRULW\LVVKRZQRQWKHOHIWVLGHKHUHLWLV
DQDODUPUHGDOVRZDUQLQJRUDQJHDQGFDXWLRQ\HOORZ6WRSKRUQDQGDFNQRZOHGJH
DUHEDVHGRQZD\SRLQWOLVWVDQGVWRUHGLQ¿OHV2QHRUPRUHURXWHVFDQEHVHOHFWHGDQGRYHUODLG DVUHTXLUHG&OLFNRQWKHVPDOOEXWWRQRQWRSULJKWWRRSHQWKHIXOODODUPOLVW
Manual Target Acquisition
WRWKHUDGDUSLFWXUH7KHSUHSODQQHGWUDFNLVGLVSOD\HGDXWRPDWLFDOO\RQWKH33,DUHD2QHURX
WHFDQEHGH¿QHGDVWKH6\VWHP5RXWH6HOHFWD5RXWH6HOHFW7RROV!5RXWHV!([SORUHU in the
Radar PPI 6WDUW7DUJHW7UDFNLQJ0RYHSRLQWHURQWRSRIDQREMHFW3RLQWHUEHFRPHVHLWKHUDJXQ
7DE$UHD6HOHFWDIROGHUDQGIURPWKHUHDURXWH2SHQWKHURXWH2SHQZD\SRLQWOLVWYLDFRQWH[W
VLWHRUDKDQG&OLFNZLWK'2,QFDVHRIDJXQVLWHV\PEROWKHREMHFWLVPDUNHGDXWR
PHQXFOLFNZLWK025(RQURXWHHQWU\&OLFNWR5RXWHLQWRSOLQHWRVHOHFW6DYH&ORVH$FWLYDWH 6KRZVUDGDUHFKRHVDQG$,6WDUJHWVLQDSODQSRVL PDWLFDOO\DV$53$RU$,6WDUJHWDQGWUDFNLQJSURFHVVVWDUWV,QFDVHRIDKDQGV\PERO
6HWXS3ULQW3DVVDJH3ODQ5HYHUVHRU&KHFN5RXWH$UUDQJHFROXPQVRIOLVWE\VKLIWLQJWLWOH WLRQLQGLFDWRU33,$ERYH33,VKRZVRZQVKLSZLWK DPHQXSRSVXS6HOHFWHLWKHU$53$RU$,6DQGWUDFNLQJLVVWDUWLQJDVZHOO+LJKOLJKWD
¿HOGZLWKFXUVRUDGGRUKLGHFROXPQV&KHFND5RXWH&KHFNFRYHUVVDIHW\FRQWRXUVKDOORZ ORRNDKHDGVHFWRUDQGJXDUG]RQHV$53$WDUJHW 7DUJHW&OLFNZLWK'2RQDWUDFNHGWDUJHWLQWKH33,FRUUHVSRQGLQJHQWU\LVKLJKOLJKWHG
ZDWHUREMHFWVRZQVDIHW\OLQHVDQGGDQJHUKLJKOLJKWDUHDV7KHUHVXOWLVVKRZQLQWKHZD\SRLQW 06+DPEXUJLVLQ]RQHLQDODUPVWDWXV6XSSUHVV LQWKHWDUJHWOLVW&OLFNRQDQRWKHUWDUJHWDQGWKDWRQHLVKLJKOLJKWHG&OLFNRQDQHQWU\LQ
OLVWE\VPDOOLFRQVLQIURQWRIWKHZD\SRLQWQXPEHUV$FWLYDWHD5RXWH6HWWKHFKHFNHGURXWHDV UDLQFOXWWHUVRWKDWHGJHRIUDLQFORXGLVMXVWVKRZQ WKHOLVWDQGWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJWDUJHWLQWKH33,LVPDUNHGZLWK6HW&3$7&3$$ODUP
V\VWHPURXWH,WZLOOFKDQJHLWVFRORXUIURPRUDQJHWRUHGDQGZLOOEHGLVWULEXWHGIRUV\VWHPZLGH %RWWRPOD\HUVKRZV(&',6GDUN GHHSZDWHU 2SHQ!6HWWLQJV!7DUJHWDFWLYDWH'DQJHURXV7DUJHWV2QDQGVHWOLPLWVIRU&3$ and
XVHLHIRUWUDFNFRQWUROFKDUWGHSWKPRQLWRULQJDQGYR\DJHSODQQLQJ
7&3$WRWKHQDXWLFDOVLWXDWLRQ$WUDFNHGWDUJHWIDOOLQJVKRUWRI&3$7&3$ZLOOFDXVHDQ
DODUP:LWK$XWR $&4DXWRPDWLFDFWLYDWLRQRIGDQJHURXV$,6WDUJHWVFDQEHVHOHFWHG
&DQFHO7UDFNLQJ&OLFNRQDWDUJHWV\PEROZLWK025(DPHQXRSHQVLQWKH33,VHOHFW
7DUJHWDVHFRQGPHQXRSHQVLQWKH33,FKRRVH&DQFHOWRVWRSWUDFNLQJIRUDQ$53$
$,6RU$OOWDUJHWV
Reference Target Tracking To check or replace
Trial Manoeuvre VXVSLFLRXVVSHHGGDWD\RXPD\PHDVXUHRZQVKLS¶VVSHHGUHODWLYHWRD Automatic Target Acquisition / Guard Zones

VHWRI¿[HG$53$WDUJHWV6HOHFW7DUJHWV&OLFNRQD¿[HG$53$WDUJHWZLWK
6ZLWFKWR5(/ in the 9HFWRU 7UDLOVJURXS,QWKH7DUJHWVJURXSFKRRVH2QIRU7ULDOFRQWURO 025(VHOHFW5()7DUJHW2Q2IIZLWK'2UHSHDWIRUXSWR¿YHWDUJHWV 7ZRDFTXLVLWLRQ]RQHVDUHDYDLODEOH$FWLYDWHDQGDGMXVWDVUHTXLUHG$GMXVW5DQJH
ERWKPHQXVLQSHUPDQHQWDUHD7KH7ULDO0DQRHXYUHGLDORJZLQ $FWLYDWH6HQVRU6HOHFW5()7*76SHHGIURPVHQVRUVHOHFWLRQPHQX,W &OLFNRQWKHDUFWKDWGH¿QHVWKHJXDUG]RQHDQGXVHWKHVPDOOKDQGOHWRGUDJWKH]RQH
GRZDSSHDUVZLWKFXUUHQWFRXUVH VSHHGUDGLXVXVHGODVWWLPH LVWUHDWHGDVJURXQGVWDELOL]HGVSHHGVHQVRU&2*62*EXWQHYHUXVHG WRWKHGHVLUHGVL]H$GMXVW$QJOH&OLFNRQWKHDQJOHOLQHWKDWGH¿QHVWKHJXDUG]RQH
VWDUW GHOD\ DQG WLPH LQVWDQW RI VLPXODWLRQ 6HW SODQQHG FRXUVH IRUFDOFXODWLRQRIUHODWLYHVSHHGRI$,6WDUJHWV,IWDUJHWVJHWORVWDQHZ DQGXVHWKHVPDOOKDQGOHWRGUDJWKH]RQHWRGHVLUHGDQJOHVHWWLQJLVUHODWLYHWRVKLS
VSHHGDQGUDGLXV6HWVWDUWGHOD\IRUFRXUVHDQGRUVSHHGPD VSHHGVHQVRUKDVWREHVHOHFWHG2WKHUZLVHVSHHGLQYDOLGDODUPLVWULJ KHDGLQJLHWKHJXDUG]RQHWXUQVZLWKVKLS¶VKHDGLQJ$FTXLVLWLRQ$Q\UDGDUHFKRDQG
QRHXYUH :DON DORQJ WLPH D[LV E\ PRYLQJ WKH WLPH VOLGHU DQG JHUHG'HOHWH7DUJHW&OLFNRQ5()WDUJHWZLWK025(VHOHFW5()7DUJHW $,6WDUJHWWKDWHQWHUVRQHRIWKH]RQHVZLOOEHDFTXLUHGDFWLYDWHGDQGDQDODUPZLOOEH
REVHUYHFULWLFDOVFHQDULRV 2Q2IIZLWK'2 UDLVHG$IWHUDFNQRZOHGJHPHQWWKHDXWRPDWLFWDUJHWWUDFNLQJEHJLQV
RADARPILOT Brief Operating Instructions – Page 2 – Navigation Sidebar and Radar Settings ('*5HYLVLRQ
Display Position Select the Radar
Orientation: 6HOHFW+HDG6WDE+HDG8S1RUWK8S&RXUVH8S 3RVLWLRQVHQVRUFDQEHVHWWR$8727KHEHVWDYDLODEOHVHQVRULVFKRVHQDXWRPD &OLFNRQWRSOLQHRIUDGDUJURXSVHOHFWDWUDQVFHLYHU7;IURPWKHOLVWWKHFKRVHQ7;DQG

+HDGLQJSRLQWVXSZDUGVUDGDUYLGHRPRYHVZLWK\DZLQJRIVKLSEHDULQJVFDOHVWDEL WLFDOO\,IDVHQVRUIDLOVWKHEDFNXSVHQVRULIDYDLODEOHLVFKRVHQDQGDZDUQLQJLV DQWHQQDPRWRUDUHDFWLYDWHGLIQRW\HWGRQHE\DQRWKHUZRUNVWDWLRQ,I1R7;6HOHFWHGLV
OL]HGZLWKJ\URVKRZLQJWUXHEHDULQJ$VDERYHEXWEHDULQJVDFHO¿[HGWRERZ JLYHQ&OLFNRQ/$7OLQH DQGVHOHFWDVHQVRUPDQXDOO\LIUHTXLUHG&OLFNRQ$GMXVWWR FKRVHQWKH7;LVWXUQHGRIIDQGLWVDQWHQQDVWRSVURWDWLRQLIQRWVWLOOVHOHFWHGE\DQRWKHU
*HRJUDSKLFQRUWKSRLQWVXSZDUGVUDGDUYLGHRLVVWDELOL]HGZLWKJ\UR open the 2IIVHW 0HQXWRDOLJQWKHUDGDUYLGHRZLWKWKHFKDUWLIUHTXLUHG ZRUNVWDWLRQ)RUGLVSOD\LQJRI7;VWDWXVPRYHSRLQWHUWR7;RILQWHUHVWOHWLWVWD\IRUD
&RXUVHDWWKHLQVWDQWRIVZLWFKRQRIWKLVPRGHSRLQWVXSZDUGVUDGDUYLGHRLVWKHUH VHFRQGDQGDVPDOOZLQGRZZLOOVKRZVWDWXV$7;ZLWKVWDWXV1RW&RQQHFWHGFDQQRWEH
DIWHUVWDELOL]HGZLWKJ\URUHRULHQWDWLRQE\025(FOLFNRQ&RXUVH8SLQGLFDWRU$IWHU FRQWUROOHGDQGVKRZVDIDLOXUHVWDWXVLIVHOHFWHG$Q$ODUPLVJHQHUDWHGDVZHOO
Vectors and Trails
VZLWFKRYHUDQGUHRULHQWDWLRQWDUJHWWUDLOVDUHQRWLQÀXHQFHGUHPDLQYLVLEOH Select Master WR FRQWURO WKH VHOHFWHG7; LQ WHUPV RI SXOVH UDWH HWF7KH ZRUNVWDWLRQ
Range: 6HOHFW33,UDGLXVIURP10WR10RUPRUPIRUGRFNLQJ,QDOO ZKLFKZDVLQFRQWUROEHIRUHFKDQJHVWRVODYHPRGH
7KHVWDELOLVDWLRQRIYHFWRUVSORWVDQGWUDLOVFDQEHVHWWR5(/RU7UXH,IWKHUHLVDQ\
UDQJHVGLVWDQFHVDUHVWDWHGLQ10DQGVSHHGVLQNQUDQJHVHOHFWLRQFDQDOVREHGRQH Select /RQJ3XOVHWRLPSURYHWDUJHWYLVLELOLW\DWKLJKHUUDQJHVGHOLYHUVVWURQJHUEXWOHVV
GRXEWWKDWRZQVKLSVVSHHGGDWDDUHQRWFRUUHFWXVH5(/WDUJHWGDWDDQG5(/33,
E\UDGDUNH\ERDUG DFFXUDWHHFKRHV,IWDUJHWHQKDQFHPHQWLVDFWLYHWKHVWURQJHUHFKRHVDUHDEOHWRLPSUR
SUHVHQWDWLRQIRUFROOLVLRQDYRLGDQFH
REF: 6HOHFW5HIHUHQFH3RVLWLRQIRUWKLVZRUNVWDWLRQ YHDZHDNUDGDUSLFWXUH&OLFNRQ$GMXVWLQPDVWHUPRGHWRVHWPDQXDORUDXWRPWXQLQJ
)RUYHFWRUVDQGWUDLOVWKHVWDELOLVDWLRQFDQEHVHWWR*URXQGRU:DWHU6HWWKHOHQJWK
&&53PHDVXUHPHQWVVWDWHGUHODWLYHWRFRQQLQJSRVLWLRQ&&53 DQGLQWHUIHUHQFHUHMHFWLRQLIDQGUDGDUGLVWXUEV,I0XOWL$QWHQQD2SWLRQLVLQVWDOOHGD
RIYHFWRUVWUDLOVSORWVDQGSDWKSUHGLFWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRWKHQDXWLFDOVLWXDWLRQ2ZQ
5DGDUPHDVXUHPHQWVVWDWHGUHODWLYHWRVHOHFWHGUDGDUDQWHQQD JURXSRIWUDQVFHLYHUV0;FDQEHVHOHFWHG,IRQH7;RIWKHJURXSIDLOVWKHZKROHJURXS
VKLS¶VSRVLWLRQSORWLVRQO\GLVSOD\HGDVWUXHSORWLQGHSHQGHQWRI75(/VHWWLQJ3ORWV
7UDFNPHDVXUHPHQWVVWDWHGUHODWLYHWR6\VWHP3RVLWLRQLQWKHERZRIWKHVKLSXVHG LVLQDFWLYHVZLWFKEDFNWRDVLQJOH7;
DQGRZQVKLSSDWKSUHGLFWLRQDUHDOZD\VJURXQGVWDELOLVHG
IRU DXWRPDWLF WUDFN FRQWURO DQG DOVR IRU FDOFXODWLRQ RI VKLS GDWD UHODWLYH WR URXWH
FRXUVHDQGWUDFNGHYLDWLRQGULIWDQJOHEHDULQJGLVWDQFHDQGWLPHWRJRWRZD\SRLQW
DQGZKHHORYHUSRLQWSRVLWLRQSORWVDQGSDVWWUDFN,QHDFKFDVHWKHPLQLPL]HGVKLS Set the Radar Video
V\PEROLQFOKHDGLQJOLQHVSHHGYHFWRU(%/950UDQJHULQJVDQGVWHUQOLQHDUH
VWDUWLQJIURPVHOHFWHGUHIHUHQFHSRVLWLRQDOOWRROVDQGWKHJUDSKLFFXUVRUDUHZRUNLQJ Tuning:$XWRPDWLFWXQLQJLVGHIDXOWPDQXDOLVSRVVLEOH VHHDERYH*DLQ&OLFNRQVOLGHU
DQGLQGLFDWLQJUHODWLYHWRWKLVSRLQW7KHWUXHVFDOHGRZQVKLSV\PEROLQGLFDWHVWKH DQGDGMXVWYDOXHVRWKDWQRLVHLQ33,MXVWEHFRPHVLQYLVLEOHFDQDOVREHVHWE\JDLQ
VHOHFWHGUDGDUDQWHQQDE\DFURVV WXUQLQJNQRERQUDGDUNH\ERDUG
Stabilisation: 6ZLWFKRQ7UXH0RWLRQRU5HODWLYH0RWLRQ 6HD5DLQDQG9LGHR(PSKDVLV
True Motion (TM) –5DGDUYLGHRLV¿[HGRZQVKLSV\PEROPRYHVDFURVVWKHVFUHHQ33, Select10UDQJHVHW6HD5DLQDQG(PSKDVLVWRRURII6HW*DLQDVDERYHVR
FKDUWDUHDRULHQWDWLRQLV1RUWK8SRU&RXUVH8SRZQVKLSV\PEROLVUHVHWEHIRUH33,FKDUW WKDWQRLVHEHFRPHVMXVWLQYLVLEOH6ZLWFKWRDFWXDOUDQJHLH10,QFDVHRIVHDFOXWWHU
DUHDERXQGDU\LVUHVHWWDNHVSODFHDWRIIVHWFDQEHVHWLQ(&',6PRGH LQFUHDVH6HD¿OWHUXQWLOFOXWWHUMXVWGLVDSSHDUVEXWWDUJHWVDUHVWLOOYLVLEOHRUVHW¿OWHUWR
Relative Motion (RM) – 2ZQVKLSµVSRVLWLRQLV¿[HGUDGDUYLGHRPRYHVUHODWLYHWRRZQ $872,QFDVHRIUDLQFOXWWHUDGMXVW5DLQZLWKVOLGHUXQWLOUDLQFORXGMXVWGLVDSSHDUVEXW
VKLS\RXPD\FKRRVHEHWZHHQ+HDG8S1RUWK8SDQG&RXUVH8S WDUJHWVDUHVWLOOYLVLEOH6ZLWFKRQ9LGHR(PSKDVLVWRHQODUJHVPDOOHFKRHVZDLWDIHZ
5LQJV)L[HGUDQJHULQJVFDQEHGLVSOD\HGZLWKUHIHUHQFHSRVLWLRQDVWKHFHQWUHWKHUDGLL VHFRQGVLQFUHDVHJDLQVORZO\XQWLOWDUJHWVDUHFOHDUO\YLVLEOH(PSKDVLVLVDVFDQWR
RIWKHULQJVDUHGHSHQGLQJRQWKHVHOHFWHGUDQJHZLWKULQJGLVWDQFHVRIW\SLFDOO\RU VFDQFRUUHODWLRQWHFKQLTXHWRHQKDQFHVPDOOWDUJHWVRQQRLV\EDFNJURXQGQHHGVVRPH
RIGLVSOD\UDQJH WLPHFRXOGVXSSUHVVIDVWWDUJHWV
Headline
Parallel Index Lines (PI)
,IQRWLPHGDWDDYDLODEOHIURP*36\HOORZLFRQFOLFNRQ WRDGMXVWWLPH&OLFNRQ
6HOHFWRQHWRIRXUSDUDOOHOLQGH[OLQHVE\FKHFNLQJWKHER[HVLQWKH3,JURXS6HOHFWHG
WRDGMXVWEULOOLDQFH,IVFUHHQLVQHDUO\GDUNPRYHFXUVRUWRWRSOHIWFRUQHU &KDUWV OLQHVDUHVXSHULPSRVHGLQWKH33,DSSHDULQJZLWKWKHVDPHGDWDDVGLVSOD\HGODVWWLPH
SUHVV'2VHYHUDOWLPHVEULOOLDQFHFRPHVXSDJDLQ,IDYDLODEOHXVHNH\ERDUG 'LVWDQFHRIDOLQHLVDOWHUHGE\FOLFNLQJRQLWDVPDOOÄKDQGOH³DSSHDUVFOLFNDQGKROG
6ZLWFKRQWKHoptionalFKDUWEDFNJURXQGLILQVWDOOHGE\VHOHFWLQJ(1& or &0DS FKDUW KDQGOHDQGGUDJOLQHWRGHVLUHGGLVWDQFH
Heading & Speed GDWDEDVH&KDUWGLVSOD\VHWWLQJVDUHDYDLODEOHXQGHU3UHVHQWDWLRQ!&KDUW!'LVSOD\)RU %HDULQJLVDOWHUHGE\FOLFNLQJRQLWWKHQFOLFNDQGKROGOLQHDQ\ZKHUHEXWQRWRQWKHVPDOO
GHWDLOVRIWKHFKDUWRSWLRQUHIHUWREULHIRSHUDWRULQVWUXFWLRQV(&',63,/27 DGGRSWLRQ KDQGOHDQGURWDWHLWWRWKHGHVLUHGEHDULQJ7KHEDOORRQWH[WVKRZVWKHDFWXDOEHDULQJDQG
+HDGLQJDQGVSHHGVHQVRULQSXWFDQEHVHWWR$8727KHEHVWDYDLODEOHVHQVRULVFKRVHQ GLVWDQFHGDWDRIWKHOLQH%HDULQJLVGLVSOD\HGDVWUXH7DQGUHODWLYH5(/
DXWRPDWLFDOO\,IDVHQVRUIDLOVWKHEDFNXSVHQVRULIDYDLODEOHLVFKRVHQDQGDZDUQLQJLV 7DUJHWV
JLYHQ&OLFN VHOHFWDVHQVRUPDQXDOO\LIUHTXLUHG EBL and VRM (Toolset 1 & 2)
!)RUKHDGLQJDPDQXDOLQSXWRIWKHYDOXHLVQRWDYDLODEOH$Q\J\URRIIVHWKDVWREHLQSXW )XVLRQ$53$ $,6WDUJHWVDUHGLVSOD\HGVLPXOWDQHRXVO\,IIXVLRQOLPLWVDUHPHW
DWWKHFRPSDVVV\VWHP ERWKFDQEHPHUJHG6HOHFW2II$53$RU$,6WRVHWSULRULW\IRUVKRZLQJ$53$RU$,6 (DFKWRROVHWRIIHUVDYDULDEOHUDQJHPDUNHU950DQGHOHFWURQLFEHDULQJOLQH(%/
!)RUVSHHGDPDQXDOYDOXHFDQEHHQWHUHG&OLFNRQWKH67:OLQHVSHHGWKURXJKZD V\PEROVRUERWK EBL: &KHFN(%/ER[LQWRROVHWRUJURXS(%/LVVXSHULPSRVHGLQ33,DSSHDUVDVGLV
WHUVHOHFW6HW6SHHGDQGHQWHUWKHYDOXH)LQDOO\VHOHFW0DQXDOWRDFWLYDWHWKHVHWWLQJ 6OHHSLQJ 6HOHFW W\SH RI$,6 VOHHSLQJ WDUJHWV WR EH GLVSOD\HG DQG OLVWHG $OO$,6 SOD\HGODVWWLPHDOWHUEHDULQJE\DFOLFNRQLWLQ33,KDQGOHDSSHDUVFOLFN KROGKDQGOH
6SHHGRYHUJURXQG62*FDQEHVHWPDQXDOO\DVZHOOVHOHFW6HW6SHHGDQG6HW'ULIW &ODVV$&ODVV%QRQH,QDQ\FDVHDOOUHFHLYHG$,6WDUJHWLQIRLVSURFHVVHGDQG SXOOOLQHWRGHVLUHGEHDULQJLIUHTXLUHGFOLFNDQGSXOORULJLQWRGHVLUHGSRVLWLRQVRM: &KHFN
NH\LQWKHYDOXHVWKHQDFWLYDWH0DQXDO7KHFRXUVHRYHUJURXQG&2*LVFDOFXODWHG FDXVHVDQDODUPZKHQHQWHULQJJXDUG]RQHV$XWRPDWLFDFTXLVLWLRQRIGDQJHURXV 950ER[LQWRROVHWRUJURXS950LVVXSHULPSRVHGLQ33,DSSHDUVDVGLVSOD\HGODVW
$<HOORZ6\PEROLQIURQWRIDVHQVRUODEHOLQGLFDWHVWKDWWKHYDOXHKDVEHHQHQWHUHG WDUJHWVFDQEHVZLWFKHGRQXQGHU6HWWLQJV!7DUJHW WLPHDOWHUUDQJHE\FOLFNRQLWLQ33,IRXUKDQGOHVDSSHDUFOLFN KROGWRSXOOWKHULQJWR
PDQXDOO\$5HG6\PEROVKRZVVHQVRURUV\VWHPIDLOXUH 7ULDO6HHUHYHUVHVLGHRIWKLVLQVWUXFWLRQ WKHGHVLUHGUDGLXV
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
RADARPILOT Platinum GENERAL FUNCTIONS
Operating Instructions The Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS)
1 The Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS)
This navigation system is designed as a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS). It references all
horizontal measurements such as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, closest point of
approach (CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA) to one single point on-board, the Consistent
Common Reference Point (CCRP), typically the conning position of the bridge.
The offset between the installation location of a navigation sensor i.e. for position, speed, or heading
and the CCRP is compensated by the RADARPILOT Platinum system 1).
The CCRP can be selected by the user, the default setting is the conning position 2). The relations are
shown in the following two diagrams.
Measurements relative to
the Conning Position
(CCRP = Conning)
The chart monitoring func-

tion of the ECDIS sub-
system is done for the Track
Control or for the Conning
Position depending on the
user set reference REF, i.e.
the guard sector (also called
look-ahead sector) starts at
the bow of the ship or at the
bridge. Length and width of
the sector can be adjusted
in the ECDIS application.
Fig. III / 1 CCRP on ECDIS
For measurements relative to the own ship (EBL, VRM, Cursor, target data) on the RADARPILOT Platinum
the Conning Position is used normally. In contrast to a RADAR system, where the reference may also be
the position of the radar antenna, in a stand-alone ECDIS no alternative reference position than the Track
Control position can be selected by the operator.
1) If a RADAR application is installed, the offset between a radar antenna position and the CCRP is compen-
sated as well. If multiple antennas are installed, there is a provision for applying different position offsets
for each antenna in the radar system. The offsets are applied automatically when any radar sensor is
selected
2) For comparison with radar it can be set to the just selected radar antenna.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 51

printed 14.07.15
GENERAL FUNCTIONS RADARPILOT Platinum
The Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) Operating Instructions
Page 52 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Graphical User Interface
2 Graphical User Interface
2.1 Super Home
Super Home is the first screen that is displayed on screen after start-up of the MFD. Super Home will
help you in quickly starting the main applications, and provide help in finding specific functions through
the home pages of the individual applications. When you are working with the system, you can return
to Super Home by using the Super Home shortcut in the main menu or the button.
Super Home provides links to:
• All main applications´ start pages: RADAR, ECDIS monitoring, ECDIS planning, Conning and
Machinery / Automation
• Secondary applications like AIS, Autopilot, Maintenance and possibly third party applications
• Documents that help you getting started.
Super Home has a title bar and menu bar, for details see page 55. Clicking on the button will open
the Super Home page regardless of the current active application.
Fig. III / 2 Super Home Page
The top row of applications of the Super Home page displays the main or primary applications that are
installed in the system, in the example: RADAR, ECDIS, Machinery, and Conning. The thumbnail pictures
of the applications are click-able and will link to the respective application. For example, if you click on
the RADAR thumbnail, this will open the RADAR application.
The first link below the thumbnail of a main application is the link to the start page of the application.
Additional links will lead you to important functions in the applications. The second line of thumbnails
contains shortcuts to groups of functionality that are considered a logical group or additional application.
For familiarization with the product, it is possible to select from the quick-links:
• Take the Tour opens a presentation with a short introduction into the operating.
• Read Documentation opens a PDF viewer with this manual.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 53

printed 14.07.15
Graphical User Interface Operating Instructions
2.2 Application Screen Layout
Each application comprises two main areas: the sidebar and the application area.
The sidebar on the left provides access to details and functions of the applications.
The application area located on the right shows the main window of the active application, i.e. the ECDIS
chart or a RADAR indicator.
Title Bar
Navigation
Sidebar
Application Area
Tools Sidebar
Menu Bar
Fig. III / 3 General Screen Layout of the RADARPILOT Platinum
The general screen layout, especially the size of the different areas, may vary between the different
available applications.
Page 54 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.3 Title Bar
The title bar provides information and functions which are permanently available in the system.
Fig. III / 4 ECDIS Title Bar
The figure above shows an example of the title bar with the ECDIS application being the active applica-
tion. The information and functions provided are explained in the following.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 55

printed 14.07.15
2.3.1 Brilliance
You can use the / buttons in the top left corner to toggle between the available color schemes
for different ambient light conditions. The button for raising the brilliance is the most top left button,
which can be even hit with the mouse if the whole screen is nearly dark.
Five different color schemes are available for different ambient light conditions. The brilliance is toggled
between 5%, 20%, 60%, 80% and 100%.
☞ The brilliance of the monitor does not change stepwise, in fact it changes smoothly from the
previous setting to the actual desired value.
100% 20%
Fig. III / 5 Color Schemes of the Color & Settings
However, you can also individually adjust the brilliance of the screen. If you press the MORE key (right-
click) on the / button to open the Brilliance menu. To adjust the settings, click on the right or
left of the slider or drag the slider. The new value is shown on the right and the screen’s settings are
adjusted accordingly.
☞ There are no knobs or other controls on the monitor(s) to adjust the brightness.
The use of the brightness controls may inhibit visibility of information, particularly when
using the night color tables!
Later SW versions are fitted with a central dimming function.

Press the MORE key (right-click) on the / button to
open the Brilliance menu and check the box for Central
Dimming in order to take part in the central dimming. If the
brilliance is changed at one MFD (workstation), all MFD will
take part. Dimming can be changed at any MFD. If the box
is not checked, dimming is adjusted only individually for this
MFD.
Remote Dimming: A MFD may be configured during commissioning to broadcast its dimming level to
dedicated remote devices like universal data displays. The dimming level is coded in four steps (day,
dusk, night, off) and is transferred via NMEA message DDC on a serial line. Once configured this function
has to be switched on and off at the remote device.
Page 56 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.3.2 Date and Time
Both date and time will be displayed permanently in the title bar:
Click here to change

date and time
Fig. III / 6 Date and Time Display
The symbol indicates that external synchronization of system time is not available – so that system
time is running on the internal clock in the time-master DPU. Once the external time source becomes
available again, i.e. from received ZDA sentence of GPS receiver, the time is adjusted accordingly, and
the yellow symbol disappears. In that case no user settings are possible.
To set Date/Time if the GPS time is missing, click on the small

arrow at the very right (see red arrow). A dialogue window opens.
The operation of the controls is self-explanatory, do not forget to
click on Set for each subgroup (UTC Time, Time Zone, Display)
which has been corrected.
Click on Close to leave the dialogue.
Note:
The Date/Time setting is synchronized system-wide; settings
made on one RADARPILOT Platinum are also available on all other
connected stations.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 57

printed 14.07.15
2.3.3 Alive Indication
There are different possibilities available to verify the alive status of the PC which are listed and explained
below.
The Time Display

The system provides feedback that it is still active and operating, i.e. alive. This is specifically indicated
in the title bar by the seconds changing in the time display.
If picture freeze occurs, all data on the screen as well as the display of the seconds will be frozen, so
that the operator is able to notice this fault.
The Cursor and the Application

Picture freeze caused by the computer or the graphics adapter of the PC can also be recognized by the
fact that moving the trackball or the mouse does no longer change the cursor position on the screen.
If the computer or its application software has a severe fault it can also happen that the cursor is still
moving but a click on any menu button is no longer working correctly.
The Monitor
A green LED at the lower right corner of the monitor indicates the running connection to the PC
computer. If the connection is lost or disturbed, or the display has been switched off, the LED will stay
green but start flashing once per second and the screen will normally become dark. If the LED changes
to orange the monitor is in stand-by mode waiting for sync signal, red indicates the switched off status.
The LED will flash red in case of excessive temperatures.
The Panel PC
The Panel PC combines monitor and PC in one system. Therefore the status of the LED is slightly
different. A green LED at the lower right corner of the monitor indicates the running PC. If the LED
changes to orange the monitor is in standby mode waiting for the correct full resolution sync signal from
the internal PC, red indicates the starting sequence where the PC is just loading the BIOS. The LED will
flash red in case of excessive temperatures. If the display has been temporarily switched off by the user
or the Panel PC has been switched off, the LED is off as well.
Page 58 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions The Navigation Sidebar
3 The Navigation Sidebar
As mentioned before, the screen is divided into the application area and the sidebar.
Navigation
sidebar
Fig. III / 7 The Navigation Sidebar 1)
The sidebar itself is divided into the Navigation Sidebar and the Tools Sidebar.
The Navigation Sidebar contains the navigation data controls and indicators.
The Tools Sidebar provides menus for presentation, settings and tools.
The elements are grouped. In the following chapters, each group of the Navigation Sidebar will be
described separately.
1) Later SW versions coming along with slightly different graphical design
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 59

printed 14.07.15
The Navigation Sidebar Operating Instructions
3.1 Display
This group affects the general settings of the applica- Screen stabilization
tion area:
- the screen orientation (North-up, Head-up,...)

- the movement of the own ship on the screen
In ECDIS only
- the display range and the range rings
- the CCRP, i.e. the reference point on your ship used for calculation of the system data like COG,
SOG, CTW/STW and position and for calculation of the ship-relative data like bearing and distance
of EBL and VRM and the cursor in the application area.
Details can be found in the subsequent chapters.
Page 60 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.1.1 Orientation
Displays a radar video or chart picture in three different ways:

- Head-Up: The heading of own ship points upwards, the radar video or
chart picture is moving with the yawing of the ship
- North-Up: Geographic north points upwards, the radar video or chart
picture is stabilized with the gyro heading
- Course-Up: The course which exists at the instant of switch-on or re-
orientation of this mode points upwards, the radar video or chart picture is Earlier SW Version
thereafter stabilized with the gyro heading. In Course-Up Mode a click with
MORE on the Course-Up indicator takes over the current heading as the
new reference heading.
☞ After switch-over and re-orientation, the target trails are not influenced; they remain visible in the
new mode.
☞ Selection of Head-Up automatically switches back the ECDIS to Monitoring mode because the Plan-
ning or Browse mode is only supported in North-Up and Course-Up orientation.
In later SW versions one mode is added as follows:

- Head Stab (was Head Up with gyro before): The heading of own
ship points upwards, the radar video or chart picture is moving with the
yawing of the ship. The bearing scale is stabilized with the gyro signal
showing the true bearing 1).
- Head Up (was Head Up without gyro before): The heading of own
ship points upwards, the radar video or chart picture is moving with the
yawing of the ship. The bearing scale is fixed showing the relative bearing Later SW Version
to bow (the standard mode for radar operation as known from the very
first days of radar usage on-board).
All other modes remain as described above!
Head Stab Head Up North Up

(Head Up, stabilized) (Head Up, not stabilized) (North Up, stabilized)
1) The definitions for Head Stab and Head Up are following the new Edition 2 of the IEC radar standard 62388.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 61

printed 14.07.15
3.1.2 Range
The display range can be chosen from a selection of ten nautical ranges (PPI
radius between 0.25 NM and 96 NM) and two docking ranges (PPI radius 250 m
and 500 m).
☞ In the nautical range and also in the docking ranges, all distances are stated
in NM and all speeds in kn.
☞ If the range selection is done by means of the radar keyboard, the ranges are
selected stepwise (up or down).
☞ If instead of ENC an ARCS chart has been selected by the user, the range indi-
cation is given by the available scales of the installed ARCS charts and
displayed i.e. like 1 : 75.000
The Range can also be set by means of the optional radar keyboard or by the zoom
control.
RANGE
Page 62 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.1.3 Rings
Fixed range rings can be displayed. Range rings are concentric circles with the reference position as their
center 1), and are situated at equal distances from one another.
Depending on the selected range, the radii of the rings and the distances between them are different:
Range 250m 500m 0,25NM 0,5NM 0,75NM 1,5NM 3NM 6NM 12NM 24NM 48NM 96NM
Distance 50m 100m 0,05NM 0,1NM 0,25NM 0,25NM 0,5NM 1,0NM 2NM 4NM 8NM 16NM
Ring
Table III / 1 Range Rings
1) For reference position see page 51
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 63

printed 14.07.15
3.1.4 REF - Reference for CCRS
The Reference Position for all nautical tasks carried out by the user on his
RADARPILOT Platinum workstation is fixed to the CCRP (conning) and the Track
position at the bow. For radar applications the Radar position is added in the
selection list.
Page 64 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.1.5 Screen Stabilization
Examples for True/Relative Motion and Head-/North-/

Course-Up
The figures on the next two pages are showing screen excerpts
from two possible instants of the same scenario.
They are shown schematically for the five possible Monitoring
display modes as there are True Motion, Centered Display,
North-up Relative Motion, Course-up relative Motion, and Head-
up Relative Motion:
Instant 1
- Own ship's course 60°, speed 20 kn
- Two moving targets, courses 60° and 150°, speed 10 kn for both
- Two fixed targets
- Two grid lines showing the alignment of the electronic chart
Instant 2
The same scenario, but after an own ship's course change to 10° (all other data unchanged).
Displays of the following are set: Own ship symbol, course and speed vectors, past plots of the targets.
Except in the case of True Motion, the center of the screen excerpt shown is the own ship's position
that was set with Set center function of the context menu in the PPI/Chart Area.
☞ The display of the own ship symbol is depending on user selection and on the selected display range
if "true scaled" is switched on in the Presentation tab.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 65

printed 14.07.15
Instant 1 Instant 2
True Motion (with true vectors and past plots)
Instant 1 Instant 2
centered Display (with true vectors and past plots)
Fig. III / 8 Display in the Modes True Motion and centered Display
Page 66 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
In this mode, the headline is shown as a short, thick line.

Instant 1 Instant 2
North-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)
Instant 1 Instant 2
Course-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)
Instant 1 Instant 2
Head-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)
Fig. III / 9 Display in the Modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 67

printed 14.07.15
3.2 Navigation Sensors
This chapter describes the navigation sensors available in the system. The main navigation sensors used
for the heading, speed and position instruments are monitored depending on the “sensor selection
mode”. Those sensors which are available twice or more in the installation can be supported by an auto-
matic selection mode indicated by AUTO in the different displays.
The automatic selection mode is the default setting after start or restart of the
system.
- If the selection mode is AUTO the switching over to another sensor of the same type is done with
a warning indicating the new sensor selection.
- In AUTO mode the switch over to a manual sensor (Manual Speed or Manual Position) is accompa-
nied by an alarm if the manual data have not been set before.
- If the manual sensor selection is chosen the switching over to the backup sensor must be done
manually after the respective alarm or warning has been given.
- In the meantime (until a new sensor has been selected) the system is using the last valid values of
the disturbed or faulty sensor which produced the alarm.
- It is required to perform the switch over to the new sensor as soon as possible, but not before its
data have been checked for plausibility and correctness.
In any case (in manual or automatic sensor selection mode) the set data for the
sensors running in manual mode must be checked regularly and a real sensor
must be selected as soon as possible.
Details are given in chapter ALARMS as required in the explanations to the different sensor alarms.
Page 68 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2.1 Integrity Marking of Sensors
In RADARPILOT Platinum a qualitative marking of sensors by alarm icons is used.

For this purpose the main navigation sensors used for the instruments in the permanent area are contin-
uously monitored by the system. If the signal of a sensor is no longer received or is corrupted, or if it
is marked invalid by the sensor itself or by the navigation system internal sensor monitoring, a respective
"sensor timeout" or a "sensor invalid" alarm message is given for the faulty sensor.
In case of activated AUTO selection mode another connected sensor (if available) is automatically
connected to the RADARPILOT Platinum application and the data remain available and valid.
If this is not possible, or if the manual selection mode is used, the sensor will be marked invalid
by an alarm icon shown before the sensor label in the instruments displayed on the permanent
area.
This can happen for the heading (HDG), speed through water or over ground (STW or SOG), and for
course over ground (COG) labels in the Heading & Speed group and for the position data.
If the manual input mode is selected (caused by sensor failure or decision of the operator) and
the manually set data are used for any navigation sensor, this will be shown by the icon, which
is indicating manual input mode.
On a vessel at sea manually set sensor data are generally to be treated as doubtful and with low integrity
as they must permanently be monitored and adapted to the real situation by the operator.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 69

printed 14.07.15
3.2.2 General about Heading and Speed
This group displays information about the actual values for

heading and speed and offers the possibilities to choose
different heading and speed sensors 1).
In front of each depiction of one of the sensors, there may
be a symbol indicating a warning or an alarm.
Yellow
Input from the process is disconnected in the software, and the value is entered manually by
the operator
Red
Error in the Control and Supervision system, the indication is invalid or the value received
from the sensor is outside the legal limits
Table III / 2 Integrity Marking for Heading/Speed Sensor Data
1) The sensor selection list is depending on the navigation sensors connected to the system.
Page 70 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2.3 HDG - Heading Sensor
Be aware that a missing or wrong speed input to the compass system can also produce
remarkable course errors.
The value for heading is the direction the bow of the own ship is pointing at. It is
derived from the compass system of the ship. Behind the heading value, the actual
choice and the selection mode of the heading sensor is displayed.
Auto
Means that the heading sensor is chosen by the system automatically. The best
available sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actual sensor, the backup
sensor is chosen, if available, and a warning is given.
Gyro x
From the number of gyro compasses that are connected to the system, one can be chosen to be used
as heading sensor. Sensor selection mode is manual.
Manual 1)
The actual course of the own ship can be entered manually. In
case a manual value is present, the indication of the value is
preceded by a yellow circle in the same line.
1) only if option for simulators has been set
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 71

printed 14.07.15
3.2.4 General about Speed Sensors
Speed sensors are treated as part of the CCRS. (See page 51 for details). This means that the indicated
speed data and the speed vector displayed in the PPI/chart area are valid for the reference selected for
the CCRS, see page 64.
It must be ensured that an approved SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring

Equipment) is connected, that means that all speed sensors must accord to IEC
62388 (2007) and to IMO resolution MSC.96(72).
There may be several speed sensors connected to the system. One of them is chosen by the system on
start-up. In the case of speed sensors which transfer the longitudinal speed only, the drift and set can
be entered manually, because those devices cannot detect the effect of leeway and current. As an alter-
native to selection of a speed sensor, it is also possible to input the speed manually, if necessary.
☞ The speed sensors also include position sensors which transfer not only the position but also the
speed and course made good. Compared to the present-day state of the art, they generally do not
meet the IMO Performance Standards for SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment, IMO
resolution MSC.96(72). Therefore, they might not be configured in the system, and so it might not
be possible to select them for speed input.
Two different values for the speed of the ship are displayed:
- STW: Speed through Water
Only the longitudinal speed (i.e. the speed in ship’s direction) is indicated behind STW. An arrow-
head describes the ahead or astern velocity. The speed through water results in a speed vector
described by CTW, STW. The speed through water often is not equal to the speed over ground, set
and drift may influence the measurement. Speed logs for water speed (single axis log) often do only
measure the longitudinal speed, i.e. the speed mainly produced by the propulsion of the ship. In
this case the CTW is equivalent to the actual heading.
The resulting velocity is also indicated as a CTW/STW vector on the HMI and graphically in the PPI/
chart area.
- SOG: Speed over Ground
The speed over ground is the most accurate and best way to determine the ship’s speed. It is often
measured by two-axis logs, Doppler-logs or alternatively by position sensors which calculate the
ship’s speed from the difference of positions and the time elapsed while sailing.
The resulting velocity is indicated as a COG/SOG vector on the HMI and graphically in the PPI/chart
area.
Page 72 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2.5 STW - Speed through Water 1)
Next to the depiction STW there is a small indication like an

arrow-head. This is the speed vector indicator. It shows the
direction of the vector addition of the longitudinal and the
transversal own ship’s speed through water.
If the ship is moving straight forward through the water, the Speed vector indicator
arrow head points upward, if it is moving straight backward,
the arrow head will point downward.
Longitudinal
The arrow head may also point into any other direction, Speed
then the transversal speed component makes the ship move Vector addition
(resulting Speed)
sideways through the water 2).
Transversal
Speed
AUTO
Means that the STW or water-speed sensor is chosen by the system automatically. The
best available sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actual sensor, the backup
sensor is chosen if available, and a warning is given.
Log x
The selected speed log is used as system sensor for water speed. The sensor selection
mode is manual.
Manual
The actual STW of the own ship can be entered manually. In case
a manual value is presently used, the indication of the value is
preceded by a in the same line.
Before having changed the speed sensor to manual mode, use the Set Own ship symbol with vector.
Speed... function in order to enter the desired value, which should
match as good as possible to the real speed through water of your Ground Water
COG/SOG CTW/STW
ship.
1) The selected CTW/STW vector for speed through water is used as the data source for Water Stabilization of
the targets in the radar PPI/chart area.
2) Transversal speed information is only available if a 2-axis speed log is connected.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 73

printed 14.07.15
3.2.6 COG - Course over Ground 1)
The value for course over ground is calculated

- by use of the heading and the log sensors (a bottom-track-log for example) or
- computed from the measured values of a sensor and additional information (a water-track-log and
the values for drift and set for example).
- It can also be computed from the difference of own-ship positions within a specified time (normally
delivered by a position sensor in a specific telegram).
The method the COG is computed depends on the sensors selected. For example, in case of the speed
log its longitudinal and transversal speed values together with the heading value are used to calculate
the true course vector over ground. The system decides itself and chooses the best and most accurate
way to compute the COG. In any case the indicated COG is based on the data received from the speed
sensor shown behind the SOG value.
☞ The COG/SOG instrument in the Navigation Sidebar displays course and speed over ground as a
data pair describing the direction and the length of the speed vector over ground.
1)
The selected COG/SOG vector for speed over ground is used as the data source for Ground Stabilization of
the targets in the radar PPI/chart area.
Page 74 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2.7 SOG - Speed over Ground
AUTO
Means that the speed over ground sensor is chosen by the system automatically.
The best available sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actual sensor,
the backup sensor is chosen and a warning is given.
Manual Sensor Selection
Log x
The selected speed log is used as system sensor for ground speed. If the selected
log is a single axis log, it is advisable to enter set and drift to correct for tidal
currents.
GPS x
Position sensors may be selected as input for SOG values. See also hint on page 72 for details.
REF TGT
speed input can only be selected on radar systems and if, as a minimum, one tracked target
is selected as a reference target (shown as on the PPI).
R1
STW
Sets the SOG to the same value as STW. In this case it is advisable to enter set and drift to correct for
tidal currents.
☞ If set and drift are not set or initialized, it may happen that the COG/SOG data will be made invalid.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 75

printed 14.07.15
3.2.8 Set Drift
Depending on the choice of sensors, the values for direction and

strength (speed) of the drift are computed by the system or they
have to be entered by the user, in order to get an accurate
measurement for COG and SOG. In order to enter the set and drift
manually, open the drop-down lists for SOG, click on Set Drift...
and enter the values in the appropriate fields.
Afterwards, click on Set to accept the values entered.
Manual
The actual STW of the own ship can also be entered manually. In
case a manual value is presently used, the indication of the value
is preceded by a in the same line.
Before having changed the speed to manual mode, use the Set
Speed... function in order to enter the desired value.
☞ Setting a manual speed value for the SOG instrument often
also requires the manual Set and Drift input, in order to
correct for the set and drift created by wind and waves and
the current
Manual speed and REF TGT speed input are only to be used as temporary solution. In
both cases it must be observed repeatedly if the values used are still valid and stable.
Page 76 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2.9 General about Position Sensors
The position display indicates the Lat/Lon values, the

position status and its selection mode.
With Adjust, the position data can optionally be
corrected for position errors. In front of each depiction
of the values LAT/LON, there may be a symbol indi-
cating a warning or an alarm as follows:
Yellow
The sensor is disconnected from the application, and the value is entered manually by the
operator
Red
Error in the Control and Supervision system, the indication is invalid or the value received
from the sensor is outside the legal limits
Table III / 3 Integrity Marking of Position Sensor Data
Position sensors are treated as a part of the CCRS. See page 51 for details. This means that the LAT/
LON values indicate the position of the selected reference (CCRP/RADAR/Track). For this function the
sensor locations defined on service level are utilized.
It must be noted that the necessary accuracy is achieved only if all positions used relate
to the same chart datum, preferably WGS 84.
- When using the system as a planning system, position coordinates obtained

from a chart with a datum deviating from WGS 84 must be converted to WGS
84 User Symbols and route data.
- The only position receivers that may be connected to the NACOS Platinum
system are those that output the position values in the geographical reference
system WGS84 via an interface as per IEC 61162-1.
- It must be ensured that an approved EPFS (Electronic Position Fixing System)
is connected, that means that all position sensors must accord to IEC 62388
(2007) and to IMO resolution MSC. 112(73).
If more than one position sensor is connected to the system, a position monitoring function will auto-
matically be activated and will be running on the PC 1).
The data transmitted from a position sensor to the system may contain additional information about
validity, sensor type, sensor mode etc. These data are combined in the sensor label shown in the position
display, examples are as follows:
Types: GP (for GPS), GL (for GLONASS), GA (for Galileo), LC (for LORAN C), IN (for INS)...
Modes: A (for autonomous), D (for differential), P (for Precision), R (for RTK), F (for float RTK)...
(Modes E (for Estimated), M (for Manual), S (for Simulation) are not accepted as valid input data)
1) This function is a mandatory requirement for ECDIS.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 77

printed 14.07.15
3.2.10 Position Sensor Selection
Changing the position sensor will also have an effect on the position monitoring function.
The sensor selection list is dependent on number, type and mode of the position sensors connected to
the system.
AUTO
Means that the position sensor is chosen by the system automatically. The best
available sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actual sensor, the backup
sensor is chosen and a warning is given.
mGPS n
Selects the desired position sensor from the list of available sensors in the system.
m indicates the sensor mode,
GPS may be replaced by another sensor type,
n indicates the sensor number.
As long as the mouse pointer is positioned above the depiction of a sensor, the
position data delivered by this sensor and also the offset position of the sensor
from the actual CCRP position are displayed in a tool tip window.
Manual DR
As long as Manual DR is selected, the manually entered posi-
tion will be used as the basis for all further position calcula-
tions by dead-reckoning. This method uses the gyro heading
and the speed of the selected COG/SOG speed sensor to esti-
mate the own-ships position. In case a manual value is
present, the indication of the value is preceded by a in the
same line.
The accuracy of the dead-reckoned position (shown in the position display as: Manual
DR) must be checked continually, because its accuracy is very poor and its position error
is increasing over time. For safety reasons, an available position-sensor must be selected
as soon as possible.
Set Estimated...
The actual position can be entered manually by means of the on-screen
keyboard.
After a position sensor failure the last valid data received from the
sensor are automatically present in the input fields. Be sure to correct
the data input if the last valid data taken over from the sensor are no
longer valid.
Page 78 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2.11 Position Monitoring
In addition to the selectable position plot of the 2nd position sensor (see 2nd Past Track) for display in
ECDIS mode, the system provides an automatic position monitoring between the selected sensor and any
other connected position sensor.
In the position instrument you select the main position sensor to be used in the entire system for display
and control purposes. These sensor data are compared to the data received from the secondary available
position sensor. For this purpose the best available secondary sensor will automatically be selected by
the system.
Assumed you have two sensors GPS1 and DGPS2 connected to the system, there are several different
states of the position monitoring process:
1. GPS1 is selected: DGPS2 is used for comparing its position data to the selected position.
2. DGPS2 is selected: GPS1 is used for comparing its position data to the selected position.
3. DR Mode is selected: DGPS2 is used for comparing its position data to the estimated position of the
dead reckoning calculation.
4. Any position (GPS1, -2 or DR Mode) is selected, but none of the secondary sensors is available
(switched off, defective or producing invalid data):
The alarm Redundant Position Lost will be given.
Monitoring Limits
The limits used for the position monitoring process are generated by the system automatically (i.e. there
is no possibility for the operator to have an influence on it). The following table gives an overview about
the dependencies based on the theoretical sensor accuracy.
Position accuracy Example Limit 1)

very good DGPS very small
good GPS small
low Loran high
1)
To avoid unnecessary alarms, an additional speed dependent
lowest limit is used to filter out the natural position noise.
Table III / 4 Monitoring Limits
Position Monitoring Alarm

If the defined limit between the two compared positions is exceeded, the alarm Redundant Position
Differs is given. For this purpose the distance in meters between the selected and the secondary posi-
tion is calculated.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 79

printed 14.07.15
3.2.12 General about Position Adjust
For various reasons, it can happen that the position of the electronic chart on the screen is not in agree-
ment with reality (i.e. with the ship's own position). In such cases, the Position Adjust function offers
the possibility of adding the necessary correction value to the system position.
Position Adjust is used to correct a constant position-error (position offset) of the selected position sensor
or of a manually set position in Manual DR mode.
The Position Adjust function must be used extremely carefully! An offset is added
to the received position data, which will have an impact on all applications based
on or using position data!
How to Detect a Position Offset

If the displayed LAT/LON position is incorrect, the videos and the target symbols of fixed point-targets
(e.g. buoys or landmarks) do not coincide with the chart symbols of these targets or with the user made
symbols that are entered at the correct positions in the chart.
A position offset of the position sensor can also be made visible without displaying the chart background
on a radar, if you observe the coincidence of AIS target symbols with their target videos:
- If all targets have an offset in the same N/E direction, a position error is very probable.
- If all targets have the same bearing offset, it is more probable that either the radar itself or the
compass system needs to be adjusted.
Page 80 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2.13 Correction by Position Adjust
The position error can be corrected manually by making the video or symbol of a fixed target coincide
with its chart symbol:
1. Switch on a sufficiently small display range to be able to observe and measure the position offset.
If no radar targets are available as a reference use other means to determine the position error.
2. Click on the Adjust button in the Position display. In the input dialogue which then opens, key in
the North and East values of the offset you want to eliminate. South and West values must be set
as negative values.
Note: If the chart object is located north / east of the relevant radar target you must key in a North /
East value and vice versa. With other words: you must shift the chart object to the radar or ARPA target.
3. Clicking on Set in the input dialogue takes over the offset value 1).
4. As a result, the correction values displayed in the Adjust dialogue take effect as a position offset
and this offset is added to the position data of the sensor.
• The entire track and chart synthetics move by an amount equal to the position offset. With
other words the own ship's position jumps on the screen (the PPI / chart area) exactly by that
offset.
• The position offset that is entered continues to be displayed in the Adjust dialogue.
• In this way, each direction (N/S and E/W) can be corrected by up to 999 m.
• The LAT / LON data are marked with the manual input symbol as long as a position offset
is applied.
5. Check that the other symbols of the chart and the AIS target symbols too now coincide as well as
possible with their radar echoes. If necessary, the steps 2 to 3 can be repeated to correct the posi-
tion offset.
If the entire video has a rotational displacement relative to the chart, this indi-
cates that there is probably a compass error which cannot be deleted by a posi-
tion offset. Either the synchronization within the compass system is inadequate
(this must then be corrected) or the compass system itself has a static or dynamic
course error. This should, if possible, be corrected in the compass system.
Deleting the Position Offset

The position offset can only be deleted manually by clicking on the Adjust button and entering 0 m for
each direction.
The position offset is not deleted automatically when a different position sensor is selected.
Check regularly whether the position offset is still valid, especially after a change
of positional accuracy from DGPS to GPS and vice versa or after selection of
another position sensor.
When the watch is changing over, the selected offset must definitely be pointed
out to the new officer of the watch.
1) 1) Click on Cancel if you want to discard all inputs
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 81

printed 14.07.15
3.3 Vector and Trails
Basically, the display of vectors and trails depends on the way of speed
determination within the system.
Speed Over Ground (SOG), the so-called Bottom-Track, or Speed

Through Water (STW), the so-called Water-Track can be used in order
to compute the vectors for the own ship and the targets.
The speed vectors of the own ship and of targets, the trails of targets,
the past-position plot and the path prediction for the own-ship can be
configured here.
The speed vector, the target trails and the target’s past position plot can be displayed as true or relative.
The own ship’s position plot is only displayed as true plot, i.e. it is independent of the T/REL (True/
Relative) setting.
☞ The setting T for true or REL for relative measurements is valid for all vectors and trails within all
navigational applications of a workstation.
As mentioned before, the calculation principles for relative or true data have some important differences:
The relative data are calculated directly by the ARPA. The ARPA uses the plots of consecutive antenna
scans in order to calculate relative course and speed of the target. Out of this, CPA and TCPA can be
calculated.
In order to calculate true data of a target, the own ship’s course and speed must be known. The accu-
racy of the true data calculation depends on the accuracy of the sensors from which the own ship’s
course and speed are provided.
If there is any doubt that the own ship’s speed data are not correct, use the REL
target data and PPI presentation for collision avoidance purposes!
Page 82 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.3.1 Ground / Water Stabilization
For true vectors and trails it can be selected if the ground speed or water speed based stabilization shall
take place. Ground stabilization is normally used for all kind of navigational functions. Water stabilization
is often used for anti-collision functions. In case of relative display mode, the stabilization is not relevant.
Select
- Ground
for Bottom Track computation. The speed over ground (see COG/SOG) will be
used to determine the true vectors and trails.
- Water
for Water Track computation. The speed through water (see CTW/STW) will
be used to determine the true vectors and trails.
The position plot of the own ship and the path prediction are always ground stabilized (i.e. use the COG/
SOG vector).
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 83

printed 14.07.15
3.3.2 Vector
The direction of the own ship speed vector corresponds to the existing Own ship symbol with vector.
course of the own ship. The length corresponds to the existing speed
of own ship. Ground Water
Together with the calculated speed vectors of the tracked targets, the
display of the speed vector can be switched on and off, and the time
represented by the displayed vectors can be specified. Furthermore, it
can be seen from the vector symbol of own ship whether the vector is
relative to the sea (Water selected in Stabilization = one arrow-
head) or relative to the bottom (Ground selected in Stabilization =
two arrow-heads).
Vectors of targets can be displayed as true or relative. In relative
vector mode the own ship’s vector is not shown.
The length of the vectors depends on the time that is selected in the
drop-down list, choose between Off, and 1 to 9 minutes.
Page 84 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.3.3 Trails
For radar echoes moving on the PPI, video trails can be displayed. These trails can be
used as synthetic afterglow of the target video. Trails are generated from previous
antenna scans and can be varied as follows:
- The display of trails can be switched on and off.
- Their length can be specified.
- If the screen stabilization is set to Rel. Motion, the trails can be displayed with
the PPI/chart area orientation North-Up and Course-Up relative to own ship or
with true (absolute) orientation, i.e. in relation to the sea bottom or water stabi-
lized.
- The trail history can be deleted so that they have to build up again
• by the setting Off in the menu and selecting the time again
• by a MORE click into the PPI and selecting Clear Trails
In the true display mode, trails make it possible to reach a conclusion quickly about the maneuver
performed by radar targets. In the relative display, the trails provide a quick overview of the danger situ-
ation (a constant bearing can quickly be recognized). However, only qualitative information can be
obtained from them.
If the trails are lengthened, they reach the new specified length only after the time differ-
ence (i.e. in the case of switching over from 4 to 12 minutes, 8 minutes will pass before
the trails correspond to a length of 12 minutes).
The reduction of the trail length too takes some time.
Switching the Display of the Trails On and Off

The display of the trails is switched on and off by clicking on the Trails field.
Specifying the Length of the Trails

Click on the Trails field with the MORE key; then, in the dialogue that is opened as a result, click on
the desired time
In the Trails field, the length currently being selected is indicated, i.e. the max. length of the trails on
the PPI.
Switching the Trails to Relative or True Display

The switch-over is performed by clicking into the Relative/True field in the Vectors & Trails group.
This selection is then also valid for target vectors and their past plots.
Deletion of Trails
Click on the PPI area with the MORE key. In the dialogue that is opened as a result, click Clear Trails
with the DO key.
☞ The trails are also deleted whenever a switch-over occurs which changes the entire radar video
transceiver selection or range, but they then appear again and build up over time.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 85

printed 14.07.15
3.3.4 Plot
The past position plot corresponds to the past movement of

the own ship. There are four time markers on the position
plot. The distance apart in time can be set. The setting of
the time marker spacing also defines the entire length of the
plot that is displayed. This setting and the on/off switching
of the past plot display take place in common with the past
plots and time markers of the targets.
Time markers
Plots can not be deleted, so that they do not have to build
up again after switching them off.
The length of the past plot depends on the time that is
selected in the drop-down list. Choose from Off, and 15 sec
to 12 minutes. The plots can be displayed as relative or true.
In REL mode the own ship’s plot is not shown. The way of
displaying plots is switched together with the vectors and
trails of targets in combination (T/REL selection).
If the time interval for past position plots is lengthened, it reaches the new specified length
only after the time difference has passed (i.e. in the case of switching over from 6 to 12
minutes, 6 minutes will pass before the past position plots correspond to a length of 12
minutes).
The reduction of the interval too takes some time.
Page 86 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.3.5 Predict
In the small display ranges up to 1.5 NM, depending on the

size of the symbol, it is possible to display the probable track Heading
Line
(the predicted path) along which the own ship will travel if it
maintains its existing rate of turn and its existing speed. The
prediction time can be set here.
In comparison to the own ship symbol in true scale, the Prediction
prediction graphics is drawn with thinner lines. time
The prediction length can be set by the time value in the

drop down list belonging to the Predict setting. Choose
between Off, and 10 to 90 sec.
In later SW versions (> 2.0) the colour of the prediction graphics can be adapted. Please refer to
the main chapter about GENERAL SETTINGS and there to Own Ship Symbol.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 87

printed 14.07.15
3.4 Charts 1)
Switching on the chart display

The chart overlay can be switched on and off by the Charts drop down menu.
The chart content itself can be adjusted to an operator selectable level. Select
Presentation, Chart and Display from the expander in the Display Sidebar to
access the details of possible settings. On the same expander the displayed depth
contours and depth shades can be set
Determining the edition number

In order to determine the edition number of
the presentation library, right-click into the
application area and choose Chart Infor-
mation.
In the lower part of the application area, a
new window opens. Click on Chart
Legend, Presentation, Presentation
Library. In the Details group the edition
number is displayed.
1)
The Charts Drop Down Menu and the Charts Status Line are only active if the ECDIS application is installed.
If only RADAR is installed, the drop down menu remains inactive.
Page 88 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.4.1 The Chart Status Line
The Chart Status Line is always visible if a chart application is active.
Title Warning Category Date Dependent Depth Status
Fig. III / 10 The Chart Status Line
Warning Field
Non ENC (with yellow or orange warning symbol), this is only visible if the ENC vector charts on screen
and at least one part of the screen is filled with data from a "Non Official Vector Chart".
In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this part of the screen the text: "Non-IHO data may not be used for navi-
gation. Please refer to paper chart." will be visible in that part of the screen.
Category Field (See CHART FUNCTIONS for more details)

- Standard is the IHO Standard selection for visible chart objects
- Base is the IHO Definition for the minimum required selection of visible chart objects
- All means that all chart objects are visible, except objects for data quality indication
- Customized means that the user’s selection of visible chart objects is displayed
• If in the Customized mode at least one visibility group is switched off, then the appropriate mode and
an additional '-' character will be displayed.
• If in the Customized mode at least one visibility group is added, then the appropriate mode and an addi-
tional '+' character will be displayed.
In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this part of the screen the details of the actual selections are displayed.
Date Dependent Field

Always: Is only visible if in the presentation menu the selection button "Date Dependent" is set to
"Always". In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this part of the screen the text: "Date dependent objects are always
visible. Information displayed may be incorrect for the present date and time." will be visible.
Depth Field
[m]: The actual units for chart depth values belonging to the chart cell at the own ships position in True
or Relative Motion mode or at the center position of the chart area in Browse mode.
Status Field
Over-scaled Xn.n: The chart cell at the own ships position in True or Relative Motion Mode or at
the chart center position in Browse Mode is displayed with a larger scale than defined for this cell. The
actual over-scale factor is displayed as Xn.n. (e.g. X2.5 means that the chart is displayed with Range 2.5
times smaller than normally defined).
The text Better scale available will be displayed here (additionally) if a chart is available at the same
position with a better 'Navigation purpose' (smaller scale). More chart details will be made visible if you
change to a smaller display range scale. The text No ENC available will be displayed here if no chart
with an appropriate scale exists at the own ship’s position. In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this part of the
screen a detailed text will be displayed additionally.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 89

printed 14.07.15
3.5 Display of Targets
ARPA and AIS targets can be displayed simultaneously on the chart/PPI. In

some cases it is possible that one and the same object is tracked as an ARPA
target and also activated as an AIS target. If the ARPA and AIS target have
similar data for distance, course and speed, they can be merged. This means
that they are treated as one target as long as the similarity is existing. The
limits for the similarity of the data can be defined by the operator (See page
115).
In other cases it is possible that the two targets are treated as two different objects.
Anyway under Fusion, the system can be set in a way that one type of targets has priority being
displayed. Nevertheless, both types of targets are still tracked or remain activated in the background.
Independent of the selected priority in the chart/PPI it can be selected for an individual target which data
and graphics shall be shown.
Additionally it can be selected under Sleeping which type of sleeping AIS targets are to be displayed
continuously.
With the selection Trial the trial maneuver function can be activated or switched off.
Fusion
Defines temporarily the priority for showing the ARPA or AIS
target symbol and target data in case that the defined target Merged Radar
association limits are fulfilled. and AIS target,
activated. The
See page 115 for details about target fusion function and AIS symbol is
settings. displayed.
Sleeping Targets
AIS targets are divided in Class A or Class B targets.
- Class A are commercial vessels,
- Class B are leisure crafts
With this selection list it can be chosen which types of sleeping AIS targets are displayed in the PPI
continuously and are available in the target list.
Later SW versions are providing one further entry called Navigate for the selection of all targets which
are not mooring or anchoring. But if a target has set its AIS parameters to mooring or anchoring and is
moving with more than 3 Kn it is still displayed.
☞ Even if the AIS target display is switched off for above mentioned vessels (i.e. even if None is
selected), all received AIS target information is continuously processed in the background.
In any case those AIS targets being classified as Dangerous can be activated automatically if this
function is not switched off. If AIS targets are already tracked and their display is switched off in
the above menu, already activated targets remain in the PPI and in the target list.
Page 90 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.6 Trial Maneuver
The Trial Maneuver simulates a planned maneuver of the own ship including tracked or plotted targets.
The simulation is started based on the present values for heading, course and speed as well as the
complete currently valid target scenario.
The trial maneuver can be set as follows:
- simulation of a course change, including the radius
to be used by the ship during the maneuver,
- the delay until the beginning of the simulated
maneuver (the Delay) and by
- simulation of a speed change at the instant of the
maneuver.
The simulation itself is executed by shifting the Time
slider to the desired point of time. It can be stopped in
between at any time and continued afterwards. Setting
the slider back to zero will update the own ship presen-
tation and the target scenario to present values.
☞ It is recommended to use the trial maneuver func- Latest SW version includes
tion in relative vector mode in order to evaluate list of up to three targets
the change of the relative target data first.
☞ If true vectors are used, it is recommended to select a speed sensor with water stabilization (Set
the stabilization, REF to Water in the Vector & Trails group).
The scenario to the right shows a simulation

with the own ship sailing for further 5 min
(delay) into the initial direction and then
turning to 252 deg.
Target 24, which is listed in the target list,
is passing with a CPA of 2.43 NM. Target 6
is far away.
If the delay for the planned maneuver is
reduced, target 24 will be on collision
course.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 91

printed 14.07.15
3.6.1 Switching On the Trial Maneuver Dialogue Window
- Switch to REL in the Vector & Trails group of

the Navigation Sidebar.
- In the Targets group choose On for the Trial
control.
- After having finished the simulation choose Off to
close the menu or click to the Close icon of the
dialogue window
The Trial Maneuver dialogue window appears in the

PPI or chart area with the following data:
- Course: The currently existing course (the course
is changed when the ship is turning) 1)
- Speed: The currently existing speed (the value is
constant and taken as start speed) 1)
- Radius: The radius with which the maneuver is
to be simulated. If the dialogue has not been
used before, the minimum radius is displayed,
otherwise it shows the last used radius.
- Delay: 0 minutes. Can be set for simulation of
a delayed start of the course and speed
maneuver.
Latest SW version includes list
- Time: 0 minutes. Must be set for simulation of of up to three most critical
the time instances during the maneuver. targets
- Target list: The latest SW version includes up to

three most critical targets at the bottom of the
menu with simulated target data.
The following changes occur in the PPI or chart area after activation of the trial maneuver function 2):
• In the lower region of the application area a large symbol is shown to indicate the trial mode
and that after starting the simulation by moving the time slider, the symbols and vectors of the
targets are no longer displayed in accordance with the real situation.
• The vectors and the video trails (if any exist), are displayed relative and the own ship is shown
without vector but always with the correct present heading line.
• Past position plots are not displayed during the trial maneuver, but (if Plot is in the switched
on state) they are continuously built up in the back-ground and are visible again as soon as
the trial maneuver is ended.
☞ As long as the Time bar remains at zero position the display content and the target list still corre-
spond to the real situation. The vector display (of the targets) must be switched on during obser-
vation of the maneuver.
1) The resultant value used for the display of the own ship speed vector during simulation
2)
The radar video and the true or relative target trails are updated as normal and are not influenced by the
maneuver simulation.
Page 92 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.6.2 The Trial Maneuver in REL Vector Mode
In relative display mode, a collision course can be recognized from the fact that the vector of a target
is pointing towards the own ship symbol (constant bearing).
A maneuver of your own ship must be simulated which avoids this constant bearing while at the same
time fulfilling other conditions (e.g. keeping within the channel, avoiding shallow water and obstructions,
avoiding other ships, etc.).
Depending on the used display range a suitable vector length should be set so that the results of the
trial maneuver are clearly visible.
Past position
plots are no Trails are
longer displayed relative
Targets get
relative
vectors
Identification
marking of trial
maneuver
display
Scenario with true vector display and Scenario after switching on the trial
past position plots before starting the maneuver in REL mode (the target on the
simulation right is on a collision course)
Fig. III / 11 Vector Display in Trial Maneuver Mode
☞ The general screen-stabilization and the alignment of the heading line may remain unchanged, or
can be set by the operator as required. With other words, the Trial Maneuver can be observed in
Head Up, North Up or Course up orientation.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 93

printed 14.07.15
3.6.3 Simulating a Course Maneuver
Use the Course and Radius slider to set the desired amount of
course change and the radius with which the maneuver is to be
simulated.
☞ During adjustment, the simulated course change is displayed in
form of a curved headline. A change of max. +/- 180° relative
to your present course can be simulated. The heading and the
present course is updated automatically if your ship is turning
during the maneuver simulation.
After course and radius have been set, use the Time slider to simu-
late your ship sailing along the pre-planned course change. All displayed targets will move accordingly
with their current speed and course and the change of their relative vectors will show the further devel-
opment of the scenario step by step.
The time setting can be done continuously by moving the slider or (by clicking) stepwise in 5 sec incre-
ments up to 30 min complete duration.
☞ Because of the REL Vector Mode, the relative speed vectors are rotated and change their length by
the simulated course-change. If one of the targets will change its status from dangerous to not
dangerous and vice versa, this will be shown by a change of their symbol's color.
Also during the trial maneuver the collision calculations 1) take place, which would indicate a dangerous
target symbol in red color as soon as the anti-collision limits are infringed.
1)
The collision calculations of the trial maneuver simulation implement the same alarm limits for CPA and TCPA as
set for the normal target tracking in the Dangerous Targets group of the Settings > Targets menu.
Page 94 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.6.4 Setting the Delay and the Speed of the Simulated Maneuver
Use the Delay slider to set the time that is to pass before the simulated maneuver begins.
☞ The future situation at the point in time defined by the delay value is now displayed in form of a
modified own ship track line ahead (along the present course direction) and the previously defined
course change is shown at a distance ahead, calculated from the present speed and the delay time.
The maneuver simulation itself must be controlled as described above with a movement of the Time
slider or clicking into the Time bar.
Trails are
updated in
relative mode
Heading lines and

orientation of AIS Radius that is set for
targets remain the trial maneuver
unchanged
Distance up until
Symbols moved and vectors the trial
changed in the simulation of the maneuver, as
course change maneuver. selected with
No risk of collision Delay
Relative display after setting of a trial (vector shows suffi-
maneuver which would prevent a colli- ciently large
sion passing distance
from the trial
maneuver position) Trial maneuver
start position The present own
ship position
Fig. III / 12 Delay in Trial maneuver
If no suitable maneuver can be found by means of these two settings, a speed change must be simu-
lated:
Simulation of a Speed Change

Use the Speed slider to set the speed at which the ship is to travel from the beginning of the simulated
maneuver onwards.
☞ Because of the REL Vector Mode, the simulated course-change causes a change in the directions
and lengths of the targets speed vectors.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 95

printed 14.07.15
3.6.5 The Trial Maneuver in True Vector Mode
In True Vector Mode, the trial maneuver is displayed with true vectors for the targets and own ship. Both
the radius planned for the course change maneuver and the acceleration behavior for the speed change
that is set, and the delay are taken into account. All settings made in REL vector mode can still be
changed in the True vector mode.
The switch-over between True and REL Vector Mode is performed in the Vector & Trails group by
clicking on the REL or T selection button.
☞ It is possible at any time to switch between the two vector modes without any loss of data or infor-
mation. In both modes the same state of the maneuver is shown on the screen, if no other trial
maneuver setting is changed.
☞ It is recommended to use the true trial maneuver together with a speed sensor giving speed through
water. This can be selected as in normal operation mode of the system by selecting REF Water
instead of REF Ground in the Vector & Trails group.
☞ Whenever it is not sure that the calculated data or the used sensor data are correct and stable, it
is recommended to perform the Trial maneuver in REL mode (see above).
As a result of the switch-over into True Vector Mode, the following changes occur:
- True vectors and true target trails are displayed. Past positions of targets remain invisible as long
as the Trial maneuver is running.
- Own ship and all targets are shown at their currently existing positions with their true vectors as
long as the Time value is set to 0:00 min.
- The trial maneuver line is displayed. It represents the track on which the ship would perform the
simulated maneuver. The Radius displayed in the maneuver dialogue is taken into account for
calculation of the course change.
The simulated maneuver-settings can now be changed in the same way as described above for the rela-
tive maneuver mode:
Use the Course, Speed, Radius or Delay slider to set the desired parameters with which the maneuver
is to be simulated and move the Time slider to see the future development of the scenario.
Page 96 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.6.6 Checking the Trial Maneuver
By means of Time, the instant of time that is to be considered can be set:

- Click on the Time bar slider and, with the trackball, vary the time instant that is to be displayed
- or -
- click on the slider bar, but not to the slider, to produce 5 sec time increments stepwise.
By continuous variation, a synchronized display of the simulated own ship positions and target positions
takes place. If, for all time values, an adequate distance between own ship symbol and the target symbol
is displayed, the trial maneuver will not show a dangerous approach.
Also during the true trial maneuver the collision calculations 1) take place, which would indicate a
dangerous target symbol in red color as soon as the anti-collision limits are infringed.
If necessary, any of the trial maneuver settings can now be changed and the check can be repeated.
Trails are updated in

Trial maneuver line True mode
defined by course
Radius that is Radius that is set for

set for the trial the trial maneuver
maneuver
The present
own position
Future positions after (own ship
the time entered symbol and
with the Time slider true vector)
Delay
Delay
Display after switch-over to True Vector Check by variation of the Time

Mode input
Fig. III / 13 Checking the Trial Maneuver
1)
The collision calculations of the trial maneuver simulation implement the same alarm limits for CPA and TCPA as
set for the normal target tracking in the Dangerous Targets group of the Settings > Targets menu.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 97

printed 14.07.15
3.6.7 Further Information about the Trial Maneuver
- The maneuver can be observed with relative or true vectors. As during normal operation, the vector
mode is to be set in the Vector & Trails group. This setting will also have an effect on the trails
and the past position plots before the maneuver function is started.
- In both of the vector modes, the maneuver radius that can be set and the acceleration 1) for the set
speed-changes are taken into account additionally to the planned course change.
- At any time before or during the simulation, you can change between T and REL maneuver vector
mode, without changing other simulation parameters.
☞ The target tracking / plotting and the manual and automatic target acquisition are not interrupted
during the execution of a maneuver, but no new sleeping AIS targets can be activated manually.
This means also that the target list under Tools > Targets > List at all times displays the currently
valid data of the target tracking process and not the trial maneuver data.
☞ Contrary to targets already being tracked by the ARPA, radar targets which are in the state of
"under evaluation" (i.e. being in "acquisition status") will not be taken into account for the trial
maneuver.
☞ As long as the Trial maneuver is active, the Dangerous Targets function (ARPA and AIS) is auto-
matically On, independently of the settings under Settings > Targets > Dangerous Targets and
AUTO ACQ AIS Targets respectively.
1)
The min. and max. radius and the acceleration behavior of the ship are entered at service level during setting-
to-work.
Page 98 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions The Menu Bar with Home, S-Mode and MOB
4 The Menu Bar with Home, S-Mode and MOB
The menu bar provides functions to navigate between applications and screens. To open the menu, click
on the Menu button in the bottom left corner of the display. The menu resembles the Start menu of MS
Windows 7. The figure below shows an example of a menu which is displayed when clicking on the
Menu button. Depending on the installed applications it might look different:
Select one of the

items to:
Jump to Super
Home Page
To display the
Shortcuts to About menu with
the primary SW versions etc.
applications
To change color &
brightness
and to create a
new or to edit a
set of individual
settings
Select one of the items from left to right to:

In case of a Man-over-Board event just
1. Open the Settings Bar click here:
2. Take a screen snapshot The MOB symbol will be placed at current
own ship position as a marker.
3. Jump to Super Home Page Further steps are described on page 117.
4. Set the Default Settings according to
IEC Standard
5. Select one of the prepared Favorite
Settings
Fig. III / 14 Opened MULTIPILOT Main Menu
☞ When you are moving the mouse or trackball pointer over the buttons of the menu bar, you will
experience a roll-over effect indicating the button you are currently pointing at. This will help you
to pinpoint the right button for the current operating situation even in case of emergency.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 99

printed 14.07.15
Voyage Recording Operating Instructions
5 Voyage Recording
Background
The ECDIS application is recording the main navigation data in a permanent data base on the hard-disc
of the PC. The recorded data are accessible by the operator via screen printout with a data viewer.
Voyage Data Recording

Data recording is done automatically, no operator action is required. Data are stored every 10 sec for a
period of 90 days. Older data are deleted automatically.
Voyage Data Replay

Select Voyage Replay from Super Home Page. The voyage replay menu
opens with one opened Voyage Replay page.
Enter date and time of the period of interest and set the filter if required
for Ship Data, LOPS (Lines of Position) and Chart Data.
Click to the Filter Voyage Data bar underneath. A complete list of data
is displayed.
Open another viewer i.e. for a different period by pressing

the left top bar Start Voyage Recording Replay. This
can be done again for further viewers.
Close a viewer by clicking the cross in the top tab line
(see red arrow).
Page 100 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND
TOOLS
RADARPILOT Platinum DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND TOOLS
Operating Instructions Overview
1 Overview
Depending on the system configuration, the Display Functions and Tools Sidebar may slightly deviate
from the screenshots shown below. Please refer to the footnotes on the next page for any deviations.
Especially if no RADARPILOT Platinum application is installed on your system (i.e. only RADARPILOT),
the corresponding expanders for Display and Depth under Presentation -> Charts are not available.
Most of the expanders are described in this main chapter about DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND TOOLS.
However the chart related functions are collected in the subsequent main chapter about CHART FUNC-
TIONS and the route related functions are described in the main chapter about ROUTE PLANNING AND
MONITORING.
In order to save space on the screen, a number of expanders have been combined into four index cards:
Alarms, Settings, Presentation and Tools:
Fig. IV / 1 Display Functions and Tools Expander
The available functions are listed in the subsequent table.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 103

printed 14.07.15
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND TOOLS RADARPILOT Platinum
Overview Operating Instructions
1.1 Structure of the Sidebar
Group Function Description Details in

Lists Open list of alarms, sort with priority See page 106
Alarms
Horn/ Escal. 1) Disable horn or set escalation time See page 107
Alarms
ECDIS Alerts Switch on Safety Contour Alarm and others See page 108
Own Ship Switch on look ahead sector for ECDIS alerts See page 109
Draft Set fore and aft draft for ECDIS alerts See page 112
Target Set CPA/TCPA limit, guard zones, & fusion See page 113ff.
Settings Route Show safety corridor, wheel over line etc. See page 116
MOB Input wind/drift for man-over-board follow-up See page 117
TM 2)
Set true motion reset, default 70% of screen See page 118
Settings
Sensors Monitoring 3) Set 2nd sensor & limits for sensor monitoring See page 120
Voyage Data Input AIS destination, ETA, status etc. See page 124
Status Switch off AIS TX, show status, reduce power See page 125
AIS Channel Check AIS channel and zone See page 127
Event log 4) Check AIS transmitter off periods See main Chapter about AIS...
Test 4) Send out test message for transceiver check See main Chapter about AIS...
See main Chapter about
Display Select chart display category i.e. Standard CHART FUNCTIONS 5)
Presentation
Chart Depth Set safety depth and safety contour See main Chapter about
CHART FUNCTIONS 6)
User Sym Select symbol shape and visibility group See page 170
Target Show ARPA label, ship name etc. See page 130
Display
Own Ship Show true scaled own ship, past track, etc. See page 134
List Show AIS and ARPA target list, sort list See page 136
Critical 7) Show most critical target with CPA/TCPA See page 144
Target
RX Msg Show received AIS message See page 145
TX Msg Edit AIS message to transmit See page 147
EBL & VRM 8) Switch on PI lines, bearing line, range marker See page 156
Tools
LOP 9) Switch on lines of position, take position fix See page 150
NAV User Symb Insert user symbols (i.e. wreck) on chart See page 159
See main Chapter about
Anchor Activate anchor monitoring
ANCHOR MONITORING
Explorer Open list of waypoint routes, edit new route See page 172 10)
Routes
Monitoring Monitor actual leg against XTD limit See page 172 7)
1)
From SW version 1.1 onwards the escalation of warnings into alarms is set here and horn is always on
2)
Setting of TM Reset only available in ECDIS
3) Only if second sensor of same kind is connected
4)
Only if SAAB R5 AIS is connected
5) In ARCS mode RCDS Options instead of Display, not available in RADAR without chart
6) In ARCS mode User Symbols instead of Depth, not available in RADAR without chart
7)
In later SW versions included in target list
8) in Radar part of the Radar function sidebar
9) Lines of Position only available in ECDIS
10)
and in addition the main chapter about ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING
Page 104 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Handling of Alarms
2 Handling of Alarms
see footnote
The Alarms Tab comprises all functions for alarm handling. It provides access to the alarm list, to the
switch for silencing the alarm horn, and to the settings for ECDIS alerts and own ship look ahead
sector 1).
1) The alarm symbol may be slightly different, other versions could have red triangle with figure 1
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 105

printed 14.07.15
Handling of Alarms Operating Instructions
2.1 Alarm List
If the alarm list is opened

by the Alarm List icon
(blue arrow) or by a click
on the Alarms Tab (red
arrow), it always shows OPEN
the complete list of
alarms, warnings and
CLOSE
cautions, independent of
the previously made
selections of filters or
priorities in the list 1).
The list then shows the
newest alarm entry at
the top of the alarm
window.
Close the list with a click
on the small triangle left
of the Alarm expander
(red arrow).
More details about the
alarm list can be found in
see footnote
the main chapter
ALARMS, WARNINGS,
AND CAUTIONS.
Page 106 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.2 Alarm Settings
☞ For navigational alarms the escalation time period which expires until a warning is automatically
changed into an alarm can be set here.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 107

printed 14.07.15
2.3 ECDIS and Track Alerts
The ECDIS Alerts menu provides five different alert

settings.
The first three alerts are part of the chart monitoring

as follows:
1. Activate the Safety Contour Alarm if you wish to have an alarm on crossing the safety contour
indicating shallow water areas. For the setting of the safety contour please refer to the main chapter
about CHART FUNCTIONS.
2. Activate the Special Area alert, if you wish to have an alarm or indication on touching a restricted
area, caution area, traffic separation zone, or a buoy or beacon.
• It can be chosen whether this notification will be raised as an alarm or an indication.
3. Activate the Obstruction ahead indication if you wish to have an alarm on touching an own
safety line, or dangerous user symbol like a wreck.
The next two are part of the track monitoring as follows:

1. Activate the Critical point on route alarm if you wish to have an alarm on reaching the next
wheel-over point.
2. Activate the Cross-track alarm if you wish to have an alarm on cross deviation from the planned
track. The limit can be set during route monitoring.
Please refer to the main chapter about ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING for more details.
Page 108 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.4 Ship Look Ahead Sector
Look-Ahead Limits
Show on Chart activates a virtual sector in front of the
ship, formerly known as "guard sector".
For this ECDIS Monitoring function, the program
constructs a monitoring sector (ahead sector) with an
adjustable sector width and length which can be defined
here.
In the example, the sector has a length of one mile and
a width of 250m at its end.
The guard sector opens out from own position in the
direction of the ship's movement and is carried along
with the ship.
The monitoring is performed both with the guard sector
and with own position (i.e. the own ship contour).
It takes place for chart objects as activated under 2.3
and for user symbols like wrecks, and obstructions. The
monitoring is therefore independent of whether the
display of these objects is switched on or off.
Whenever a monitored object is within the defined range
of the sector or it touches or overlaps the ship’s contour,
an alarm is raised.
☞ Even when the function Show on Chart is switched off for display, in any case the defined look-
ahead sector monitors against the objects under Alerts in the frame below.
☞ It might be an advantage to switch off the look-ahead sector monitoring if the speed is very low or
the ship is stationary.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 109

printed 14.07.15
Page 110 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Basic Settings
3 Basic Settings
The Basic Settings Tab comprises menus for setting the true motion limit, the draft of own ship, the
dangerous target limits and guard zones, the route settings and the man-over-board settings.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 111

printed 14.07.15
Basic Settings Operating Instructions
3.1 Draft Settings
Open the own ship’s draft menu in the tab:

-> Settings -> Draft and set Fore and Aft draft
of your vessel. The larger of the two values will be
displayed in the menu for setting the depth lines.
The set own ship’s draft will only limit the adjust-
ment of the safety contour in the depth line menu to
the lower side. The safety contour slider can only be
set to larger values. The ENC depth monitoring alarm
is not affected by the own ship’s depth, it is only
affected by the set safety contour.
Page 112 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.2 Dangerous Target Settings
Dangerous Targets On
This function is activated under Settings -> Target.
Targets which are tracked by the ARPA and also AIS
targets can automatically be marked as dangerous
targets by the automatic collision avoidance computa-
tion if their closest point of approach (CPA/TCPA) is
lower than the limits set in the Limits group. As a
result,
- the Dangerous Target alarm appears,
- the target which has caused the alarm is indicated
on the chart by means of the flashing symbol
or ; if a sleeping AIS target has caused the
alarm, that target is automatically acquired in
before hand. The flashing of the symbol stops
after the alarm Dangerous Target for the appro-
priate target has been acknowledged. The alarm is
kept in the alarm list.
Auto ACQ. AIS Targets (Auto Acquired AIS Targets)

In particular cases, it might be required to prevent AIS targets from being acquired by the collision avoid-
ance computation, for example to avoid unnecessary alarms in port or at other berths caused by AIS
targets. In this case the check box must be cleared.
Limits for Closest Point of Approach (CPA)

The limit for the distance to the closest point of approach of a target can be set here. If a target gets
closer then the set limit, it is automatically marked as dangerous target and the alarm Dangerous
Target is raised. Choose between 1.0 and 10 NM.
Limits for Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA)

The limit for the time to closest point of approach of a target can be set here. If the time of the TCPA
gets shorter then the set limit, it is automatically marked as dangerous target and the alarm Dangerous
Target is raised. Choose between 1 and 10 min.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 113

printed 14.07.15
3.3 Acquisition / Guard Zone Settings
Open the Acquisition/Guard Zone menu under

Settings -> Settings -> Target.
Two independent acquisition/guard zones can be
switched on in order to acquire automatically all radar
targets and sleeping AIS targets entering the zones.
The acquisition/guard zones are switched on and off
by checking the controls Zone 1 and/or Zone 2.
☞ If the acquisition/guard zone is switched off,
automatic target acquisition does not take place
any longer. Targets already acquired will be
tracked further on.
If a target has not been tracked before entering the

acquisition/guard zone, the Target Auto-Acquired alarm appears.
If a target has already been tracked when it entered the acquisition/guard zone - the Target Entered
Guardzone alarm appears.
After acknowledgment of the alarm, the automatic target tracking starts and afterwards
- it is marked with the flashing symbol or if the function TRUE SCALED TARGETS is active,
the AIS target can be shown with the true scaled outlines in the small ranges
- The capacity of the target tracker is restricted to 40 activated and 200 sleeping targets.
If there are already 95% of the maximum number of ARPA targets or 95% of the maximum number
of AIS targets being tracked or acquired, the Check ARPA/AIS Target Capacity warning appears.
In this case, at least one unimportant target must first be deleted before another target can be
acquired.
If there are already 100% of the maximum number of ARPA targets or 100% of the maximum
number of AIS targets being tracked or acquired, the ARPA/AIS Target Capacity Exceeded
alarm appears. In this case, at least one unimportant target must first be deleted before another
target can be acquired.
Setting the Range of the Acquisition/

Guard Zone
Example shown for Guard Zone 1: Click on
the arc that defines the acquisition/guard
zone and use the small handle to drag the
zone to the desired size.
☞ The outer limit can be set to a range
value between 1.5 NM and 20 NM.
Setting the Angle of the Acquisition/

Guard Zone
Click on the angle line that defines the acqui-
sition/guard zone and use the small handle to Handles
drag the zone to the desired angle.
☞ The angle can be set to a value between 5° and 360°. The setting takes place relative to the
heading direction, i.e. the acquisition/guard zone turns with the ship’s heading.
Page 114 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.4 Target Fusion
An ARPA target and an AIS symbol may represent

the same object. In order to determine if this is the
fact, ARPA and AIS data for distance, speed and
course are compared. If the difference in data are
within preset limits, the targets will be associated
if this function is activated. In this case, only one
of the symbols is shown. Anyway, both targets will
be continuously tracked. The blanked-out symbol
will appear again automatically if the differences in
data exceed the preset limits.
The limits required for this function are set here.
It is possible to define the priority for showing an
object as ARPA or AIS targets for the case that
target fusion is active for a tracked target. This
Setting the target
means that one of the symbols can be suppressed
fusion limits
on the PPI. Additionally, it can be defined for a
single selected target on the PPI to show the
suppressed symbol for a limited period of time.
Fusion Distance
If the distance is less than the set limit, the ARPA and AIS target are displayed as one target. Choose
between 0.1 and up to 0.3 NM.
Fusion Course
If the course difference is less than the set limit, the ARPA and AIS target are displayed as one target.
Choose between 5 and up to 35 degree.
Fusion Speed
If the speed difference is less than the set limit, the ARPA and AIS target are displayed as one target.
Choose between 0.5 and up to 1.5 NM.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 115

printed 14.07.15
3.5 Route Settings
Before route editing is started, the settings for displaying the route in the application area should be set.
The display options for the route can be set under Settings > Route. Please refer to the separate main
chapter about ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING for more details.
Refer to the following picture to identify the items that can be superimposed as additional information
to the route.
Waypoint number
Bearing of the track (also

Safety corridor, its width called leg) from waypoint
is adjustable. 2 to waypoint 3
Wheel over point/wheel

over line (the point were
the course has to be
changed)
Fig. IV / 2 Settings for the Route Display
Page 116 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
3.6 MOB Settings
In case of a Man-over-Board event just click to the corresponding symbol in the

bottom line of the menu bar:
The result is as follows:
The man-over-board symbol is shown under your
own ship symbol in the chart.
This new user chart object symbol will soon appear
free as your own ship sails further ahead.
Delete a MOB Symbol:
Select a MOB symbol which has been dropped before
by clicking to it with DO (left click). The symbol is
then marked with a small handle. Click with More
(right click) anywhere into the PPI/Chart area, to
open the context menu. Select Delete Man Over-
board. Repeat the procedure for each further MOB
symbol and on each workstation (see also below).
Set Wind and Drift:
Select the tab MOB under Settings -> Settings
from the Display Functions and Tools sidebar and set
wind and current to the actual values. The estimated
drift is calculated automatically.
The MOB symbol will move according to the settings
made.
Hide the MOB symbol if required by clearing the MOB
box in the Settings-MOB menu.
☞ In contrast to other user symbols the MOB
symbol is only set on your workstation and not
distributed to a second workstation. 1)
In later SW versions the MOB function has been

extended for up to five separately tracked MOB
symbols. They are dropped one after the other, each
time the MOB button in the bottom line of the menu
bar is clicked. Values for wind and speed can be
entered separately for each MOB symbol.
1) Later SW versions starting from 1.0.15.22 are supporting bridge wide distribution of MOB settings
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 117

printed 14.07.15
3.7 TM - True Motion Settings
As far as the screen stabilization is concerned, there is a choice between True

Motion, Relative Motion and Browse mode (Browse only for ECDIS).
The browse mode can be used for ECDIS planning. It allows you to jump to any
location in the chart independent from the own ship position.
True Motion and Relative motion mode are showing the one ship in the screen
center as follows:
- True Motion in General

The position of not moving targets (buoys, beacons, land or lighthouses) is fixed, also the chart in
the background is fixed; the own ship symbol moves across the screen. The PPI/chart area orien-
tation is North-Up or Course-Up. Automatically by means of a true motion reset (TM reset), the
own ship symbol on the PPI/chart area is reset in good time before the PPI/chart area boundary is
reached; this resetting is done in such a way that the larger part of the PPI/chart area lies ahead
of the own ship.
True Motion for ECDIS (TM)

For the ECDIS application the appropriate
value for the automatic True Motion
Reset can be set by means of the slider in
the Settings > Settings > TM dialogue.
Just pick up the slider with the right mouse
button and adjust as required. Manual
reset can be done with the pan buttons in
the top left chart area.
- REL Motion
Own ship's position is fixed; the chart or radar video moves relative to own ship in accordance with
the movement of own ship. As far as the PPI/chart area orientation is concerned, it is possible to
choose between Head-Up, North-Up and Course-Up.
Page 118 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Sensor Settings
4 Sensor Settings
The Sensor Settings Tab provides a menu for setting the monitoring limits for redundant sensor opera-
tion. It is only available, if sensor monitoring has been configured during installation
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 119

printed 14.07.15
Sensor Settings Operating Instructions
4.1 Sensor Monitoring (Heading and Position)
Optionally, the heading and position of the selected sensors can automatically be monitored by making
a comparison with the corresponding data of redundant sensors (if connected, i.e. 2nd gyro). If a limit
value is exceeded, an alarm appears. You can specify whether the monitoring shall take place and what
the alarm limit value should be. Furthermore, you can choose between several comparison sensors. For
position monitoring, it is also possible to decide whether the limit value is to be automatically adapted
to suit the sensor types that are being monitored.
The settings are made in the Monitoring dialogue under Settings > Sensors:
Currently activated sensor
On/Off Choose redundant sensor
mode
Set limit value
Current difference between the selected sensors
Configuring the comparison

The currently activated position sensor (i.e.
DGPS) is set in the Position dialogue in
the navigation sidebar.
The redundant sensor (i.e. Gyro 2 or DGPS
2) can be chosen by clicking on the small
triangle right of the sensor indication (see
red arrow in the above screenshot).
Switching the Monitoring On and Off

Each monitoring function can be switched
on (MAN or AUTO) and switched off with a right mouse click into the control
box in front of the line.
Entering the Limit Value

For each activated monitoring function a limit can be entered after clicking on the small triangle right of
the limit indication (see blue arrow in above screenshot).
The value is entered by means of the number keypad. It is stored and will be re-called if the monitoring
function is switched off and then on again.
Page 120 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Sensor Settings
4.2 Sensor Failure
Behavior if the Limit is Exceeded

Each monitoring function generates an individual monitoring alarm if the limit is exceeded. All these
alarms are ending with ... DIFFER.
Example: REDUNDANT HEADING DIFFER. They are indicated in the alarm list as all other alarms.
Failure of a Sensor which is being Monitored

Each monitoring function generates an individual monitoring alarm as soon as the signals of the sensor
used for monitoring are no longer available. They are all ending with ... LOST.
Example: REDUNDANT HEADING LOST. Remedy by selecting a different sensor, or by switching off
the monitoring function.
Automatic Setting of the Position Monitoring Limit

For position monitoring, AUTO mode too can be
selected after clicking to the monitoring mode
field (see red arrow). In AUTO mode, the limit
is automatically adapted to suit the types of
position sensors that are being compared.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 121

printed 14.07.15
Sensor Settings Operating Instructions
Page 122 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions AIS Settings
5 AIS Settings
The AIS Transponder System provides AIS data from other vessels (i.e. identity, position, speed, course,
and cargo) and objects around the own ship in a radius of about 20 NM (in reach of VHF radio). At the
same time it transmits own AIS data (as above) to other vessel in the vicinity (up to 20 NM as above).
If the AIS transponder on board is connected to the RADARPILOT Platinum, data from other vessels are
displayed as symbols on top of the ECDIS chart or radar PPI.
The AIS system uses four different categories of symbols as follows:
- AIS targets: ships that are equipped with an AIS system
- SAR aircraft: search-and-rescue airplanes or helicopters
- Aids-to-Navigation: navigation marks, e.g. beacons and buoys
- Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control
center.
The AIS targets and SAR aircraft can be activated and tracked in the same way as radar/ARPA targets.
See page 137 for details about ARPA and AIS target handling.
Select Settings > AIS to enter the AIS tabs with menus for checking and setting various AIS data.
Those settings, which have to be updated for each voyage are described on the subsequent pages:
- Voyage data with destination and ETA on page 124
- Status with Power Off, and LRIT response on page 125, and display of SARTs on page 126
- Channel settings with low power mode for loading tankers and mooring on page 127
Installation related settings and status information, which are more important for checking the AIS tran-
sponder system, i.e. during yearly radio survey, are described in the main chapter about AIS, NAVTEX
Printer, and other Subsystems 1).
All operating actions can be performed on any workstation without the need for a particular switch-over
procedure. As far as the AIS settings and the information transmitted are concerned, the last operating
action applies.
1) This chapter is only included in the system manual
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 123

printed 14.07.15
AIS Settings Operating Instructions
5.1 AIS Voyage Data
The following data must be entered at the beginning of every voyage, and must
(if necessary) be updated during the voyage to ensure that correct and up-to-date
information is sent to other ships.
Select Settings > AIS > Voyage (or Voyage

Data) to enter the menu.
Check the displayed information for your voyage and
adjust if necessary.
If the Adjust buttons are not accessible, any update
of the stored information has to be entered from the
separate operating unit of the AIS transponder (also
called MKD = Minimum Keyboard Display).
The data lines have the following purpose:

DEST The destination of your voyage
ETA The estimated time of arrival at destination
Persons on Board The number of persons on board
Draft The draft of your own vessel as automatically taken from your RADARPILOT Platinum system, this
entry is not available in earlier SW versions, for entering the draft in your system please refer to the
small note at the bottom of this page.
State The navigational state as defined by the international standard ITU-R M.1371 for AIS, select from
the predefined values in the scroll down list:
Under way using engine Restricted Maneuverability Aground
At anchor Constrained by draught Engaged in fishing
Not under command Moored Under way using sails
Cargo The cargo type as defined by the same standard, select from the predefined values in the scroll
down list: 1)
Hazardous goods class X, Y, Z,
No hazardous goods No additional information
or OS
Entering the draft in your RADARPILOT Platinum System

Open the own ship’s draft menu under -> Settings -> Draft
and set Fore and Aft draft of your vessel. The larger of the
two values will be displayed in the menu for setting the depth
lines and transferred to the AIS Transponder System. After an
update of the draft this transfer may take a few minutes until
the transponder data set has been updated.
1) For more information about classes of hazardous goods refer to page 128
Page 124 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
5.2 Transmitter ON/OFF and Long-range Interrogation Mode
Select Settings > AIS > Status to enter the

menu.
Check the displayed information in the two first lines
and adjust if necessary.
If the Adjust buttons are not accessible, any
update of the stored information has to be entered
from the separate operating unit (MKD) of the AIS
transponder.
Transmitter Indicates whether the transmitter is switched ON or OFF. Prevent the AIS transponder from
transmitting completely by setting this entry to OFF (if AIS is connected for remote operation). Otherwise
use the separate operating unit (MKD) of the AIS transponder for switching off.
The transmitter should not be switched off except in justified exceptional cases,
because when it is switched off, own ship can no longer be detected as a target
by other ships and cannot participate in the communication between ships,
equipped with AIS. The status Transmitter On/Off is stored with date and time
in the Event Log and can also be called up after an accident at sea
LR Interrogation Mode This line indicates the long-range interrogation mode of the AIS transponder
system. The transponder can be interrogated about own AIS data by using other communication
systems, i.e. a SATCOM system. Because this interrogation can be done over long distances compared
to the typical VHF range for AIS, it is called "long-range interrogation".
The interrogating station, i.e. a vessel traffic service center or harbor authority, specifies which data are
requested. The reaction of the AIS electronics unit can be set by means of the Long-Range Interro-
gation Mode.
- Auto: In the case of an interrogation, the reply is sent automatically. For the purpose of informa-
tion, the AIS Interrogation alarm appears; it should be acknowledged in the usual way.
- Manual: In the case of an interrogation, the AIS Interrogation alarm appears. By acknowledg-
ment, the AIS Interrogation dialogue appears. The reply is sent with the Reply button or is
instead prevented with the Close button.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 125

printed 14.07.15
5.3 Display SART in Test Mode
Select Settings > AIS > Status to enter the

menu.
Check the displayed information in the third line and
adjust if necessary (this line is available only in later
SW versions).
If the Adjust buttons are not accessible, any
update of the stored information has to be entered
from the separate operating unit (MKD) of the AIS
transponder.
Display SART in Test Mode indicates whether an
AIS-SART (SART = Search And Rescue Transmitter)
in test mode will be displayed in the chart or radar
PPI. Set to ON or OFF as required.
Page 126 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
5.4 Reduce Transmitting Power During Loading of Tankers
For safety reasons (possible explosion) the transmitting power of AIS transponders on tankers shall be
reduced to low power during loading and unloading.
Latest AIS Transponder Models according to the new IEC standard 61993-2 ed. 2.0 from 2010-10-
19 are delivered with an automatic function for switching over to low power mode if the type of vessel
has been configured during installation to Tanker and the navigation status is Moored and not moving
faster than 3 kn (see page 124 how to change voyage related data).
☞ In this case no user operation is required. The transponder will automatically switch to low power
and back to normal power if the navigation status changes again.
Earlier AIS Transponder Models following the old IEC standard 61993-2 ed. 01 have to be switched
manually into the low power mode. Two cases can be distinguished:
1. If the AIS Transponder Model 3410 is installed,
and the latest SW version of the RADARPILOT
Platinum system is used, a separate button in the
Status data menu is available to switch to low
power and back.
2. If another AIS Transponder Model and/or an
earlier SW version of the RADARPILOT Plat-
inum system is installed, this button is not avail-
able and the separate MKD (Minimum Keyboard
Display) of the AIS Transponder Unit has to be
used.
The remaining tab named Channel is related to the correct channel setting depending on the zone
where your ship is sailing. This is automatically set by the AIS Transponder System. It is important to
keep them as they are because the AIS system cannot function unless all AIS transponders communicate
on the same VHF channels and with the correct bandwidth.
It is also possible to make a setting manually, but this should only be done in
exceptional cases and following the advice of a local administration received by
radio, publications, etc. and only after having informed the ship's command
personnel accordingly.
Please refer to the main chapter about AIS, NAVTEX and other Subsystems for more information about
the list of status data, the channel setting, and any further settings (chapter only included in NACOS
Platinum Navigation system documentation).
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 127

printed 14.07.15
5.5 SOLAS Chapter VII - Carriage of Dangerous Goods
SOLAS Chapter VII - Carriage of dangerous goods

requires among other things the declaration of hazardous substances contained in the cargo.
MARPOL 73/78, Reg. 6, Annex II
Regulations for the Control of Pollution by Noxious Liquid Substances in Bulk
defines the following 4 categories for noxious substances:
Hazard to marine resources Harm to amenities or other

Category or human health legitimate use of the sea
X Major hazard Serious harm
Y Hazard Harm
Z Minor hazard Minor harm
OS (other No classification under X, Y, or Z Considered to present no
substances) according to Regulation 6.1 harm
OS* These substances are not subject to the provisions in Annex II

Discharges of non-classified substances are prohibited.
Page 128 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Display of Targets and Own Ship
6 Display of Targets and Own Ship
The Target Display tab shows information how the

symbols are displayed on the screen and allows to set the
systems behavior in terms of displaying the symbols.
The Display tab is divided into 2 groups:
- Target Presentation
- Own Ship Presentation
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 129

printed 14.07.15
Display of Targets and Own Ship Operating Instructions
6.1 Display of Targets
Target Presentation
ARPA Targets can be marked with a label consisting
of the radar transceiver number selected at the MFD
and the target number 1). If a ship name has been
entered by the user in the target list, this name is
displayed instead of the number
AIS Acquired Targets can be marked with a label
consisting of the received MMSI, Call sign, or Ship
Name. Just select the corresponding type from the
list.
AIS Sleeping Targets can be marked as well, the
selection of the type which has been made above is
also valid here.
AIS True Scaled Outline

The true scaled outline for AIS Acquired Targets is automatically selected if the same setting has been
made for the own ship presentation, please refer to page 134.
This outline is shown only if the AIS target delivers the ship dimensions and if the resulting beam of the
target symbol in the PPI exceeds 3 mm. In all other cases the AIS symbol is still shown.
☞ In earlier SW versions the above Target Presentation menu offered a select box for the separate
selection of the True Scaled Outline for targets; further-on standard or large symbols for targets
could be selected. But the check box for selecting the AIS Sleeping Navigate label was missing.
1) If ARPA targets are received from external radar, only the target number is available.
Page 130 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
6.2 Display of Aids-to-Navigation
Aids-to-Navigation are virtual navigation marks which

are reported by the AIS land-based system. They are
used as a replacement for real navigation marks like
buoys, lighthouses, etc. Typically a land-based AIS
transmitter which is installed somewhere along the
coastline is used. This transmitter is not necessarily at
the position of the navigation mark. It transmits in
regular intervals of some 10 sec the AIS type of an
Aids-to-Navigation (AtoN), the position where the navi-
gation mark shall be shown on the ECDIS and an iden-
tification.
The received information is displayed on the
RADARPILOT Platinum system by a square with thin
pink frame as shown in the photo to the right.
For more information use the cursor to point to the
AtoN symbol of interest, the cursor tool tip changes
from standard indication to an extended one with AtoN
information.
- The AtoN is not listed in the target list
- The AtoN is monitored like a chart object
- If the Obstruction ahead ECDIS alert is set, and
the look ahead sector of own ship reaches the
AtoN, the Crossing a Danger warning is given
- If the Safety Contour alarm is set, and the look
ahead sector of own ship reaches the AtoN, the
Crossing Safety Contour alarm is given
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 131

printed 14.07.15
6.3 Display of AIS SAR Aircrafts and Vessels
Search And Rescue aircrafts and vessels are equipped with AIS transponders where the type of ship
has been set correspondingly to SAR aircraft or SAR vessel.
If the AIS transponder on your own ship is receiving such a message from a SAR craft, instead of the
standard AIS symbol, special symbols are used for presentation in ECDIS and Radar as follows:
AIS SAR Aircraft 1)

An aircraft symbol as shown to the right is presented, the symbol is oriented in the
direction of the COG of the aircraft. The length of the symbol is 6 mm.
AIS SAR Vessel 2)

A combination of the standard AIS triangle with an inner circle and a cross as
shown to the right is presented, the symbol is oriented in the direction of the
COG of the vessel.
Earlier SW versions are showing a standard AIS ship symbol only.
1) Earlier SW versions are showing a circle with a cross inside.

2) Earlier SW versions are showing a standard AIS ship symbol only.
Page 132 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
6.4 Display of AIS-SART, AIS-MOB, and AIS-EPIRB Devices
AIS Search and Rescue Transmitters are typically available as hand-held devices on the bridge or in
a lifeboat (called AIS-SART), or integrated into a life vest (called AIS-MOB), or as a floatable EPIRB
(called AIS-EPIRB).
They are transmitting the position of the device as derived from an integrated GPS receiver.
If the AIS transponder on your own ship is
receiving such a message instead of the stan-
dard AIS symbol a special symbol is used for
presentation in ECDIS and Radar as follows:
The SART symbol for all three applications
(SART, MOB, and EPIRB) is represented by a
crossed circle in red colour.
If the SART device is transmitting in test mode
instead of active mode the colour changes from
high-lighted red to orange.
By moving the cursor to the SART symbol a
window opens with more detailed information
where the name of the target is either SART,
EPIRB, or MOB and the status can be ACTIVE
or TEST.
The example to the right is showing an MOB
ACTIVE device (Man-over-Board).
At the same time the AIS SART is also shown

in the target list.
If many targets are tracked, the entry may be
at the end of the list and not visible depending
on sort order settings.
So just click to the small triangle in the top line
(red arrow) of the target list and select the
entry Show AIS SARTs to see i.e. the AIS
MOB target at once.
☞ An AIS-MOB and a manually set MOB symbol are handled completely different.
• The manually set MOB Symbol is starting on the actual ship position, it can be corrected
manually if required, and is drifting with set values for wind and current.
• The automatically set AIS-MOB Symbol is controlled only by the received AIS messages
from the SART which is integrated in the life vest. It can not be corrected in position, it is not
connected to any manually set MOB symbol and can not be merged with any manually set MOB
symbol.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 133

printed 14.07.15
6.5 Display of Own Ship
Minimized Symbol
The own ship presentation can be configured to the
actual nautical requirements.
The minimized symbol consists of two concentric
circles representing the position of the CCRP of the
own ship.
Stern and Heading Line

Add stern (- - - -) and heading (------) line by clicking
into the corresponding box. Both lines are displayed
as far as the edge of the PPI.
True Scaled Outline

Ship symbol with true
Activate this function to show the own ship true to scaled outline
scale with length and beam size parameter as stored
in the ship configuration data. The True Scaled
Outline is available only in the smaller ranges 1) if the
beam size is displayed larger than 3 mm on the
screen. It cannot be displayed in larger ranges. Beam size
Stern line
Past Track (only for ECDIS) Predicted course line

Add Past Track and 2nd Past Track to your own (the black dashed
line)
ship symbol and select the Track Length in hours
and the density of Time Labels in minutes. Track line of acti-
vated route (the red
Click to the Drop button to add in addition Manual dashed line)
Labels to the Past Track.
Ship symbol with
In compliance with the IEC Radar standard this func- continuous black
tion is available only for ECDIS. In RADAR mode the heading line
second part of the menu is hidden. Please refer to
Past track (the bold
the Vector & Trails function in the Navigation Sidebar black black line, here
for displaying a short Plot of the own ship in RADAR with 3 min. labels)
mode (See page 82).
Stern line (the dotted
black line)
1) Normally (depending on the size of the ship) 1,5 or 0,75 NM and below
Page 134 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions ARPA and AIS Target Handling
7 ARPA and AIS Target Handling
The Target Tools Tab provides menus for target handling. The most important function is the target list
showing the acquired/activated targets. The list can be sorted according to distance of target, time to
reach target etc. Another important function is the critical target menu showing detailed data of the
closest target. Further-on AIS receive and transmit messages can be processed.
Many of the target related functions are activated by a click on the target, the target tools tab is not
used. These functions are described here as well.
☞ A radar echo that is supposed to be taken in account is called an acquired target.
☞ An AIS target that is supposed to be taken in account is called an activated target.
Targets can be acquired/activated manually using the trackball or automatically by the system. This
description first gives an overview of types of targets and their treatment in the system. If necessary,
cross references to manual/automatic target acquisition are noted.
Two types of targets can be handled on the RADARPILOT Platinum, ARPA targets and AIS targets. For
the target processing, the AIS electronics unit and the ARPA electronics of the radar are considered as
two independent sensors whose display and operating procedures take place on one and the same
monitor. The two sensors deliver data independently, the data of both sensors are used for the collision
avoidance computation, which takes place in the background of all actions. It can raise alarms if objects
are on collision course.
This chapter describes the handling of AIS targets and ARPA targets presented on ECDIS. Operating
steps in relationship to the raw video which are specific for the RADAR are covered by the RADAR FUNC-
TIONS section.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 135

printed 14.07.15
ARPA and AIS Target Handling Operating Instructions
7.1 ARPA Targets
ARPA targets are any kind of radar targets received from a host radar application either operated on the
same workstation or on a remote system. In case of a remote system the target information is received
by the NMEA message TTM. These targets have already been acquired by the radar system. ARPA targets
can be of the following kind:
ARPA targets
An acquired target that is tracked by the ARPA electronics. Its past track
and speed/direction vector can be shown
A selected target, which is an acquired target whose data are marked in

the target list
ARPA targets may have an ID displayed on the top right of the symbol. 4
The ID consist of consecutive number generated by the system.
Table IV / 1 Symbols of ARPA Targets in ECDIS
See the chapters below for further information.
Page 136 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.2 AIS Targets
AIS targets are all targets whose data are received by the AIS electronics unit. All AIS targets are visible
per default after switch-on of the system.
☞ The display of groups of AIS targets (Class A, Class B , all) may be switched off by the operator.
AIS targets can be of the following kind:
AIS targets
A sleeping AIS target is a target that is displayed in the PPI. Its data
are evaluated.
A manually activated AIS target is displayed with detailed data such as

COG, true scaled outline (if available and the PPI scale is small enough),
ROT indicator, past track and speed/direction vector can be shown
An automatically activated target by the collision avoidance computation flashing,

or by a acquisition/guard zone red
A selected AIS target, which is an active and whose data are marked in
the target list
AIS targets may have an ID displayed on the top right of the symbol. BXGHE AIS7
The ID consist of the call-sign or a consecutive number generated by
the system.
Table IV / 2 Symbols of AIS Targets in ECDIS
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 137

printed 14.07.15
7.3 Target Fusion
Target Fusion
Due to the fact that an AIS target normally produces a radar echo, the symbols are
displayed close to each other:
In this case, it is possible to decide whether the object is to be treated as AIS target
or as ARPA target. In terms of an improved display readability, the objects can be
merged if they meet some boundary conditions. That means, that they are displayed
only as AIS or as ARPA target.
☞ The number of ARPA and AIS targets being tracked should be kept as small as possible; the pres-
ence of too many targets causes confusion on the screen and distracts the operator's attention from
what is really important. Targets that are no longer relevant should be deleted or deactivated (AIS).
☞ In the case of tracked targets entering a clutter area (rain or sea clutter), a "target swap" might
occur; parts of the rain front are suddenly being "tracked". A target swap can also occur if there
are targets situated close together or close to land. In the case of target swaps, no warning is given.
If a ship has been acquired both as a ARPA target and as an AIS target, it may only appear as an
AIS or ARPA target if both target data are matching (target fusion).
The priority for the entire display or for selected targets can be defined.
ARPA and AIS targets can be merged and therefore treated as one target as long as their target
data are similar in some categories and limits.
Page 138 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.4 Manual Target Selection
An activated AIS target (click on the target first to activate it, a vector is
shown) as well as an acquired ARPA target can be selected. Then, its data are
displayed in the target list.
To do so, click on the activated AIS target or the acquired ARPA target with
DO. The target will be marked with a broken frame. The target data are ARPA AIS
marked in the target list with blue color. Only one target can be selected at a
time. Selected targets
Data of a selected target

accentuated in the list
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 139

printed 14.07.15
7.5 Automatic Target Activation
AIS targets can be activated automatically.

There are two possibilities to activate targets automatically:
By means of the collision avoidance computation for dangerous targets
- The collision avoidance computation observes every target in the PPI. For any of those targets, the
closest point of approach (CPA) and the time until the CPA is reached (TCPA) are computed and
compared with operator-defined limits. If the CPA and TCPA values of a target fall short of the limits,
the target is marked (ARPA) or activated (AIS) and an alarm is raised.
By means of the acquisition/guard zones

- Two of those zones can be switched on in order to perform automatic target acquisition/activation.
Any target that enters one of the zones will be marked/activated and an alarm is raised.
Settings for Acquisi-

tion/Guard Zones
Settings for collision

avoidance computa-
tion, i.e. Dangerous
Targets
Page 140 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.6 Prerequisites for the Collision Avoidance Computation
The collision avoidance computation can be performed only if the relative speed between own ship and
the target is known. This must be determined from the speed vector over ground (SOG, COG) trans-
mitted from the AIS target and from the own speed vector over ground. The own speed vector over
ground is mainly determined from the Bottom Track data of the selected speed sensor; otherwise, it
is determined with the aid of the SOG/COG of the selected position sensor.
If an AIS target is not transmitting SOG and COG, no collision avoidance computation takes place for this
target. Therefore, the target cannot be acquired automatically. If it is already being tracked, no
Dangerous Target alarm occurs in the case of a dangerous approach. The symbol of this AIS target is
displayed dashed.
If, because of missing data or caused by sensor selection, the own speed vector over ground cannot be
determined, then for all AIS targets the collision avoidance computation and the Dangerous Target
alarm do not take place. The symbols of all AIS targets are then dashed. Three minutes after the occur-
rence of this situation, the AIS NO CPA ALARM, SOG LOST alarm appears.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 141

printed 14.07.15
7.7 Deletion and Loss of Targets
An AIS target is tracked automatically until

- it is deleted manually or
- it is lost.
A tracked AIS target is lost if the AIS electronics unit does not receive any more signals from that target
within the specified time.
If an AIS target is lost within a distance of 16 NM, a LOST TARGET (n) alarm appears and the symbol
of the lost target changes its shape and flashes until the alarm is acknowledged.
Deletion of a Target
Click on the target with the MORE key, and then choose
Target from the context menu and click on the desired
action with the DO key.
An ARPA target received from NMEA interface via TTM
message has to be deleted on the host radar system.
Page 142 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.8 Target List
The target list provides an overview about

all targets followed up by the system 1).
The columns of the displayed table are self-
explanatory, they can be sorted ascending
or descending by clicking on the appropriate
title of the column. More recent versions are
providing a separate column for the Age of
the target data. In the screenshot shown
here the message from the SART is already
10 sec old.
Sorting takes place in the instant of the
click, afterwards the sequence of the entries
remains static, even if the values of the sort
criterion change.
If a target is selected in the chart/PPI area
(refer to the symbol below the red arrow in
the screenshot to the right), it is also high-
lighted with blue color in the target list as
shown here, it might be necessary to scroll
the list up or down in order to find the blue
line.
If the pointer is moved on the depiction Capacity, a hovering
window is displayed showing the percentage of memory usage for
targets. If 95% of the maximum capacity is reached, an indication
is given. If the maximum capacity is exceeded, an alarm is given.
Maximum number of targets:
Type of Target Maximum Number
ARPA 40
AIS Activated 40
AIS Sleeping > 200
Table IV / 3 Maximum Number of Targets
1) The list includes all tracked ARPA targets and all activated AIS targets. The most important target data of any
target can also be assessed directly in the chart/PPI. Just move the cursor on the target and a hovering target
data window is opened.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 143

printed 14.07.15
7.9 Critical Target and Details of a Selected Target
In order to display detailed data of a critical target

(especially AIS targets), just click with MORE (right-
click) to one of the target rows and choose Show
Details from the context menu.
You may also cancel the acquisition of this target or for
all targets.
The two small windows underneath the target data row
will display more target data like BCR, BCT, HDG, ROT
and if available the AIS data like length, beam, draught
etc.
- In former SW versions a separate expander in the top
line between List and Rx Msg gave access to the sepa-
rate critical target menu.
Select if the target list shall be sorted automatically.

Choose, depending on the target type,
one of the following sort options if auto Auto Sort
sort is activated:
- Show All
- Show Acquired Sort
Options
- Show AIS-SART
- Show AIS-ATON
The following abbreviations are used for

the presentation in the list:
CPA - The designation Closest Point of Approach means the minimum distance between the own ship
and the target at the closest point of approach.
TCPA - The Time to Closest Point of Approach means the time until the CPA is reached.
BCR - The Bow Crossing Range means the distance between the own ship and the target when the
target crosses the heading line of the own ship.
BCT - The Bow Crossing Time means the time that will pass until the target crosses the heading line of
the own ship.
☞ Target details are also available by a tool tip which opens if the
pointer is moved across an activated or acquired target in the PPI or
chart area.
Page 144 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.10 Show List of Received AIS Messages
The AIS unit can receive safety related messages from other stations. These messages are transferred
to the RADARPILOT Platinum system. Up to 50 messages are stored there.
If the maximum number of messages is reached, the oldest messages will be deleted automatically.
New messages will generate a warning in the alarm system to alert the operator of viewing the message
text in the target related message list.
New Safety Message

When the AIS electronics unit receives a safety message, this is sent to the connected interface and the
New AIS Safety Message warning appears in the alarm list of the RADARPILOT Platinum system. By
acknowledgment the warning disappears from the list 1).
The operator must open the safety message list via Tools > Target > RX Msg in order to have access
to all received and temporarily stored messages.
Message not yet

read
Rx Msg menu,
earlier SW
Message not yet version
acknowledged
- The list is sorted according to the receive time of the messages; the latest (newest) entry is shown
at the top of the list. The sorting sequence of the list cannot be changed.
- Any message from the same source with the same text as already received will not be stored again,
but its time marking in the list will be updated. In this way it will show up in the first line again.
Operating in the List

The width of the columns in the list can be modified if required, but none of the columns can be made
completely invisible. If the lines get longer than the width of the window, a horizontal slider will be shown
which can be used to move to invisible parts of the window.
A vertical slider is shown if the number of list entries does not fit into the window. Scroll to the top of
the list to see the newest (last received) message.
Later SW versions are without yellow triangle for not yet acknowledged messages.
Later SW versions are coming along with inverse function of the status box, if the message has been
read, the box is checked.
If a single line in the message box is selected with right-click (MORE), a sub-menu opens with entries
for selecting the corresponding target in the radar or chart presentation or for deleting this line or for
deleting all message lines.
1)
Depending on the system layout it might be necessary to acknowledge the alarm at the MKD
(Minimum Keyboard Display) of the connected AIS system as well.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 145

printed 14.07.15
Page 146 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.11 Transmit AIS Safety Message
In the basic configuration the AIS

transponder can not be controlled
remotely. The transmit function
has to be performed from the
MKD (Minimum Keyboard Display)
of the transponder.
In a full navigation system the
remote line is typically activated
and the transmit function can be
performed from the TX Msg menu
as shown in the lower right
screenshot.
Rx Msg menu,
later SW version
Edit a new safety related message

and transmit it to all ships in the
AIS range or acknowledge a
received AIS safety message to
the originator as follows:
Open the Tx Msg menu under
Tools->Target->TxMsg.
First edit the text, select the
address and then click to Send.
If To Selected has been chosen
as address, the message is sent to
the originator of the safety
message, which has been selected
in the list under the Rx Msg
menu as shown above.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 147

printed 14.07.15
Page 148 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions NAV - Navigation Tools
8 NAV - Navigation Tools
The navigation tools expander provides four different

tools as follows:
1. The Lines of Position (LOP) tool set for the
verification of own ships position by taking
optical bearings of known landmarks.
2. The four Parallel Index Lines (PI) for estab-
lishing a safe corridor for navigation.
3. The two Electronic Bearing Line and Vari-
able Range Marker (EBL&VRM) tool sets for
measuring the bearing and range of chart
objects/targets.
4. The User Symbols (User Sym) tool set for
adding various navigation symbols for light-
houses, wrecks, beacons etc. in the chart wher-
ever information is missing.
LOP 2 (Base
Line)
Symbol
for
Anchor
Area
Parallel index lines
EBL/
VRM,
centered
LOP 1 (Base
AIS Target Line)
Fig. IV / 3 Application Area with superimposed navigation tools
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 149

printed 14.07.15
NAV - Navigation Tools Operating Instructions
8.1 LOP - Lines of Position
The Lines of Position function is supporting three methods for the verification or determination of the
own ships position without using any position sensor information.
The three methods are based on fixed objects in the vicinity of the own ship which are also plotted in
the chart, for example light-houses. The range and bearing of these objects have to be taken by optical
means like pelorus (bearing plate) or binoculars. The three methods are:
- Known Bearing and Range to a known landmark
- Cross Bearing (two bearings) to two known landmarks
- Transferred Base Line to one known landmark
The Lines of Position Menu

Click to reset data of the selected LOP. See useful information below
Click to enter data for the chosen LOP
Anchor Monitoring is an optional

One of three function and not always included in
LOPs can be the expander
chosen
Check the box Click to transfer the appropriate base
to display the line.
LOP in the
chart. If --.-° is Sets the position fix. (Button is only
displayed, active if data has been entered in the
create a LOP fields above). See also important
first. remark below
Indication of the Use calculated position data for Dead
calculated ship’s Reckoning.(Button is only active in
position case the position sensor is set to
Manual DR.
Page 150 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.1.1 LOP - Known Bearing and Range to a Landmark
From the ship’s bridge, the true bearing  and range r of a land-
mark with known position, i.e. a lighthouse, are taken by optical
means (pelarus, binoculars).
Based on these two values and the position of the landmark in the
chart the LOP function calculates the position of your own vessel.
It can be dropped into the chart as a new position fix.
With just another click the own ship symbol which is shown in the
chart is shifted to this new position fix. Precondition is that the
position sensor input has been set in advance to Manual DR
(dead reckoning) or in case all sensors have failed, it may be
already active in this mode.
The procedure is as follows:

1. Move the cursor to the landmark in the chart. With
MORE (right-click) open the context menu. Select
the entry Create LOP.
2. A line starting at the landmark with zero degree is
shown. Draw the line with the cursor to the bearing
which has been taken by optical means (i.e. 208
degree as shown in the first screenshot above).
3. Open the LOP expander from the ECDIS sidebar as
shown to the right. The bearing has been filled in
already in line 1.
4. Click to Adjust to open the Set Line of Position
window as shown in the next screenshot.
5. Enter the range value which has been taken by optical means.
Adjust the bearing if not exact enough. Adjust the position of the
lighthouse if not exact enough.
6. Click to the Set button in the bottom line. The range value is
taken over into line 1 of the above LOP expander.
7. The LOP expander is now showing the resulting position fix. Click
to the Drop Pos Fix button to drop a user symbol for position fix
in the chart. In the above screenshot from the chart this position
fix is marked with the number 1016.
8. Switch over the position sensor input to Manual DR as shown
below (if not already done automatically).
9. Click to Set DR Origin in the LOP expander to shift the own ships position to the new position fix.
The own ship symbol in the chart moves accordingly as shown above.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 151

printed 14.07.15
8.1.2 LOP - Known Bearing to two Landmarks (Cross Bearing)
From the ship’s bridge, the true bearings 1 and 2 of

two fixed objects with known position, i.e. two light-
houses, are taken by optical means (pelarus, binoculars).
The intersection point of these two base lines is the actual
position of your ship. If the two base lines intersect in a
rather acute or flat angle, a third fixed object with its base
line can be added.
Based on the intersection point and the position of the
two landmarks in the chart the LOP function calculates
the position of your own vessel. It can be dropped into
the chart as a new position fix.
With just another click the own ship symbol which is shown in the chart is shifted to this new position
fix. Precondition is that the position sensor input has been set in advance to Manual DR (dead reck-
oning) or in case all sensors have failed, it may be already active in this mode.

1. Move the cursor to the first landmark in the chart.
With MORE (right-click) open the context menu.
Select the entry Create LOP.
2. A line starting at the landmark with zero degree is
shown. Draw the line with the cursor to the bearing
which has been taken by optical means (i.e. 208
degree as shown in the first screenshot above).
3. Do the same with a second landmark.
shown to the right. The two bearings have been
filled in already in line 1 and in line 2.
5. Select either LOP 1 or LOP 2 in the top line (see red arrow) and click to Adjust to open the Set
Line of Position window for LOP 1 or LOP 2. Adjust the bearing and the position of the lighthouse
if not precise enough. Click to the Set button in the bottom line. The adjusted values are taken over
into lines 1 and 2 of the above LOP expander.
6. .The LOP expander is now showing the resulting
position fix. Click to the Drop Pos Fix button to
drop a user symbol for position fix in the chart. In
the above screenshot from the chart this position fix
is marked with the number 1012.
7. Switch over the position sensor input to Manual DR
as shown in the previous chapter.
8. Click to Set DR Origin in the LOP expander to shift
the own ships position to the new position fix. The
own ship symbol in the chart moves accordingly as
shown to the right.
Page 152 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.1.3 LOP - Known Bearing at two Times (Transferred Base Line)
The ship is sailing with known and constant

speed and course. The true bearing 1 of a fixed LOP 2
object with known landmark (i.e. a lighthouse) is
taken and entered into the system (marked with
LOP 1 in the screenshot).
After a while the true bearing 2 of the same LOP 1*
landmark is taken again. Due to the fact that the
ship’s position has changed, the true bearing
does now have another value (marked with LOP
2 in the screenshot).
Now the base line LOP 1 is shifted in parallel LOP 1
along the track the ship has been made.
The intersection point of the new base line (LOP
2) and the shifted (transferred) base line (LOP
1*) is the actual position of the ship.

1. Move the cursor to the first landmark in the chart.
With MORE (right-click) open the context menu.
Select the entry Create LOP.
2. A line starting at the landmark is shown. Draw the
line with the cursor to the bearing which has been
taken by optical means (i.e. 224.9 degree as shown
here).
3. Wait during the ship is sailing an appropriate
distance.
shown to the right. The first bearing has been filled
in already in line 1.
5. Select LOP 2 from the top menu line (see red arrow).
6. Move the cursor again to the landmark in the chart. With MORE (right-click) open the context
menu. Select the entry Create LOP. Draw the line with the cursor to the new bearing (here 157.3
degree).
7. Click to the check box LOP 1 to activate the transfer of the line. The transferred line is shown in
the above screenshot from chart and marked with 10:15 TPL.
8. The LOP expander is now showing the resulting position fix. Click to the Drop Pos Fix button to
drop a user symbol for position fix in the chart. In the above screenshot this position fix is marked
with the time 10:15.
9. Click to Set DR Origin as described in the previous chapters to shift the own ships position to this
new position fix. Please have in mind, that the ship might have travelled in the meantime again a
considerable distance as shown in the above screenshot.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 153

printed 14.07.15
8.1.4 Further Hints on Lines of Position
Difference between position drop fix symbol and intersection point
Position fix
Base line #2 Base line #1
1342
LOP 1
LOP 2 1342
1342 EP
After having clicked on Drop Pos Fix, the calculated position is displayed on the screen by means of a
symbol and additional information.
It may happen that the symbol of the position fix is not displayed at the same position
as the intersection of the base lines.
This is not a fault! The base lines are displayed as straight lines within a Mercator projection. But
in reality, they should be displayed as slight curves, with a radius depending on the actual geograph-
ical position of the ship. The calculation of the Drop Position Fix takes this fact into account and
may deliver a slightly different position than the graphical method does.
The more northern or southern the ship’s position is, the more different are the calculated and graphi-
cally determined positions.
Useful Information:
The position data from LOP 1 is automatically copied into the LOP 2-tab after Set has been clicked, the
position data from LOP 2 is automatically copied into the LOP 3-tab after Set has been clicked. This
makes it easier to work with the data, especially when using transferred base lines.
Clicking on Reset on LOP 1 erases all data in all tabs, clicking on Reset on LOP 2 erases data in LOP
2-tab and LOP 3-tab. Clicking on Reset on LOP 3 erases data only in LOP 3.
All actions taken with respect to LOP are stored in the voyage recording.
Page 154 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.2 PI - Parallel Index Lines
There are four independent Parallel Index Lines available. Each of

them can be adjusted individually.
Depending on the setting in the PI group, the bearing is displayed as
true (T) or relative (R) bearing
After switch-on by means of a click in the PI group (red arrow), the lines are superimposed on the chart.
☞ When parallel index lines are switched on, they appear in the form in which they were set last. If
the display range has been reduced in the meantime, they might be situated outside the visible
range.
Alter the distance of a line by a left-click

on it. The line is now displayed with three
small "handles". Click and hold the center
handle and drag the line to the desired
radius.
Change the bearing of a line again by a
left-click on it. Then click and hold the line
anywhere but not on the small handles
and rotate it to the desired bearing.
Adjust the length of a line again by a left-
click on it. Then click and hold the line at
one of the outer handles and draw to the
desired length.
The balloon-text shows the actual data of
the line.
To reset PI lines, right-click into the chart
and choose RESET PI Lines from the
context menu.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 155

printed 14.07.15
8.3 EBL - Electronic Bearing Lines
With the EBL, the bearing of an object with respect to own

ship or the bearing between two objects can be deter-
mined.
After switch-on by means of a click in the Tool Set group,
the electronic bearing line is superimposed on the chart. It
appears with the same data as they have been displayed
last time.
Alter the bearing of the EBL by a left-click on it in the
chart. The EBL is now displayed with a small "handle" in its
center. Click and hold the line anywhere to pull it to the
desired bearing.
Change the origin of the bearing line by a left-click on it in
the chart and pull its origin to the desired position.
☞ Switch the EBL off and on again in order to re-center
it to the own ship.
☞ If the display range is reduced when the EBL is in the

switched-on state, the EBL might be situated outside
the visible range. Switch the EBL off and then on
again, to return it to the visible range.
The current bearing is displayed in the Tool Set group. To switch off
the display of the EBL, clear the check box in the Tool Set group.
Latitude-Dependent Errors in the Display of the EBL

With the type of projection used for the longitude/latitude grid in the ECDIS, the parallels of latitude
become more strongly curved with increasing latitude, while the meridians converge increasingly with
increasing distance from the equator (i.e. the direction of a meridian at the edge of the chart is not 0
- 180 but might be 358 - 182); in other words, their directions no longer correspond to the degree
scale at the edge of the chart.
In contrast to this, the EBL is always displayed as a straight line; its bearing displayed as an EBL value
has a deviation. The following table shows the maximum bearing deviation for the various latitudes and
range settings.
Distance of EBL from Geographical Latitude
Own Ship
20 ° 40 ° 60 ° 80 °
10 NM < 0.1 ° 0.1 ° 0.3 ° 0.9 °
20 NM 0.1 ° 0.3 ° 0.6 ° 1.9 °
40 NM 0.2 ° 0.5 ° 1.2 ° 3.8 °
60 NM 0.4 ° 0.8 ° 1.7 ° 5.7 °
80 NM 0.5 ° 1.1 ° 2.3 ° 7.5 °
Table IV / 4 Latitude-Dependent Errors of the EBL
Page 156 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.4 VRM - Variable Range Markers
With the variable range markers, the distance

of an object from own ship or (in conjunction
with the EBL) the distance between two
objects can be measured.
After switch-on by means of a click in the Tool
Set group, the variable range marker is super-
imposed in the PPI. It appears with the same
data as they have been displayed last time.
Alter the range of the VRM by a left-click on it
in the chart. The VRM is now displayed with
four small "handles". Click and hold one of the
handles and pull the ring to the desired radius.
The origin of the range circle can be changed

only if both EBL and VRM are switched on.
Please refer to page 158 how to operate EBL
and VRM jointly.
The current radius of the VRM is displayed in the Tool Set group. To
switch off the display of the VRM, clear the check box in the Tool
Set group.
☞ If the display range is reduced when the VRM is in the switched-
on state, the VRM might be situated outside the visible range.
Switch the VRM off and then on again, to return it to the visible
range.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 157

printed 14.07.15
8.4.1 Operating VRM and EBL Jointly
If the EBL and the VRM in one Tool Set have

been switched on both, they are linked to each
other.
Move the cursor to the intersection point of
both, a cross appears, and by left-click and
hold draw them to the jointly desired values for
range and bearing.
Move the cursor to the center point of both
(the own ships position) and by a left-click
draw them to the desired new position.
To re-center it to the own ship, switch off and
on again the EBL.
Page 158 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.5 User Symbols
User symbols are individual user made

chart objects which can be inserted into
the workstation database in order to
supplement the radar presentation or offi-
cial electronic charts.
User symbols can be assigned globally, as
Ensure
available in earlier SW versions, or to a correct
user defined group or to any route which setting, the
is already stored on your RADARPILOT field for
Visibility
Platinum system (latest SW version). Group is
The assignment is made initially when a not avail-
able in
symbol is dropped into the radar presenta- earlier SW
tion or into the chart according to the versions. Open submenu to delete
setting shown in the top line (red arrow). all symbols of a group
Ensure that this line, if available, shows
Global if nothing else is required from your side. The assignment can be changed at any time later.
User symbols which have been dropped by the user are stored permanently in the databases on all
connected workstations. Deletion of a selected symbol is one method to remove user symbols from these
databases (the only method in earlier SW versions). Further-on all symbols assigned to a certain group,
to a route, or all symbols globally can be deleted with the Edit function as marked above. In addition
they can be stored on external memory devices like USB memory sticks. See main chapter DATA MAIN-
TENANCE for details (page 315).
The user symbols panel of the Display expander provides different object categories:
- Symbols (position fix, anchorage area, beacons, lights, platforms, radio stations and wrecks etc)
- Areas (highlighted danger areas and feature areas, see page 163)
- Lines (safety lines, feature lines and clearing lines, see page 165)
- Events and text (for free text information and cautions, see page 167)
The figure to the right

shows examples of these
categories.
Danger highlight (red)
Switching On and Off the
Own safety line (orange; the
display of all user symbols is hatching points towards the
achieved by a MORE click unsafe area)
into the PPI/chart area,
Feature area (ochre, brown)
select Layer from context
menu and set/clear the box Names and notes are
for User Symbols (see displayed if the display
of the Text Labels is
page 168). switched on
If only those symbols shall Feature line (orange)
be visualized, which belong Text note, information
to a certain group or route,
go to the Tab Presentation Text note, caution
> User SYM (see page Symbols (examples)
170).
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 159

printed 14.07.15
8.5.1 Placing a User Symbol - Graphic Mode
With this method, the user symbol can be placed in the chart area be means of the trackball/mouse. The
procedure is explained here by means of the user-symbol beacon cardinal.
Before starting to drop new user symbols please check if the visibility group as indicated in the top line
is set to your requirements, Global, Group, or Route. If uncertain, refer to page 169 for details.
Select a Symbol
Open the User Symbols part of the Display
expander and click on the + in front of the
desired category (Symbols, Areas, Lines,
Events). Ensure
correct
A list of the different symbols in the selected setting, the
category will be shown. Use the vertical field for
scrollbar to see the complete list. Visibility
Group is
Choose one symbol and select the appro- not avail-
able in
priate check box if the symbol is to have a earlier SW
Top-mark or an indication for a Light. Not versions.
every symbol can be set to have a top-mark
or a light.
A name for the object and additional information text can be entered in the text boxes.
Dropping and Adjusting the Symbol

Click to highlight the desired symbol icon, move the
pointer into the PPI/ chart area and click again to drop
the symbol at the desired position.
The object will be shown with an object abbreviation
in front of its name. In the example, bn means
beacon. If the pointer is moved upon the object, addi-
tional information is displayed as shown here.
Click to the symbol with DO (left-click), click again and hold, draw the symbol to the desired location in
the chart.
Symbol Information
Select a symbol which
has been dropped before
by clicking to it with DO
(left click). The symbol is
then marked with a
small handle.
Click with More (right-
click) anywhere into the
PPI/Chart area, to open
the context menu.
Select Chart Informa-
tion -> User Symbols
-> Other -> Beacon, cardinal to see detailed information about this user symbol.
Page 160 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.5.2 Adjusting a Symbol - Numeric Mode
Select a symbol which has been dropped before by clicking to

it with DO (left click).
The symbol is then marked with a small handle.
Click with More (right-click) anywhere into the PPI/Chart area,
to open the context menu 1).
In the context menu, select User Symbols and Set Coordi-
nates of of Beacon, cardinal.
Enter the desired position in the pop-up window.
Finally click to Set to adjust the user symbol to the desired
position.
If the data entry window shows UTM entry fields instead of Latitude
and Longitude fields, please refer to the following page for switching
back to latitude/Longitude data entry mode.
The exact location of a symbol

Each user symbol shows a small orange line at the
bottom with a ring at the end, this ring is the indication
for a user symbol and is not related to the center loca-
tion. The symbol itself is shown here in the paper chart
style setting.
Another example is given here for the simplified chart

style setting.
The center location of a symbol is marked with a small

quad after having clicked on it with the DO (left-click)
button as shown here.
1) Alternatively select a symbol from the tab menu (see page 160), right-click anywhere into the chart area, and the
data entry window will open as well. Input the position and click to set and the symbol is placed at the desired
location.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 161

printed 14.07.15
8.5.3 Adjusting a Symbol - UTM Data Entry
The UTM System (Universal Transverse

Mercator) is a world-wide coordinate system. It is
supported by later RADARPILOT Platinum versions 1).
Select a symbol which has been dropped before by
clicking to it with DO (left click).
Click with More (right-click) anywhere into the PPI/
Chart area, to open the context menu.
In the context menu, select User Symbols and Set
Coordinates of Position Fix.
The Data Entry Window for Setting Coordinates is

opened.
Click with More (right-click) anywhere into the data
entry window area to open another context menu.
In this context menu switch-over to Universal Trans-
verse Mercator (UTM).
The Data Entry Window changes to the UTM Input
Format.
The Data Entry Window shoes the values in UTM

format which have been automatically calculated from
the current position of the selected user symbol in Lat/
Long format.
Enter the precise coordinates in UTM format.
Finally click to Set to adjust the user symbol to the
exact position.
The UTM format mode remains for all symbols until it
is switched back by opening the context menu again
and switching-over to Geodetic Latitude and
Longitude.
Since the Latitude and Longitude coordinates are based on
WGS84, also the UTM coordinates will be based on WGS84.
1) It divides the earth surface (from 80° South to 84° North) in 6° wide vertical stripes (zones), which
are separately levelled with the optimal Mercator projection und covered with a Cartesian coordinate
system. The system can be based on WGS 84 and is step by step introduced for land surveying.
Page 162 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.5.4 Placing an Area
Select an Area
Editing of areas is following the same
basic principles as described above for
symbols (graphical point objects). Ensure
correct
Before starting to drop new user symbols setting, the
please check if the visibility group as indi- field for
cated in the top line is set to your Visibility
requirements, Global, Group, or Route. Group is
not avail-
If uncertain, refer to page 169 for details. able in
earlier SW
Open the User Symbols part of the versions.
Display expander and click on the + in
front of the desired category (here
Areas).
Choose a Danger highlight or a User’s feature area and enter a name for the area. Additional infor-
mation text can be entered in the text box.
Danger Highlight
A Danger Highlight is a red colored filled area which can be detected by the chart monitoring function.
Click on the Danger highlight icon first, and then click with DO in the PPI/Chart Area to set the first
vertex of the area. The moving cursor is then followed by a connection line to the previously set graphical
point of the area. In this way an area with 3 vertex points as a minimum can be set. There is no upper
limitation for the number of points which can be created for one and the same area.
To close the area after the last vertex is set,
- click into the last connection line with MORE or
- set the last point directly on the first one
to end the edit mode and to complete (close) the created area.
User’s Feature
Editing of Feature Areas is following the same principles as shown above for Danger Highlights.
Several areas with different transparency (No Fill / 25 / 50 / 75 %) can be created and drawn on
the electronic chart. In contrast to the Danger Highlight a Feature Area cannot be detected by the chart
monitoring function.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 163

printed 14.07.15
8.5.5 Removing or Modifying an Area
Select the area by a click on one of the vertex

points. Handle
The handle shown at the vertex indicates the selec-
tion of this area.
A click with MORE on the handle or anywhere in the
chart area shows the context menu.
Select Delete: Danger highlight to delete the
complete area.
If you want to modify the shape of the area choose
Delete Point to delete just one point of the area or
select Continue Area to add further points to this
area until the modify mode is ended by a MORE click
in the PPI/Chart area.
Removing and modification of Feature Areas is
done in the same way as described above.
Page 164 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.5.6 Placing a Line
Editing of Lines is following the same

principles as shown for Danger Highlight
areas.
Before starting to drop new user
symbols please check if the visibility Ensure
group as indicated in the top line is set correct
setting. The
to your requirements, Global, Group, field for Visi-
or Route. If uncertain, refer to page bility Group is
169 for details. not available
in earlier SW
In the selection list under Tools -> NAV versions.
-> User Sym open the list of available
lines by a click on the (+) symbol.
Select if you want to create an Own Safety or MARPOL Line or a User’s Feature line by a click on
the entry in the selection list. Refer to the next page for the Danger Bearing Line.
Own Safety Line or Own MARPOL Line

An Own Safety Line is a line with orange color and with short hachure lines pointing to the dangerous
side. It can be monitored by the chart monitoring function. You can create several safety lines at different
locations each having a variable number of vertex points, but a defined start and a defined end.
Click on the Own Safety Line icon first, and then click with
DO in the PPI/Chart Area to set the first vertex of the line.
The moving cursor is then followed by a connection line to
the previously set graphical point of the line. In this way a
line with 2 vertex points as a minimum can be set. There is
no limitation for the number of points which can be created.
To end the line after the last vertex is set, click into the
last connection line with MORE to end the edit mode and to
complete the created line.
The orientation of the Own Safety Line (the dangerous /
not dangerous side) can be changed by a click in the
context menu on Reverse Own Safety Line.
The handling for the MARPOL Line is the same, the color
is green/red, an alarm is given on crossing from both sides.
User’s Feature Line

Several line styles with 4 different patterns (solid /
dashed / dotted / dashed-dotted) and 1 or 2 pixels line
width can be created and drawn on the electronic
chart. In contrast to the Own Safety Line the User’s
Feature Line cannot be monitored by the chart moni-
toring function, no alarm is given.
Removing and modification of Safety and Feature Lines
is done in the same way as shown above for Areas via
selection of the line on the screen and subsequent operation via the context menu by a MORE click on
the selected line. You can choose to delete one single point or the complete line.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 165

printed 14.07.15
8.5.7 Danger Bearing or Clearing Lines
Danger Bearing Lines (also called Clearing Lines) shall indicate a limitation of the course to be steered
in certain sea areas. For this purpose a
- NMT Not More Than and a NLT Not Less Than line can be set.
In the selection list under Tools -> NAV -> User Sym open the list of available lines by a click on the
(+) symbol. Select Danger Bearing by a click on the entry. Select NMT or NLT and set the line as
required. Check if the visibility group is set to your requirements, Global, Group, or Route. Go to page
169 for any changes.
The course value not to be exceeded is calculated automatically and is indicated together with the line
and a direction arrow. The clearing lines can only have two points (start and end point).
To delete the line again, click on the start or end point and then with MORE > User Symbols >
Delete: Danger bearing the deletion can be executed.
The visibility group has

been set to User
Defined, just check if
this setting is correct or
if Global or Route is
needed. The field for
Visibility Group is not
available in earlier SW
versions.
Fig. IV / 4 Set a Clearing or Danger Bearing Line
Page 166 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.5.8 Events and Text
Editing of Events and Text Notes is another feature of the user object editor. You can drop Events which
have the symbol and add text to it.
Additionally you can drop either a text object as Information or as Caution . The procedure is
identical for both objects.
The description for setting, modification and deletion is equivalent to the operation of point symbols, i.e.
you must select the relevant entry under User Sym, Events and Text, click on the respective icon, add
a text and then click into the PPI/chart area where the text note or the event marker shall be located.
After selection and marking by the orange handle you can move the event marker or text note to another
location or delete it from the screen and from the storage device.
Check if the visibility group is set to your requirements, Global, Group, or Route. Go to page 169 for
any changes.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 167

printed 14.07.15
8.5.9 Switching Off the User Symbol Layer
User symbols are displayed on a separate layer on top of the basic chart or PPI area.
They are covered by higher prioritized objects as follows:
• by chart objects
• by the radar video
• by navigation tools (EBL, VRM, and LOP)
• and by the own ship symbol and ARPA and AIS targets (highest priority)
Nevertheless, if in doubt, and if a user symbol covers a basic chart information, the whole user symbol
layer with all symbols, regardless to which group they are assigned, can be switched off as follows:
Do a MORE click into the PPI/chart area, select
Layer and clear the box for User Symbols.
It can be necessary, to check this setting if user
symbols are not visible in the chart or PPI area,
just activate the setting again.
Page 168 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.5.10 Assigning User Symbols to a Visibility Group (Later SW Versions only)
A new symbol which shall be dropped into the PPI/ chart area is assigned either globally, or to a user
defined group or to an existing route as indicated in the top line of the Edit User Symbol menu (see
red arrow in the screenshot below). Just select the required assignment as described below before drop-
ping a symbol.
Global Group
All user symbols which are dropped into the PPI/ chart area are visible at all times.
Of course the location of the symbol has to be included in the actual view
on the screen and the user symbol layer has not to be switched off.
User Defined Group

All group related user symbols which are dropped into the PPI/ chart area are visible as long as their
visibility group is switched on. Go to the Tab Presentation > User SYM to select the visible groups of
symbols. Before assigning any symbol to a group, this group has to be defined.
Just click to Edit and New User Defined Group to add a new group to the database.
The remark in the yellow box applies here as well.
Route Related Group

All route related symbols which are dropped into the PPI/ chart area are visible as long as their related
route is activated. Before assigning any symbol to a route, this route has to be defined (see page 248).
The remark in the yellow box applies here as well.
Assignment to a
visibility group,
change if required
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 169

printed 14.07.15
8.5.11 Switching on a User Defined Visibility Group (Later SW Versions only)
As already described on the last page, symbols attached to the global group are always visible. Further-
on symbols attached to a route are visible when this route is activated.
Symbols attached to a user defined group can be set to visible or not visible by switching this group on
or off. The necessary steps are as follows:
Go to the Tab Presentation -> User SYM to
open a further window for setting the visibility
of groups and to define new groups.
Set the Show All check box to have all user
symbols visible, which are attached to user
defined groups.
Click to Select User Defined Groups to open
the sub-menu as shown below for further
details.
The menu presents a list of all user defined
groups and their current visibility status.
In the example the group for Glasgow Approach
is On, the same applies to Bristol Approach.
Click to the small triangle at the end of each
group related line to set this group to On, Off,
or depending on the active route. If the cursor
is moved over the route entry, a tool-tip opens to indicate the catalog where this route can be found.
☞ If a group is set to Depend on Route, all symbols of this group are visible, as long as this route
is active.
☞ Several groups of symbols can be set to always visible (On) or to depending visible (Depend on
Route) at the same time.
☞ A typical example are two groups of symbols supporting the approach of an inland river harbour.
One group is supporting the upstream route and the other one is supporting the downstream route.
So one group is set depending on the active upstream route and the other is set depending on the
active reverse route.
Page 170 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
8.5.12 Modifying Assignment & Details of User Symbols (Later SW Versions)
Select a symbol which has been dropped before by clicking to it with DO (left click).
Click with More (right-click) anywhere into the PPI/ chart area, to open the context menu.
In the context menu, select User Symbols -> Edit Details.
Change the name and the remark for this user
symbol if required.
Change the Visibility Groups if required, set to
Global, User Defined, or Route.
If Global is selected, no further settings have to be
made. Click to Set to assign the symbol to the global
group.
If Route is selected, the opened routes are already
indicated. Select a route and click to Set to assign
the symbol to the route. If no route is open, you
have to open one before.
If User Defined is selected, click to the next field to
select one of the available groups. Click to Set to
assign the symbol to this group.
If the assignment shall be made to more than one group or route, just click to Edit and to Add addi-
tional assignment to add a further line with another group or route.
If an assignment shall be deleted, click to Edit and to Remove Entry to withdraw this line.
Click to Cancel if the new settings shall be discarded.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 171

printed 14.07.15
Routes Operating Instructions
9 Routes
The Routes Tab provides menus for exploring and monitoring a route.
The first step is to open the Explorer and either open an existing route or create a new route. This is
similar to the handling of data files under the Microsoft Windows operating system.
The Monitoring function is indicating the difference between actual track and planned route and also
the corresponding alarms.
A detailed description of these functions is given in the main chapter about ROUTE PLANNING AND
MONITORING (see page 257 and page 263).
In systems with TRACKPILOT an additional menu for Route Data is available indicating in addition the
control status of the TRACKPILOT. It is described in the separate main chapter about TRACK CONTROL.
Page 172 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
RADAR FUNCTIONS
RADARPILOT Platinum RADAR FUNCTIONS
Operating Instructions RADAR Safety
1 RADAR Safety
Pay particular attention to the notes and warnings referring to possible faults in
the radar display, since such faults can impair the detection of targets.
The radar can perform its safety function only if it is in proper state. Observe the following rules to
ensure the correct function of the radar.
- Check the radar’s transmission power and the receiver sensitivity regularly by means of the perfor-
mance monitor – see on page 224 in this volume about Checking the RADAR Functions.
- Position receivers connected to the RADARPILOT Platinum system must comply with the standard
IEC 61162-1, which largely corresponds to NMEA 0183.
- ARPA target data are depending directly on the accuracy and proper function of the selected speed
sensor and the gyro compass.
- Correct interpretation of indicated data requires knowledge about the implemented Consistent
Common Reference System (CCRS) - see the first chapter in the volume about GENERAL FUNC-
TIONS.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 175

printed 14.07.15
RADAR FUNCTIONS RADARPILOT Platinum
RADAR Safety Operating Instructions
1.1 RADAR Safety – Electrical Systems
HIGH VOLTAGE!
Even when the equipment is switched off, there can be dangerous voltage present
at exposed contacts in the units. Therefore, before a unit is opened, it must be
ensured that the voltage supply to the unit is disconnected from the ship's mains,
and that it remains disconnected.
Because of the capacitors contained in the units, there can be a dangerous

voltage present in any unit several minutes or even for hours after switching off
and disconnection from the mains supply. The different electronic units of the
RADAR system may be opened by qualified, trained persons only.
If it should be necessary to work on gearboxes while they are opened, pay special
attention to the setting of the high-voltage supply switch (interlock). It is situated
inside the gearbox and switches off the high voltage of the transceiver as soon
as the cover of the gearbox is opened. BUT: For service purposes the interlock
can be set into a position that high voltage is present inside the gearbox. Refer
to the technical manual for details.
- If the units are to be disconnected from the ship's mains, keep in mind that each antenna unit, each
transceiver electronics unit and each indicator has its own supply of power from the ship's mains.
Page 176 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions RADAR Safety
1.2 RADAR Safety – Radiation
WARNING! ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION!

Do not enter the radiation danger zone of the rotating antenna, and make sure
that no other person enters the danger zone. See table V / 1.
Before working on the antenna unit, the antenna switch on the unit must be set
to zero and the transceiver must be disconnected from the ship's mains.
- There is no international agreement about the danger posed by high frequency radiation of the kind
produced by the radar systems. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m2 is
considered dangerous; in some countries, values over 10 W/m2 are regarded as not being
completely safe. If in doubt, observe the applicable local regulations, and always ensure minimum
possible exposure.
Radius of the Radiation Danger Zone

Transceiver
Antenna Type Radiation Density Radiation Density Radiation Density
A = Up; B = Down
100 W/m2 50 W/m2 10 W/m2
5 ft X-Band 12.5 kW, Version A 1.4 m 2.8 m 14 m
25 kW, Version A 2.1 m 4.2 m 21 m
25 kW, Version B 1.65 m 3.3 m 16 m
8 ft X-Band 12.5 kW, Version A 0.65 m 1.4 m 7m
25 kW, Version A 1.3 m 2.6 m 13 m
25 kW, Version B 0.9 m 1.8 m 9m
14 ft S-Band 30 kW, Version A 1.3 m 2.6 m 13 m
30 kW, Version B 0.7 m 1.6 m 7.8 m
Table V / 1 Radiation Danger Zone of Radar Antennas
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 177

printed 14.07.15
RADAR Safety Operating Instructions
1.3 RADAR Safety – Mechanical Systems
TURNING DEVICES!
When the radar system is switched to ON, it is possible that, instead of the
expected antenna, a different one will begin to rotate depending on the settings
and configuration adjusted before shut-down of the radar system.
Therefore, it must be ensured beforehand that all antennas can rotate freely and
that there are no persons in the danger zones of all antennas.
Before starting work in the vicinity of a radar antenna, make sure to switch off
the man-aloft switch which is situated on the bottom side of the gearbox. Refer
to the technical manual for details.
CRUSHING HAZARD!
Gearboxes and other mechanical units of the RADAR system may be opened by
qualified, trained persons only.
DANGER OF VIOLENT PRESSURE TO HANDS AND FINGERS!

Uncovered toothed belts and wheels inside the housing.
Make sure the MAN ALOFT SWITCH is set to zero when working at the opened gear box!
Page 178 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions RADAR Standards and Approval
2 RADAR Standards and Approval
According to the international convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) chapter V radar equip-
ment is classified into three categories depending of the size of the ship. The RADAR Platinum series is
approved for the highest two categories CAT 1 and CAT 2. The table below provides a summary of capa-
bilities and differences for both categories as implemented in this radar series.
Category of ship/craft
CAT 2 1) CAT 1 2)
Size of ship/craft 500 gt to <10000gt All ships/craft 10000 gt
Minimum operational display area diameter 250 mm 320 mm
Minimum display area 270 mm x 270 mm 340 mm x 340 mm
Usually used monitor for Platinum 22’’ TFT 26’’ TFT
Auto acquisition of targets Yes Yes
ARPA target capacity 40 40
Activated AIS target capacity 40 40
Sleeping AIS target capacity 200 200
Trial maneuver Yes Yes
1)
Earlier classified as 12" radar
2)
Earlier classified as 16" radar
Table V / 2 Categories of RADAR
If the HSC option is installed (by configuration parameter), above categories are extended with the suffix
H as follows:
With 22” TFT monitor: CAT 2 H

With 26” TFT monitor: CAT 1 H
If the Chart Radar option is installed (by configuration parameter), above categories are extended with
the suffix C as follows:
With 22” TFT monitor: CAT 2 C, or CAT 2 HC

With 26” TFT monitor: CAT 1 C, or CAT 1 HC
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 179

printed 14.07.15
2.1
Page 180
below:
List of type approved SAM ECDIS versions and their appropriate IMO / IEC / IHO Standards
NACOS Platinum
RADAR FUNCTIONS
IEC IEC
Hardware Hardware IMO ITU-R IEC IEC Test
Software Test Standard Test Standard
Product Version Version Performance Recommen- Test Standard Standard for
Version for Digital for Digital
X-Band S-Band Standards dations for Radar Presentation
Interfaces Interfaces
RADARPILOT Platinum (for Chartradar refer to ECDIS SW List)
A.278(VIII)
RADAR Standards and Approval
NG3050 A002 NG3051 A002 A.694(17) IEC 62388 IEC 62288 IEC 61162-1 IEC 61162-2
RADARPILOT
1.0.xx.xx and GR3050 and GR3051 A.823(19) ITU-R M.1177-3 Ed 1.0 Ed 1.0 Ed 4.0 Ed 1.0
Platinum
A001 to A012 A001 to A007 MSC.191(79) (2007) (2008) (2010) (1998)
MSC192(79)
A.278(VIII)
NG3050A004 NG3051 A002 A.694(17) IEC 62388 IEC 62288 IEC 61162-1 IEC 61162-2
RADARPILOT
1.1.xx.xx and GR3050 and GR3051 A.823(19) ITU-R M.1177-3 Ed 2.0 Ed 1.0 Ed 4.0 Ed 1.0
Platinum
A040 to A053 A001 to A007 MSC.191(79) (2013) (2008) (2010) (1998)
MSC192(79)
A.278(VIII)
A.694(17) IEC 62388 IEC 62288 IEC 61162-1 IEC 61162-2
Current Standards that relate to Radar
A.823(19) ITU-R M.1177-3 Ed 2.0 Ed 1.0 Ed 4.0 Ed 1.0
(as per 2014-04-15)
MSC.191(79) (2013) (2008) (2010) (1998)
MSC192(79)
MULTIPILOT Platinum (additional Standards compared to Radar)
A.817(19)
NG3050 A002 NG3051 A002 A.820(19)
MULTIPILOT
1.0.xx.xx and GR3050 and GR3051 SN.1/Circ. 266
Platinum
A001 to A012 A001 to A007 MSC.36(63)
the menu on bottom left side and clicking on About.
MSC.97(73)
Overview about HW and SW Versions
A.817(19)
NG3050A004 NG3051 A002 A.820(19)
MULTIPILOT
1.1.xx.xx and GR3050 and GR3051 SN.1/Circ. 266
Platinum
A040 to A053 A001 to A007 MSC.36(63)
MSC.97(73)
A.817(19)
Current Standards that relate to A.820(19)
ECDIS & ENC Data SN.1/Circ. 266
(as per 2014-04-15) MSC.36(63)
MSC.97(73)
http://www.sam-electronics.de/dateien/navigation/broschueren/nacosplatinum.pdf.
For compatibility of your radar system with international standards please refer to the following link:
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

The SW version of your RADARPILOT Platinum can be accessed from the Super Home page by opening
printed 14.07.15
This link is updated as soon as new standards are coming up. An example valid in May 2014 is given
RADARPILOT Platinum
Operating Instructions System Overview
3 System Overview
The basic system layout is a single installation with one workstation, one sensor interface and one
scanner (one half in the below figure).
Two single systems can be arranged as a redundant installation comprising two workstations, two scan-
ners and two sensor interfaces.
This redundant arrangement is also called the IMO radar pair. It is mandatory according to SOLAS for
vessels above 10.000 tons.
The system internal wiring (interconnection) of the Ethernet LAN and other signals is shown on a basic
level. For details on a more technical level please refer to the Technical Manual.
14ft S-Band Scanner

5/8ft X-Band Scanner
Transceiver 380 V Transceiver 380 V

30 kW 25 kW
RADARPILOT RADARPILOT
Workstation Workstation
DPU DPU
Sensor input* Sensor input*
Ethernet Ring Connection
Prt Console Stbd Console
Fig. V / 1 IMO-Set installation
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 181

printed 14.07.15
3.1
Page 182
System Overview
14ft S-Band Scanner

RADAR FUNCTIONS
5/8ft X-Band Scanner 5/8ft X-Band Scanner
Transceiver Transceiver Transceiver

30 kW 25 kW 25 kW
Fig. V / 2
AIS Transponder
Unit
Portside Wing RADARPILOT CONNING MULTIPILOT ECDISPILOT Starboard Wing

MULTIPILOT MULTIPILOT
N
W E
S
+RAD +RAD
PORT STBD PORT STBD

+RAD
PORT STBD - RAD - RAD

+RAD
- RAD PORT STBD
- RAD
Workstation Workstation Workstation Workstation

Workstation
Trackpilot
DPU Workstation DPU Voyage Data
Recorder
VDR
TP-IP
Sensor input Sensor input
Process I/O
Layout with Five Workstations and Conning

Ethernet Ring Connection
Layout with Five Workstations and Conning
Automation
Engine D.
Rudder
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
RADARPILOT Platinum
Operating Instructions System Overview
3.2 Overview about Failure Modes and Measures
The following table gives an overview about the failure modes and the respective system status as well
as possible measures supporting maximum system availability.
Failure description Status Measure and Result
Antenna Unit (antenna, gearbox or This antenna / trans- RADAR operation with all other
transceiver) inoperable or defective ceiver cannot be selected installed Antenna Units is still avail-
by any MFD any more able
Display Electronics (MFD-PC) inoperable One of two (or more) Operate X- or S- Band radar via the
or defective radar indicators is not secondary or any other still available
available MFD
Display Monitor inoperable or defective
RADAR Keyboard inoperable or defective RADAR indicator remains Operate the MFD with on screen
available commands and Track ball only; full
operating level is available
Trackball inoperable or defective Limited basic radar operation via the
keyboard remains available
Network Switch or its power supply RADAR indicator and Operate another X- or S- Band radar
defective connected transceiver are via the secondary or any other still
not available available MFD
Sensor Interface, i.e. Data Processing All radar indicators and System automatically activates the
Unit (DPU), Data Communication Unit transceivers remain avail- secondary DPU or DCU, the main
(DCU) or its power supply defective able navigation sensors (for HDG, SOG,
POSN) remain available.
In a double installation, one of the The transceiver is not The remaining transceiver 1) can be
transceivers is inoperable or defective available set as slave on the second indicator;
picture is visible at both indicators.
In a double installation, one of the MFDs The system cannot be Both transceivers can be controlled
is inoperable or defective controlled by this MFD with the remaining MFD unit; both
any longer radar pictures can be observed sepa-
rately
In a double installation, "No RADAR The actual transceiver is Switch to the remaining transceiver
Video" alarm is shown not available 2)
In a multiple transceiver installation, The transceiver is not Remaining transceivers can be set as
one of the transceivers is inoperable or available slave on one of the other indicators,
defective picture is visible on all indicators.
In a multiple transceiver installation, The system cannot be All remaining transceivers can be
one of the MFDs is inoperable or defec- controlled by this MFD controlled with the remaining indi-
tive any longer cator electronics units, all radar
pictures can be observed separately.
1) If one of the sensor signals is missing, that navigation data are derived from one of the other sensors
as far as possible, either automatically or manually.
2) Transmission of the radar video from a connected transceiver to the MFD is monitored continuously. If
the connection to the transceiver is disturbed or completely lost, the respective alarm messages
describing the reason for the fault are given. If the refresh of the radar video is not possible, the alarm
No RADAR Video is issued; the video in the PPI is cleared and will no longer be updated.
Table V / 3 RADAR Failure Modes
As shown in the above table in case of an installation with two or more radar systems each system is
working independently from the other one, a failure in one system does not affect the operation of the
other systems. Each system can work as stand-alone radar without changing any configuration settings.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 183

printed 14.07.15
System Overview Operating Instructions
3.3 RADAR Malfunctions
There are a couple of possible reasons for which the RADAR cannot compute the target data correctly.
Possible alarm messages are:
1. Heading Invalid or Heading Time-out
2. Magnetron Fault
3. No Head Marker
4. No Trigger
5. No Antenna Azimuth
6. No RADAR Video
For further information regarding the alarms please refer to page 255.
-> In case that the compass system is defect, the radar goes immediately into the Head-Up mode. All
objects and operating functions for which the heading information is required, are no longer shown
or are inactive. All ARPA and AIS targets are deleted from the screen at once. If the heading sensor
failure is not corrected within 30 seconds, tracking of targets is stopped.
3.3.1 Recovery Time after Power Break-down at the Radar Scanner
If there is a power break down in the 220/380 VAC supply of the radar scanner this is normally not
affecting the workstation (MFD) because the workstation is powered from separate source.
In this case the following sequence will apply:
1. The alarm No Radar Video will appear
2. It can be acknowledged by the operator
3. The radar video is blanked
4. If power is on again, the transceiver electronics will start after about 30 sec.
5. After that the Magnetron heating-up period is started, 2 Min. for X-band, 3 Min. for S-band
6. Finally the Radar Video is coming back automatically without any further operator action as long as
the TX settings have not been changed in the meantime
Page 184 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions The RADAR Sidebar
4 The RADAR Sidebar
The descriptions for all following chapters within the RADAR FUNCTIONS volume are applicable to all SW
versions (1.x and 2.x). Small deviations in the design may appear but will not affect the proper under-
standing.
All functions for selecting a transceiver and setting the radar video are available from the RADAR Sidebar.
This sidebar is permanently open. It provides four groups of functions as follows:
1. Radar functions like selecting and adjusting a transceiver, setting to master and long pulse
2. Radar Video functions like gain, sea and rain filter, and enhancing the video
3. PI (parallel index) Lines
4. Tool sets 1 & 2 with electronic bearing lines (EBL) and variable range markers (VRM)
The first two groups about radar are described in this RADAR FUNCTIONS volume, the last two groups
about navigation tools are described in the volume about NAVIGATION TOOLS (former DISPLAY FUNC-
TIONS AND TOOLS).
Set Gain, set Sea and

Rain Filter, Enhance
Video
Select and adjust the
transceiver, set to
In earlier SW versions master and long pulse
the Rain Filter is set in
three fixed steps,
Low, Medium, or
High as shown below
Refer to the volume

about NAVIGATION
TOOLS for PI Lines
and EBL/VRM Tool
Sets
Later SW Version
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 185

printed 14.07.15
The RADAR Sidebar Operating Instructions
4.1 Select the RADAR Transceiver
Select the Radar

Click on top line of radar group, select a transceiver (TX) from
the list, the chosen transceiver and the antenna motor are acti-
vated, if not already done by another workstation in your
system.
Rain
If No TX Selected is chosen from the list, the transceiver is slider
turned off and its antenna stops rotation (if not still selected by or 3
another workstation in your system). steps
For displaying of the transceiver status, move pointer to the

transceiver of interest, let it stay for a second, and a small
window will show the status.
A transceiver with the status Not Connected cannot be
controlled and shows a failure status if selected. An alarm is
generated as well.
Select Long Pulse
to improve target visibility at higher ranges, the long pulse
delivers stronger but less accurate echoes. If target enhance-
ment is active, the stronger echoes of the long pulse are able to
improve a weak radar picture.
Adjust
Click on Adjust in master mode to set manual or automatic tuning and interference rejection if a 2nd
radar disturbs.
Multi-Antenna Operation (optional)
If Multi-Antenna Option is installed, a group of transceivers (MX) can be selected. If one transceiver of
the group fails, the whole group is inactive, switch back to a single transceiver (TX).
Refer to page 218 for details of the multi-antenna operation.
At the instant of switch-on of the radar function, the antenna begins to rotate and the
emission of high frequency radiation is started. In the case of multiple installations, it can
also happen that, instead of the expected antenna, a different one begins to rotate. There-
fore, it must be ensured beforehand that the antennas can rotate freely and that there is
nobody present close to the antenna turning circles.
Page 186 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.2 Select the Master Workstation
If Master is selected, the workstation (MFD) in use

becomes the master operating unit for the transceiver.
The former master workstation (MFD) for the selected
transceiver is no longer master and on its screen the
check mark will disappear.
Any other RADARPILOT or MULTIPILOT of the Platinum
System located on the bridge can be switched to act as
the master (slave stations in engine room or elsewhere
might be disabled for Master mode by configuration
setting).
On the master indicator, the radar transmitter and the
receiver are operated. A slave indicator cannot operate
the transmitter, but it can control the adjustments for
displaying the radar video.
Adjust control changes state
If you try to become the master of a transceiver with the when master changes.
status Not Connected, the check mark of the Master
selector will disappear and the Adjust button will become insensitive again within 1-2 seconds.
A RADAR picture cut may occur on the slave workstation (MFD) if the radar range selected
by the master is more than one step smaller than the radar range of the slave and the
slave indicator is decentered.
Technical background: The radar picture generated by the transceiver always has twice the diameter of
the selected range of the master transceiver, in order to ensure a proper function of the off-centered
mode.
Due to the fact

that the range
of the master
is more than
one step
smaller than
the range of
the slave,
details outside
the 6 NM
(=2 x 3 NM)
range are not
visible!
Master, 3 NM Slave, 12 NM
Sketch is not to scale!
Fig. V / 3 Radar Picture Cut Due to Master with Smaller Range Compared to Slave
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 187

printed 14.07.15
4.3 Select the RADAR Pulse Length
Long Pulse is available for any range of the radar. The internal
pulse length changes with respect to the selected range automat-
ically.
The default setting for the pulse length should be the short pulse,
which means no check mark on Long Pulse.
The short pulse delivers a better resolution, targets which are Rain
slider
very close together will be displayed as separated echoes. or 3
A longer pulse has a higher energy, but not a higher amplitude. steps
Thus, it delivers stronger echoes and possibly a better target visi-
bility at longer ranges. But it may be possible that two targets
which are very close together would be displayed as one echo.
In general, it is advisable not to use the long pulse in rainy condi-
tions.
It is allowed to switch between the two pulse lengths at any time.
If target enhancement or any other filtering methods are active,
the stronger echoes of the long pulses are processed by the
filters and are able to improve a weak radar picture. To optimize
detection performance for the different weather conditions, the
radar provides different pulse lengths and repetition rates.
The pulse repetition rates in relation to the range and the pulse length are shown in the following table:
Scanner rotation frequency 23/28 rpm
Range (NM) 1) 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.5 3 6 12 24 48 96
Short pulse 1.00 2)(
0.08 0.15 0.30 0.50 3)
Pulse length (µs) 0.90
PRF (Hz) 2000 1000 500
2)
Long pulse 1.00
0.15 0.30 0.50 3)
Pulse length (µs) 0.90
PRF (Hz) 1000 500
1) All values of the 0.25 NM range are also valid for the 250 m/500 m ranges
2)
12.5 kW X-Band Transceiver
3)
25 kW X-Band and 30 kW S-Band Transceiver
Table V / 4 Pulse Length and Repetition Rate of RADAR Pulses
Page 188 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.4 Adjusting the RADAR Transceiver
AUTO Tune
- Tuning of the transceiver is done automati-
cally. The check box AUTO Tune is set per
default.
The slider is moved automatically by the system into the
position for the optimal frequency.
If two X-Band or two S-Band systems are being operated
simultaneously, disturbance of automatic tuning might
occur. In such cases, manual tuning is appropriate:
- Select the transceiver
- Switch to 12 NM range
- Set the check box for Master mode.
- Clear the AUTO Tune check box and use the slider
to perform manual tuning.
The green indicator bar above the slider corresponds to
the amplitude of the received signal. Observe more than
one antenna rotation (5 sec) to find the maximum.
The selected transceivers Tuning and Interference Rejection can only be

adjusted by the workstation (MFD) which is selected as Master for this trans-
ceiver. If Master is not selected, the Adjust control will be insensitive.
Interference Rejection
Transmissions from other radars working in the same radio frequency band occur as disturbances in the
form of small points or dashes. These move in rapid succession along straight or curved tracks to the
center of the screen or in the opposite direction. These disturbances appear particularly clearly at the
larger range settings, but they impede radar observation to an insignificant extent only. They can be
almost completely eliminated by means of the Interference rejection function.
The default setting for Interference Rejection is On, but it can be switched off by the operator for special
radar observation.
Performance Monitor
With the performance monitor, the transmitter performance and the receiver sensitivity can be checked.
It comprises a small auxiliary antenna in the radiating region of the main antenna. The received signal
is processed and produces a "good/ bad" indication.
This check thus covers the entire RF transmitting branch including magnetron, wave-guide and antenna.
The receiver sensitivity is checked by feeding a signal directly to the receiver input providing a "good/
bad" indication again.
During the check the RADAR cannot be used for navigation!
For more details please refer to page 224.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 189

printed 14.07.15
4.5 Setting the RADAR Gain
Gain (input amplification)

Switch off the Enhance function. Use the Gain slider, and
increase the value with the trackball until slight noise is visible
on the PPI. Then reduce the value a little until the noise has
just disappeared, but not more.
Rain
Switch on the Enhance function again and, if necessary, slider
increase the gain a little (up to 100% for a favorable sea or 3
steps
state).
-> With the Enhance function activated, the change in gain
only has an effect after several revolutions of the antenna.
-> On the keyboard, manual tuning is performed by turning

the Gain knob.
Page 190 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.6 Setting the Anti-clutter Sea Filter
The Sea Filter reduces radar echoes from objects close to the
vessel very much and echoes from more distant objects very
little.
Due to the fact that the distance of a target is represented by
the time its echo needs to return to the antenna, this is called
„Sensitivity-Time-Control“ (STC). Rain
slider
Nevertheless, echoes which are as strong as the unwanted or 3
reflections of the sea may be suppressed and not visible, or they steps
may appear and disappear, depending on how strong the
surrounding unwanted reflections are.
In automatic mode, a fixed, approved value for the Sea filter is
set. Advantages or limitations to the effect are the same as in
manual mode.
Manual Suppression of Sea Clutter

Use the Sea slider to set the value so that the clutter caused by
a rough sea is as weak as possible but radar targets are still
clearly visible 1).
If the Enhance function is switched on, the radar requires several revolutions of the antenna in order
to adjust itself to new anti-clutter sea values. Therefore, any large adjustments should only be made
slowly (step by step).
On the keyboard, manual adjustment is performed by turning the Sea knob.
Automatic Suppression of Sea Clutter

Select the AUTO check box behind Sea.
In the case that anti-clutter sea value is set too large, weak targets can be lost, especially
at close range. If the sea is very rough, it can be expected that radar targets which only
produce weak reflections will remain undetected, even if the setting is correct.
-> The automatic anti-clutter sea function has the advantage that the clutter values taken into account
in the upwind direction are different from those taken into account in the downwind direction.To
check the display of very small target-echoes, it is necessary to switch over to manual operation.
1) If the Platinum workstation is connected to an old RADARPILOT 1000/1100 transceiver in the context of a retrofit,
it is important to note that the manual STC control range has been widened in comparison to old RADARPILOT
1000/1100 workstations. If the sea clutter at both workstations is compared, the Platinum workstation will show
more clutter due to a higher control range. Just increase the sea filter (about 10 to 30%) to observe the same
result as on the old workstation.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 191

printed 14.07.15
4.7 Setting the Rain Clutter Filter
The suppression of rain clutter can be set individually.

Use the Rain Slider and increase the value with the track-
ball or in earlier SW versions select one of three levels
(Low, Medium, High), until a disturbing rain cloud
changes into a slight noise visible in the PPI. Rain
slider
This is typically the case with slight to medium rain where or 3
the slider is set to approximately 2/3 of full range. steps
In case of strong rain the full range has to be used. In this
case the Enhance filter should be switched on in addition.
The rain filter is suppressing echoes from rain droplets
which are typically appearing only once during a scan.
During the next scan they will appear at another place.
The enhance filter is using auto correlation technique to improve the detection of weak target signals.
Choose one of the values so that the boundary of the rainy area is clearly visible and the clutter in the
region behind it is as weak as possible. However, radar targets should still be clearly visible.
In the case of heavy rain, snow and hail, it can be expected that, even if the setting is
correct, radar targets which only produce weak reflections - especially targets situated
behind a strong rain front - will remain undetected. Such targets can appear suddenly
when leaving the rainy area.
Simultaneous Operation of Sea Clutter and Rain Clutter Filter
In case that Rain and Sea Filter are operated simultaneously, especially in very rough
weather conditions, the detection of radar targets may fail even if all settings are correct,
because the sum of clutter (reflections of sea and rain) is as high as or even higher than
the reflection of targets.
Page 192 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.8 Setting the Enhance Filter
The target enhancement function is a scan-to-scan technology

that supports to distinguish between radar targets and noise. It is
used to display even very small or weak targets. It can be set to
Off or to three automatic values: Low, Medium or High.
Refer to page 190 for the correct gain setting in combination with
the activation of the Enhance function. Rain
slider
The Enhance filter combines the following filter functions: or 3
1. Adaptive STC (see also page 191) steps
2. Additional Correlative Filter

3. Target Enhancement
The filter characteristics are as follows:
Enhance Off Low Medium High
yes,
Adaptive yes, but
no no medium
STC small value
yes, longer yes, longer

yes, with time- time-
Correlation no short time- constant constant
constant than than
„LOW“ „MEDIUM“
very little,
Target small
enhance- little medium high
targets
ment just visible
Table V / 5 Qualitative Description of Enhance Levels
Definitions:
Adaptive STC is a second STC that is derived from the medium value of the echoes of the last sweeps.
It is added to the manual STC or automatic STC (see page 191) and is able to suppress clutter.
The Correlative Filter works in scan to scan mode or over several scans respectively with its parameters
relative to the selected range. In large ranges, the correlation filter will need several scans until an effect
to the picture is visible, in smaller ranges the effect of the filter is faster. It is also able to suppress noise.
Target Enhancement is used to display even very small or weak targets. For example, if an echo is this
small that it only lights up one pixel of the screen, it could be overseen or regarded as noise or clutter.
Target enhancement makes it a little bigger, so that it is better to discover among the more dynamic
clutter or noise. With this enhanced target, the correlation filter can work much more precisely.
When the Enhance function is running, the scan-to-scan correlation might have the result
that small, fast-moving targets or RACON codes are displayed with reduced intensity or
might be suppressed.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 193

printed 14.07.15
4.9 Setting the Video Emphasis and Hiding Video or Overlay
Video Emphasis
Video Emphasis can be used to increase the visibility of targets
in the PPI. Very strong echoes will be highlighted. It can help to
decide whether an echo is resulting from one or from two partly
overlapping targets.
For example, without Video Emphasis an echo is only repre- Rain
sented by a large green spot. slider
or 3
If Video Emphasis is switched on, the green spot is displayed steps
with two smaller highlighted dots in the center resulting from two
different echoes from two different targets.
Structures on land or in rainy clouds or in sea clutter can be
made more visible by the VE function (i.e. light house at shore
or buoys in close distance to the land where the echoes would
normally melt into the land area).
- The Video Emphasis function is switched on and off by
selecting or clearing the Video Emphasis check box in the
Radar Video group.
Hiding Video / Overlay

The radar video or the superimposed synthetics overlay (i.e. charts or navigation tool lines) can be
suppressed temporarily by holding down the appropriate push buttons. As soon as the push buttons are
released, the video or the synthetic overlay are displayed again.
Example for the Video Emphasis Function

The two screenshots below are showing an example for the effect of the video emphasis. In the right
picture the target which is nearly hidden by a shore structure is clearly highlighted.
Fig. V / 4 Example for the Effect of Video Emphasis
Page 194 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.10 Summary of the Recommended Settings
1. Select 12 nm Range
2. Select the Transceiver and set own workstation to Master
3. Click to Adjust and check that Tune is in AUTO mode (green tune bar on maximum)
4. Check Pulse length: Long Pulse = Off (box is cleared)
5. Switch off Sea filter: Slider in left start position, AUTO box cleared)
6. Switch off Rain filter: Set to Off
7. Switch off Enhance filter: Set to Off
8. Switch off Video Emphasis: box cleared
9. Set Gain: Increase gain slider with trackball until slight noise is visible on the PPI
10. Reduce the value a little until the noise has just disappeared and no more
11. Select the Range which is actually required for the traffic scenario, i.e. 3 nm
12. In case of rain clutter set Rain filter to Low, Medium, or High, or adjust slider correspondingly
(latest SW version) until rain cloud just disappears except of contour line
13. In case of sea clutter set Sea filter to AUTO, observe that sea clutter just disappears but targets
are still visible (in difficult scenarios try manual adjustment) 1)
14. Set the Enhance filter to Low, Medium, or High so that small echoes are enlarged, wait a few
seconds, and if necessary increase Gain slowly until targets are clearly visible
15. If required switch on Video Emphasis to separate objects which are close together and melted to
one spot
Points 2) to 4) are transceiver related and if they have been passed once for a certain transceiver and
not changed, there is no need to repeat these for a second or further workstation.
The second or further workstation can be set in Slave mode (=Master not activated) as well.
1)
If the Platinum workstation is connected to an old RADARPILOT 1000/1100 transceiver in the context of a retrofit,
it is important to note that the manual STC control range has been widened in comparison to old RADARPILOT
1000/1100 workstations. If the sea clutter at both workstations is compared, the Platinum workstation will show
more clutter due to a higher control range. Just increase the sea filter (about 10 to 30%) to observe the same
result as on the old workstation.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 195

printed 14.07.15
The RADAR Keyboard Operating Instructions
5 The RADAR Keyboard
Several RADAR functions can be operated as well from the radar keyboard installed optionally in the left
part of the operating console.
RADAR Video Alarm management

(see page 190 and (see page 263)
following)
Display Bright- Stepwise

ness (see page RADAR Range Setting (see
134) page 140)
Suppression of Relative/True Setting

(see page 143)
Video and
Overlay
Centering/ Off-
Centering the Own
Ship
Operation of EBL, VRM and PI Lines

(see page 156 and following)
Fig. V / 5 The RADAR Keyboard
Page 196 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions The RADAR Application Area
6 The RADAR Application Area
As shown in one of the previous volumes about GENERAL FUNCTIONS the monitor screen is divided into
a left part with permanent sidebars for navigation, display functions and also radar functions and a right
part for the applications. The RADAR application is shown below. It comprises the Pan and Zoom control
in the top left corner, and the RADAR PPI with bearing scale.
Several operating functions are available by context menus, either by a right mouse click (MORE) into
the PPI area or by selecting first an object (target, symbol) and then right click to this target.
Parallel index line
Heading
Pointer with line
Pan and position infor-
Zoom Control Bearing scale mation
Guard- /
Aquisition
Zone
Stern
line
RADAR video, EBL1/VRM1, Vector, Parallel index lines

with emphasis centered bottom track
and superim- and look-ahead
posed AIS target sector EBL2/VRM2, de-centered
symbol
Fig. V / 6 PPI with Superimposed Elements
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 197

printed 14.07.15
The RADAR Application Area Operating Instructions
6.1 The Pan and Zoom Control
The pan and zoom control in the RADARPILOT Platinum consists of a slider to adjust the range setting.
The compass control consists of pan buttons, which can be used to move the image section currently
displayed.
Compass control
with 4 pan arrows
Zoom in
Slider to adjust zoom

factor
Zoom out
Fig. V / 7 Zoom and Pan Control
To zoom in incrementally, click on , you will then see the next smaller range. To zoom out again, click
on the . You will then see the next larger range.
Using the slider switches the range for radar correspondingly.
To pan the display, use the panning arrows of the compass control. For example, if you click on then
the display moves to the right in increments to view a different image section.
To center the display, e.g. after panning, just click on the icon once.
-> It is also possible to off-center and re-center the ship by means of
the context menu or by means of the button on the radar CENT
keyboard.
or
Due to the fact that the bearing scale relates to the position of the
CCRP in the PPI, the division of the bearing scale is altered in a way
that the scale still fits to the de-centered position of the CCRP.
Page 198 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions The RADAR Application Area
6.2 Presentation of Vessel Outline in Small Ranges
In the case that a very large ship uses a very small scale for the display (e.g. 250m) it might happen
that parts of the ship´s outline are situated outside of the PPI. But neither the CCRP nor the indication
of the position of the selected radar antenna itself can ever leave the PPI, regardless of the settings for
CCRP.
Origin of the
bearing scale
Before either the CCRP or the indication of the

position of the selected radar antenna will leave
the PPI, they will be shifted back to the oppo-
site point where they are supposed to leave
according to the ship´s movement at the time
when the CCRP/the antenna indication have
reached 70% of the radius of the PPI,
measured from the center.
Indication of the position of CCRP

the selected radar antenna
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 199

printed 14.07.15
The RADAR Application Area Operating Instructions
6.3 Context Menus
Context Menus in the Application Area

Context menus are available in the Application Area. Details of the menus are described in the subse-
quent chapters. This chapter shall give an overview about the entire context related functionality.
By a DO or a MORE click into the application area a context menu is opened which contains all possible
user actions at the current click position.
Context Menus with DO

If more than one object is found, the context menu opens and the operator must select the operation
which he wants to access.
Examples:
- Waypoint 9 / Leg 009-010 / PI3:
The waypoint symbol, the leg behind waypoint 9 or the Parallel Index Line 3 can be selected.
Context Menus with MORE

The MORE click into the application area presents a predefined selection of functions.
Target Add Synth

Off-Center Cancel all
Layer
Radar Video
Clear Trails
ENC Chart
Chart Information
Nav. Tools
Create LOP
Scales
Reset PI Lines Set
Targets
Rulers Reset
Routes
Man Overboard
User Symbols
Own Ship
Anchor watch
Curved HL
Man Overboard
Page 200 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions RADAR Specific Target Handling
7 RADAR Specific Target Handling
The handling of AIS and ARPA targets on ECDIS has already been covered by the volume TARGET
HANDLING (former DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND TOOLS).
Please refer to that volume for:
• Dangerous Target Settings
• Acquisition and Guard Zone Settings
• Target Fusion
• ARPA and AIS Target Handling and Target List
Some specific functions only available on RADAR are covered in the following section.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 201

printed 14.07.15
RADAR Specific Target Handling Operating Instructions
7.1 ARPA Targets
Two types of targets can be handled on the RADARPILOT Platinum, ARPA targets and AIS targets. For
the targets, the AIS electronics unit and the ARPA electronics of the radar are two independent sensors
whose displays and operating procedures take place on one and the same MFD. The two sensors deliver
data independently, the data of both sensors are used for the collision avoidance computation, which
takes place in the background of all actions. It can raise alarms, for instance if objects are on collision
course.
☞ A radar echo that is supposed to be taken in account is called an acquired target.
☞ An AIS target that is supposed to be taken in account is called an activated target.
Targets can be acquired/activated manually using the GUI or automatically by the system.
ARPA targets are acquired or tracked radar echoes received from the selected transceiver. They can be
tracked from a distance near 0 NM depending on antenna height and the target´s ship structure up to
24 NM irrespective of the range scale in use. Before a radar echo can be used as ARPA target, its echo
is evaluated by the ARPA electronics during a number of antenna revolutions. ARPA targets can be of
the following kind:
ARPA targets
A radar echo on the PPI. It is displayed as a green bunch of pixels
A radar echo that has been acquired manually and that is under evalu-
ation now
A radar echo that has been acquired automatically by the examination

of the radar video in an acquisition/guard zone. flashing,
red
An acquired target that is tracked by the ARPA electronics. Its past posi-
tions and speed/direction vector can be shown
A tracked target, which is selected and whose data are marked in the
target list
ARPA targets may have an ID 1) displayed on the bottom right of the

symbol. The ID consist of a consecutive number generated by the
system preceded by the selected transceiver number. 1 04
Lost Target. If any of the above mentioned targets gets lost, a flashing flashing,
cross is superimposed above the target symbol. red
1 04
1) ID is used as a short-cut for (target) identifier in these operating instructions.
Table V / 6 Symbols of ARPA Targets in RADAR
Page 202 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.2 AIS Targets
AIS targets are all targets whose data are received by the AIS electronics unit connected to the system.
All AIS targets are visible per default after switch-on of the MFD.
☞ The display of groups of AIS targets (Class A, Class B, All) may be switched on and off by the oper-
ator. Select All if you want to see all targets received from the AIS electronics unit.
AIS targets can be of the following kind:
AIS targets
A sleeping AIS target is a target that is displayed in the PPI. Its data
are evaluated and can be shown on demand.
A manually activated AIS target is displayed with detailed data such as

HDG, true scaled outline (if available in the received data set and the
PPI scale is large enough), ROT indicator, past positions and speed/
direction vector can be shown
An automatically activated target by the collision avoidance computation flashing,

or by a acquisition/guard zone red
An activated AIS target, which is selected and whose data are marked
in the target list
AIS targets may have an ID displayed on the bottom right of the

symbol. The ID consists of the call-sign or the ships name or the MMSI
depending on the settings in the target presentation menu.
BXGHE MS Hamburg
Lost Target. If any of the above mentioned targets gets lost, a flashing flashing,
cross is superimposed above the target symbol.
For AIS targets the lost target alarm can be switched off in the Target red
settings.
Table V / 7 Symbols of AIS Targets
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 203

printed 14.07.15
7.3 Target Fusion
Due to the fact that an AIS target within the radar range normally also produces a
radar echo, the symbols of tracked and activated targets are displayed close to each
other:
In this case, it is possible to decide whether the object is to be treated as an AIS
target or as an ARPA target. In terms of an improved display readability and avoidance
of cluttering the screen, the objects can be merged if they meet some boundary condi-
tions. That means, that they can be displayed only as either AIS or as ARPA target
depending on user selection. See page 115 for details on Target Fusion.
☞ The number of ARPA and AIS targets being tracked should be kept as small as possible; the pres-
ence of too many targets causes confusion on the screen and distracts the operator's attention from
what is really important. Targets that are no longer relevant should be deleted (RADAR) or deacti-
vated (AIS).
☞ In the case of tracked targets entering a clutter area (rain or sea clutter), a "target swap" might
occur; parts of the rain front can suddenly be "tracked". A target swap can also occur if there are
targets situated close to each other or close to land. In the case of target swaps, no warning is
given.
Page 204 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
7.4 Manual Target Acquisition
Acquiring a target with DO

Move the pointer on top of the desired object. The pointer then becomes a hand or a gun site
symbol . This depends on the object underneath the pointer:
Pointer becomes
a hand a gun sight
not clearly identifiable, it could be an clearly identifiable, it is a single AIS
Object is AIS target or a radar echo target or a single radar echo
the object is an AIS target with no
radar echo (transceiver off or bad
AIS target and radar echo appear on
reason radar conditions) or the object is a
the same position or are fusioned radar echo that carries no AIS
indication after AIS target acti- radar echo with

click with DO vated activated ARPA
function
make the choice...

AIS target acti- radar echo with
vated activated ARPA
function
Table V / 8 Manual Target Acquisition
Acquiring/Deleting a target with MORE

Clicking on the target symbol with MORE opens the context
menu. Choose Target and select
- Deselect in order to stop the accentuation of this
target in the target list.
☞ It is not neccessary to Deselect a target before
another target can be selected, in fact it is possible to
change the selection of targets by just clicking them
with DO.
- Cancel ARPA to stop tracking the object as ARPA

target
- Cancel AIS to stop tracking the object as AIS target, making it a sleeping target
- Cancel All to stop tracking for all targets, all activated AIS targets become sleeping targets
- Acquire ARPA to force a radar echo to be tracked as ARPA target
- Reverse Fusion to make a fusioned target that is handled as AIS target become an ARPA target
and vice-versa
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 205

printed 14.07.15
7.5 Reference Target Tracking
If at least one fixed ARPA target 1) is selected as a reference target, the radar can determine the own
ship's speed vector with the aid of this target's relative motion. By means of this "reference target
tracking", the radar also acts as a speed sensor, and can be called up as such under REF TGT Speed
in the COG/SOG sensor selection menu. It is recommended to use more than one target for own course
and speed calculation in order to create as stable values as possible.
The resultant course and speed is calculated by averaging the relative speed data evaluated from all
selected reference targets.
Selecting a reference target:

Click on the fixed ARPA target with the MORE key, and then click
on REF Target On/Off (with the DO key) in the context menu.
The first reference target is given an R1 as its target label. If
there is more than one reference target defined, all reference
targets are given an independent sequential number in addition
to the letter R as prefix.
Cancelling the selection: Click on the reference target with

the MORE key, and then click on REF Target On/Off (with the
DO key) in the context menu.
☞ Up to five reference targets can be selected.
☞ The speed input "Reference Target Tracking" is treated as

a ground stabilized speed sensor (speed over ground),
displayed as COG/SOG data, but it is never used for calcu-
lation of relative course and speed of AIS targets (according
to the IMO rules) 2).
☞ The loss of a tracked reference target triggers the Lost

Target alarm.
If the last reference target is lost, a new speed sensor must be selected.
If no new speed sensor is selected in time, the Speed Invalid alarm is triggered for the selection of
another speed sensor by the operator.
During reference target tracking, it shall be checked repeatedly if the selected reference
targets are still displayed as fixed targets. Loss of a tracked reference target may reduce
the accuracy of the evaluated own speed and course, whereby the true data of other
tracked targets may be deteriorated.
1) A fixed target is a tracked radar echo of a fixed object like a buoy, a light house, a landmark etc. In the true
vector mode, it shows no or a very short vector. If a moving target is selected by mistake, the own speed deter-
mined will be incorrect. To ensure accurate determination of speed, several fixed targets should be selected as
references. AIS targets cannot be selected as reference targets.
2)
As long as REF TGT Speed is selected as COG/SOG input, the display of relative target data for AIS-targets is
omitted.
Page 206 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions ARPA Training
8 ARPA Training
The ARPA Training can be activated from the Super Home page.
Click to the corresponding button.
It can be used to check certain transceiver functions and to train
basic radar operating procedures like target acquisition.
Beforehand, it must be ensured that a transceiver is selected for
use and at least in Stand By mode.
The radar picture is complemented with a spoke-pattern with arti-
ficial radar echoes.
These echoes can be acquired manually for ARPA tracking.
When the acquisition / guard zone is placed over one or more
targets, automatic acquisition takes place together with the associ-
ated symbols and alarms. The targets must be tracked automati-
cally.
All targets travel along with your
own ship. Therefore, their true
courses and true speeds must be
the same as your own ship's course
and speed.
It can be observed whether the
tracking works correctly. Further-
more, the user can observe the
target graphics and display of the
ARPA data in the appropriate display
windows and make himself familiar
with this function.
To turn off the ARPA Training
facility, navigate to the Super
Home page again and click on
RADAR Monitoring.
The depiction S indicates that this is a simulated picture.
As long as the ARPA Training facility is in use, the radar picture will not show echoes
received by the appropriate transceiver.
All displayed echoes are artificial. For safety, make sure to keep an eye on another acti-
vated transceiver while using ARPA Training.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 207

printed 14.07.15
Chart Radar Mode (optional) Operating Instructions
9 Chart Radar Mode (optional)
If in addition to the
RADARPILOT Platinum
application the
ECDISPILOT Platinum
application is installed
on your system, you
have a MULTIPILOT
and that can be oper-
ated in Chart Radar
mode.
In this case the drop-down menu in the Charts group of the Navigation Sidebar is selectable.
Select ENC in order to switch on the ECDIS chart in the background of the radar PPI. Select Off if you
want to switch off the chart presentation permanently.
The operating of all the radar functions in the Radar Sidebar remains as it used to be in RADAR Mode.
Also the tabs in the Display Functions and Tools Sidebar remain as they used to be.
Under the tab Presentation the new tab Chart is displayed and can be opened with the Display menu
for setting of the chart display category and the Depth menu for setting of the safety depth and safety
contour.
Under the tab Alarms the new tab ECDIS Alerts appears and can be opened for activating i.e. the
safety contour alarm etc.
- If the Chart Radar option is installed, the SOLAS category of the radar system is extended with the
suffix C as follows:
With 22” TFT monitor: CAT 2 C
With 26” TFT monitor: CAT 1 C
In the following chapters the chart functions specific for RADAR are introduced.
More general chart functions can be found in the volume about CHART FUNCTIONS.
Page 208 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Chart Radar Mode (optional)
9.1 Selection of Charts and Hiding of the Chart Background
The drop-down menu in the Charts group of the permanent area provides access to the different charts
that are installed with your ECDISPILOT application.
Only vector charts are permitted for chart radar operation and only these are selectable from the RADAR
menus. Raster charts (RNC) can not be used.
Temporary Hiding of the Chart Background

If ENC is set and the chart
presentation shall be hidden
just for a few seconds in order
to identify details of the radar
image, just press Hide
Overlay in the RADAR Video
group.
The result is an empty screen
except for the pure radar
video.
Selection of the ECDIS No Data Pattern

If ENC is set and there are no ECDIS data at the actual position, former SW versions will show a radar
dark background.
Later SW versions starting from Platinum 1.1.x.x come along with an additional select box for either
ECDIS No Data Pattern or the Radar Dark Background. The select box is active only if ENC is set.
RADAR Dark Background
ECDIS No-Data Pattern
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 209

printed 14.07.15
9.2 Reference, Range Scale and Matching of Chart with RADAR
Reference
In Chart Radar mode the same reference system for own ship’s position, speed, heading, time, etc. is
used as in RADAR mode.
The common reference point is called Consistent Common Reference Point (CCRP).
It can be selected from the drop down menu REF in the Display group of the Navigation Sidebar (select
Conning which is the default, or Radar, or Tracking).
For Route Monitoring against ECDIS objects and user objects the track control reference point which is
typically at the bow of the vessel is used. This point is also called the system position. The guard sector
(also called look-ahead sector) starts from there.
Range Scale and Modes

In Chart Radar mode the same range scale as in RADAR mode from 250 m to 96 nm is applied. The
larger scales of an ECDIS with up to 800 nm are not available.
The Chart Radar mode is providing the same orientation as in RADAR mode with North Up, Head Up,
and Course Up.
Further-on it provides also the same screen stabilization with True and REL Motion. The Browse mode
which can be found in ECDIS for planning tasks is not available.
Matching the Chart with the RADAR Presentation

If the chart overlay (which is in reality an underlay because the most important RADAR is on top) is not
matching the radar PPI, the user may adjust the position data of the position fixing device. This function
is available from the Navigation Sidebar in the Position WGS84 group.
Page 210 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
9.3 Selecting the Display Group or a Category of Groups
Chart symbols, areas, lines and labels (collectively called chart objects in the following) are individually
stored electronically in a separate data base and are displayed in the vector chart.
Object classes (complete sets of similar objects) are grouped into display groups; for example, the
object class Restricted Areas together with the object class Military Practice Areas and other similar
object classes are grouped together in the display group Cautionary Areas.
An appropriate and, at the same time, uncluttered display can be achieved by selecting only those display
groups which are required for the actual nautical task.
Furthermore, for a number of objects (e.g. buoys), there is a choice between two symbol presentations
(plain and symbolized).
In addition the number of text labels displayed can be influenced.
IMO has defined three pre-defined categories for the selection of display groups that are to be shown:
- Display Base: Consists of the display groups which, as a minimum requirement, definitely have to
be displayed. They can not be influenced by the user and they are shown all the time. They are
normally not sufficient for safe navigation (only coast lines and obstacles).
- Display Standard: Contains the display groups which are normally necessary for voyage planning
and voyage monitoring (all standard display groups as shown below)
- Display All: Contains above two categories and all other display groups which are available in the
electronic chart
For the Chart Radar one further category is defined in the IEC 62388 test standard:
- Display Primary: The Primary Chart Information Set covers the display base plus fixed and
floating aids to navigation (buoys and beacons, details on following page).
SAM Electronics finally has added a category named Customized. In this category, all settings can be
made individually.
Please refer to the volume about CHART FUNCTIONS for more details on the categories (volume included
in MULTIPILOT Manual).
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 211

printed 14.07.15
9.4 Chart Radar Application Area
The screenshot below shows the Chart Radar in Head-up mode.
Scale Slider
Acquisition/Guard Heading line and
Zone 1 and 2 look-ahead sector
Route
EBL2/
VRM2,
decen-
tered
Plot
AIS/
RADAR
target
with
video
emphasis
EBL1/VRM1, centered
Fig. V / 8 Chart Radar Application Area with superimposed elements
Page 212 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
9.5 Application Area Context Menu
A click with the MORE key in the application

area opens the context menu. The available
chart specific functions are as follows:
- Select Layer to set the brightness and
visibility of the various layers forming the
complete display (see screenshot beside).
For the Chart Radar especially the bright-
ness of the Chart information is important
and can be set.
- Chart Information. In this window,
information about different characteristics
of the chart database and the chart cells
can be displayed. For details please refer
to the volume about CHART FUNCTIONS.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 213

printed 14.07.15
9.6 Presentation of Depth Colors in the Chart
On the chart overlay for RADAR the colors indicate the depth as adjusted in the dialogue box shown
below, from brown (land) to blue (shallow), grey (navigable) and black (deep).
The four different depth settings can be

adjusted by dragging the sliders on the
depths bar.
Shallow contour
Set the transparent Safety Depth Slider

to display spot soundings below Safety
Depth more prominently.
Set the filled Safety Contour Slider for

the depth alarm.
Deep Contour.
Note:
The colors defined in this chapter are based on the ECDIS color schemes "Dusk" and "Night" so that the
radar video and the target graphics are not obscured. After a restart of the system all depth contour
values are set in the same way they have been set before.
Shallow Water settings

Non-navigable areas of vector charts can be marked by means of a pattern, particular dangers within
non-navigable areas can be accentuated.
Pattern
Non-navigable areas (shallow water) can be displayed criss-crossed if
this option is checked.
Danger
The display of the isolated danger symbols which are situated in shallow
water can be switched on and off here. Those symbols are only
displayed if the display category is set to Standard at least.
Page 214 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
9.7 Main Differences between Chart Radar and ECDIS Mode
The ECDIS application can be operated in Chart Radar or in ECDIS mode. The main differences between
the two modes can be summarized as follows:
Function ECDIS Mode Chart Radar Mode

Overview
(the two
screenshots
show exactly
the same posi-
tion of own
vessel and the
same bright-
ness settings)
The chart is presented in a full rectangle The chart is presented in the radar PPI
Planning With the Browse function any position in the No Browse function selectable, the own ship
worldwide chart can be shown in the center remains always visible within the PPI, no
planning
Presentation The ECDIS color set according to IHO S-52 The radar video is always in the foreground,
of radar video presentation library appendix 2 is used with the ECDIS is presented as an underlay
and chart color sets for day, dusk, and night. The radar providing a dark background for radar video
video is in the background and superseded by (colors are closely aligned to ECDIS dusk and
any ECDIS symbols night color tables)
Presentation An area with no-chart data The no-data area is shown
of no-chart of any kind is marked with as the radar background,
data areas the “no data” symbol here in black. Later SW
defined in the IHO S-52 versions are fitted with a
presentation library
appendix 2/3.2.3(14) select box for either no data
pattern or dark radar back-
ground.
Operating of Operating of radar TX functions possible from Operating of radar TX func-
radar SW version 2.x onwards, access via Settings tions possible, corresponding
menu side bar is available
Operating of LOP, EBL, &VRM and PI lines are available EBL, VRM and PI lines are available from the
navigation from ->Tools ->NAV tab, or from SW version radar function side bar in the permanent area,
tools 2.x onwards via Tools Bar LOP from ->Tools ->NAV tab or Tools Bar
Display object Can be displayed per category: Base, Stan- Same as ECDIS plus Primary category; Select
groups dard, All and Customized. The last one Primary to set the Primary Chart Info Set (IEC
provides individual selection of groups. 62388)
Display ECDIS ECDIS Chart1 is a tab that can be opened in No comparable function available, the symbol
Symbol Library the application area, shows a legend of legend would cover the radar presentation,
Chart1 symbols used not permitted
Table V / 9 Differences between Chart Radar and ECDIS Mode
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 215

printed 14.07.15
9.8 Priority of Layers in Chart Radar Mode
The table on the next page is presenting the most important layers and the related priority shown for
Chart Radar mode. The arrangement of layers is shown from top to bottom.
All common functions as listed earlier and the layers as listed in the previous table are integrated to a
complete application for RADAR or for ECDIS.
If the two applications RADAR or ECDIS are combined on a single workstation to build-up a chart radar
or MULTIPILOT only those functions are added, which are not already available with the first application.
Each of the functions as listed above is only started once on a workstation. But depending on the actual
configuration it may have a slightly different appearance. Differences are listed i.e. at the end of the
Chart Radar chapter.
The arrangement for the MULTIPILOT with ECDIS is slightly different. The priority of the radar video is
changed in favour of the chart objects. The radar video layer is shifted down and placed in between basic
chart areas and chart objects acc. to IEC 61174. The dusk and night color sets used for the chart areas
are extended to the full daylight color set. All other functions are the same.
Page 216 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Objects and Priority

Data Source Function Controls Presentation Layer (for chart radar)
Own Ship (on top),
with head-marker, vector and
trails, AIS and ARPA targets
From navigation sensors

none Navigation Tools,
comprising EBL, VRM and LOP
RADAR Video,
raw video as received from
antenna unit, sea and rain
filtered as selected by the user
Chart Objects
buoys, beacons, traffic separa-
tion, text labels, dangerous
zones, coastlines, planned
route
User symbols,
user defined buoys, beacons,
lines and areas
Basic Chart Area,

land, water, depth lines
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 217

printed 14.07.15
Multi-Antenna Operation (optional) Operating Instructions
10 Multi-Antenna Operation (optional)
The RADARPILOT Platinum can be upgraded with the option for MULTI-ANTENNA OPERATION.
This option is relevant if the antennas on a certain ship are not covering a full 360 degree sector due to
high superstructures interrupting the radar beam.
In that case the radar signals of up to four antennas either for X-Band or for S-Band distributed over the
vessel can be combined such that they are displayed together in one PPI. A typical configuration is the
combination of a bow radar and stern radar antenna.
Preparation during System Commissioning

Up to four antennas, each with their corresponding transceiver, and
covering together the required full sector are configured during commis-
sioning of the RADAR as a group. For each antenna the free sector is
entered. One antenna is defined as the main. The others follow one after
the other. During operation this group can be selected by the user like
any of the single antennas.
The merging algorithm is as follows:

The radar signal of the main antenna is displayed first with its full sector
as defined in the configuration (here bow antenna).
The remaining sector is filled up with the signal of the next antenna as
far as available (here stern antenna).
If the stern antenna is covering a wider part of the remaining sector, the
information from the stern antenna, which is overlapping with the bow
antenna, is discarded.
This procedure can be continued with further antennas up to four in
total. Again the overlapping information is discarded.
The purpose of combining the signals of two or more antennas is to
provide radar coverage over two sectors, but not to improve the perfor-
mance by dual radar coverage of a common sector.
Page 218 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Multi-Antenna Operation (optional)
10.1 Transceiver Group and Master-Slave Selection
Transceiver Group Selection

From the drop-down list select the transceiver group which shall
be displayed on the MFD. The group is indicated by the letters
MX (Multi- Transceivers) in front instead of TX (Single-Trans-
ceiver) and a suitable group name (here Bow Stern) which has
been edited during system commissioning. The chosen trans-
ceivers and antenna motors are activated, if not yet done by
another MFD.
If No TX Selected is chosen, the appropriate transceivers are turned off and the respective antennas
are stopping rotation, if they are not selected by another MFD.
In order to have the current status of all the transceivers in the group, move the pointer to the depiction
of that transceiver group and let it stay for about one second, a small window pops up and shows the
information for all transceivers in the group.
If the selected group contains a transceiver which is actually not available i.e. due to malfunction, the
whole group cannot be activated or controlled in any way. In that case the single transceivers have to
be used.
Master Slave Selection

The Master-Slave function for a group of antennas is operated in the same way as for a single antenna.
Refer to page 187 for details. The only difference is that in Master mode the Adjust button is not active
because adjusting of a transceiver is only possible for a single transceiver and not for a transceiver
group.
If Master is selected, the actual MFD becomes the master oper-

ating unit for all transceivers in this group. The master status is
indicated as shown on the right screenshot. The former master
MFDs for each of the selected transceivers are no longer master
and on their screens the check mark will disappear.
In Slave mode picture distortions may occur if the radar range of a certain transceiver in
the group which has been selected by another master MFD is more than one step smaller
than the radar range of the slave and the slave indicator is de-centered. Refer to page 187
for details.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 219

printed 14.07.15
10.2 RADAR Video Settings and Reference Position
Video Settings
The options for gain control, anti-clutter sea and rain control,
and video enhancing are influencing only the display of the
radar video on the operated MFD. They are affecting all sectors
of the radar PPI in parallel. They are not influencing any other
MFDs which are connected to the same transceivers as slave or
master.
Setting the Reference Position

The selection of the Reference Position is limited to
the CCRP position (which is typically the position in
front of the Conning display) during Multi-Antenna
operation. If another reference position like one of
the radars or Track is selected, the indication falls
back to CCRP.
Page 220 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Multi-Antenna Operation (optional)
10.3 Dead Zones and Target Handling between Antennas
Dead Zones
A configuration with one bow and one stern antenna, covering
together a full 360 degree sector, and merged into one group may
have two remaining small dead zones next to the own ship. The size
is in the range of the ship dimensions.
This effect is due to the distance between the two antennas and can
be reduced by optimal placement. The two dead zones are indicated
in the PPI by grey areas as shown in the picture.
Target Handling between Antennas

If a target, which has been acquired automatically or manually, is leaving one antenna sector and
entering another one, it is handed over to the tracking process of the new antenna. In the target list the
source indication changes i.e. from TX 1 to TX 2.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 221

printed 14.07.15
10.4 Example for Multi-Antenna Operation
The following screenshot shows an example of a Multi-Antenna Operation with one antenna at the bow
and one antenna at the stern. The two antenna sectors are overlapping smoothly. Borders between the
sectors are not visualized.
Fig. V / 9 Example for Multi-Antenna Operation Radar Video 1)
1) Later SW versions are coming along with a slightly different design in the tab area
Page 222 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Radar for HSC Operation (optional)
11 Radar for HSC Operation (optional)
For HSC (high speed craft) operation the antenna revolution rate can be doubled resulting in a higher
radar video update rate 1).
Switching-over is achieved by checking the HSC box. This box is
visible only if the selected transceiver is capable of doubled antenna
revolution rate.
1) If the appropriate antenna gearbox is installed.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 223

printed 14.07.15
Checking the RADAR Function Operating Instructions
12 Checking the RADAR Function
Overview
On user level the RADARPILOT Platinum is providing two important checks for the correct RADAR func-
tion. The first one is the check of the magnetron hours which can be done quickly during the selection
of the transceiver. The second one is a test with the performance monitor which will take a minute or
more. Further steps like adjusting the head-marker are accessible from a service menu which is protected
by password. Please refer to the Technical Manual of the Platinum system.
Magnetron Hours
The transmitting valve or magnetron is the only
device which has in comparison to other elec-
tronic devices in the radar system a limited life-
time.
In order to check the actual operational hours of
a specific magnetron just place the cursor on
the transceiver in question in the selection list
and a small status window is opened with the
magnetron hours.
Radar Video Time-out

If a transceiver is selected from the list, which is currently not
available, i.e. is warming up, or data connection is missing, or
power break down occurred, the radar video time-out alarm is
given.
It shows a red alarm symbol next to the transceiver entry.
Move the pointer to the alarm symbol to open a tool-tip with the
status message.
Page 224 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Checking the RADAR Function
12.1 Performance Monitor
Background
The performance monitor provides the operator with a simple go/no-go tool to check the transmitter
performance as well as the receiver sensitivity in one step. It comprises a small test oscillator and a
microwave diode with amplifier. Both modules are installed under a hole in the gearbox. The hole is
hermetically sealed with a transparent plastic cover.
The diode receives the radar pulse which is transmitted by the magnetron via wave-guide and scanner
into the air. The received signal is amplified and gives an indication about the function of the complete
transmitter path.
The test oscillator transmits a pulse at about 1 msec after the main pulse. This pulse lies outside the
display space and is not visible in the radar image. It simulates a target being far away. This signal is
picked up by the scanner and gives an indication of the proper function of the complete receiving path.
Test
The performance of the selected transceiver can only be
tested by the MFD which is selected as Master for it. If
Master is not selected, or the selected transceiver is not
available, the Adjust control will be insensitive.
Click the Transceiver Adjust control, the corre-
sponding sub-menu will open. Check the control for
Performance Monitor. Wait for a minute, the result
will be shown as follows:
- If the sum of both indications from TX and RX path
together is Ok, the test is shown with an Ok in the
Transceiver Adjust box.
is degraded, the test is shown with a Critical
result.
is degraded by more than 10 dB, the test is shown
with a Most Critical result.
Switch off the performance monitor by closing the Transmitter Adjust box.
During the test, the radar is fixed to 12 nm and cannot be switched to another range or
setting. Do not start the performance test with a cold transceiver, wait 30 min after
switching-on. The test result could be disturbed by heavy snowfall or rain, shading the hole
in the gearbox. The test result could also be disturbed by other transceivers on-board.
They should be switched off.
If "Most Critical" is shown as the result, this means that the performance quality
of the radar system is no longer adequate for safe radar operation. Request
service!
☞ If the test shows that the magnetron has reached the end of its useful life, the toothed belts in the gear box
shall be checked and must be exchanged as well during the necessary service work.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 225

printed 14.07.15
Setting and Evaluation of the RADAR Video Operating Instructions
13 Setting and Evaluation of the RADAR Video
Generally, the echo data received by the transceiver can be amplified, attenuated or filtered in order to
enhance the display of desired data like targets. The main intention of the signal processing is the clear
and unmistakeable display of radar targets and the suppression of unwanted echoes like sea clutter, rain
clutter or interferences.
Amplification, attenuation or filtering is done in several ways, with continuously or digitally working filters.
(Some can be set from 0% to 100%, others can only be switched on or off).
Further on, echo data with the same azimuth delivered from one or more radar pulses („sweep-to-sweep-
data“) can be processed or data from one or more antenna turnarounds („scan-to-scan-data“) can be
evaluated.
The amplitudes of echoes can be evaluated in order to determine whether the echoes are targets or
noise, or the correlation of sweep-to-sweep or scan-to-scan data can be used to enhance the radar
picture:
Processing
Amplitude Treatment
Amplification
Attenuation
Correlative Treatment
Raw RADAR Data Sweep-to-sweep Filtered RADAR Data
Scan-to-scan
Table V / 10 Scheme of RADAR Video Evaluation
Amplitudes are influenced for example by the Gain and Sea settings, correlation is done amongst others
by the Enhance functions.
In the following, the different filters, their basic techniques and advantages or limitations are described
in the sequence they appear in the RADAR Sidebar.
her radar devices is suppressed so that automatic tuning (AFC) has the best results and should be used
as default. An optimum tuning is not only important for a clear visual display of the targets on the video
but is also a necessary prerequisite for the ARPA functions.
Gain setting influences the amplitudes of all echoes and works like an amplifier that makes it possible
to enhance all echoes and noise in the same way in order to get a better picture. But, as said before,
also the noise will be amplified and can disturb the clear display of targets. Gain should in any case be
set in such a way that slight noise is always visible.
Page 226 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Setting and Evaluation of the RADAR Video
13.1 RADAR Accuracy
Background
The correct measurement of a target position by radar is determined by the bearing and range accuracy
of the radar system. Both parameters are depending on physics, on installation, and on the ability of the
user to read accurate values from the screen.
As far as the physics is concerned, the accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on the
narrowness of the radar beam. The radar beam for X-band has a horizontal beam width of 1.5° with the
5 foot antenna and 0.95° with 8 foot antenna. For S-band the corresponding value is 1.8° with 14 foot
antenna. These values describe the 3 dB corners on each side of the beam, where the transmitted power
is half of the center value. Experience shows, that typically at sea these values are doubled. So the prac-
tical beam width of an 8 foot X-band antenna is about 2°. It provides an echo with a size of:
-> 6 nm x sin 2° = 387 m
Further on physics is involved with range measurement. It depends on the pulse rate and length which
are determined by the user selected range. To minimize error when measuring the range of a target, put
the target echo at an outer position on the screen by selecting a suitable range.
In terms of installation the bearing is usually taken relative to the ship's heading, and thus, proper
adjustment of the heading line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy.
Finally the user aspect has to be considered. To minimize error when taking the bearing of a target from
screen, put the target echo at an outer position on the screen by selecting again a suitable range.
Results
According to IMO (MSC.192/5.2) the radar system range and bearing accuracy shall be as follows:
• "Range: within 30 m or 1 % of the range scale in use, whichever is greater;
• "Bearing: within 1°
in typical operational and environmental conditions.
A well adjusted 1) RADARPILOT Platinum is exceeding these requirements as follows:
• "Range: within 15 m or 0.3 % of the range scale in use, whichever is greater;
• "Bearing: within 0.5°
in typical operational and environmental conditions.
1) in terms of trigger delay and heading line adjustment
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 227

printed 14.07.15
13.2 Achievable RADAR Range
The theoretically achievable radar range limited by the curvature of the earth depends on the height
of the antenna above the water surface and the height of the target, and is applicable under normal
atmospheric conditions - see the following table.
Theoretically Achievable RADAR Range

Antenna Height at a Target Height of
Above Water Surface 1000
1m 3m 10 m 30 m 100 m 300 m m
8m 9 NM 12 NM 13 NM 18 NM 28 NM 44 NM 76 NM
15 m 11 NM 13 NM 16 NM 21 NM 31 NM 47 NM 79 NM
30 m 12 NM 16 NM 19 NM 23 NM 34 NM 50 NM 82 NM
Table V / 11 Achievable RADAR Range
Whether radar targets can be detected up to this theoretical range, even with optimum video setting,
depends not only on the atmospheric conditions but also on the characteristics of the target:
- Large targets with good reflection characteristics produce strong echo signals and are displayed with
corresponding clarity on the screen.
- Smaller targets situated in the shadow of large objects are not illuminated by the radar pulses and
are therefore not displayed.
- Flat coasts have an unfavourable reflection cross-section and cannot be recognized until they have
been approached more closely. On the other e , high coastlines and mountainous regions further
inland are recognised at a very early stage.
- In the coastal approaches, the tide rip lines and surf areas are displayed similarly to coastlines.
However, this rather irritating display can be a valuable orientation aid for the coastal navigator.
- The reflections of radar waves from ice depend largely on the surface structure of the areas illumi-
nated by the radar. Rough and jagged surfaces produce good echo displays, whereas smoothly
frozen-over surfaces, rounded surfaces and surfaces at an oblique angle generally reflect the trans-
mitted pulses away from the ship. Thus, for example, the echo display of large icebergs can fluc-
tuate extremely severely, depending on the existing aspect.
- The detection of low-lying blocks of ice (growlers) probably presents the greatest uncertainty:
Even if the anti-clutter facilities are operated carefully, the echoes from growlers can no
longer be definitely identified if moderate disturbances from the sea surface are present.
Page 228 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
13.3 Distortions of the RADAR Video
Because of the physical characteristics of the radar principle used, the video displayed does not corre-
spond exactly to the position and form of the reflecting target. A distinction must be drawn between
radial distortions (in the direction of the target) and azimuthal distortions (perpendicular to the target
direction) - see figure on next page.
Radial Distortions
Radial distortions in the direction of transmission are caused by the fact that a target reflects the trans-
mitted pulse for as long as the pulse is moving past the target 1). Thus, radial lengthening depending on
the pulse duration occurs on the screen. In the case of range measurements, it must be noted that the
echo edge facing own ship corresponds to the true front edge of the target.
If there are several targets behind one another with small (radial) distances between them, they are
shown separately on the screen if, and only if, their distance apart is so large that the radial lengthened
echoes do not overlap.
Azimuthal Distortions
Azimuthal distortions are caused by the width of the beam radiated by the antenna. A point target
appears wider the further away it is. At a distance of 10 NM with a horizontal antenna-beamwidth of
1.5°, an individual target is displayed as an arc with a length of 480 m. Because of this effect, individual
targets situated beside one another can merge to form a single target.
-> Not only individual targets but also small spits of land aligned in the radial direction appear wider
than they really are, and radially oriented entrances appear narrower than in reality.As a result of
azimuthal distortions and/or changes in the target position, the radar centroid of a target can
change, especially at short range. In the case of a target being tracked, this can lead to a sudden
change in the displayed vector.
In addition to these undesirable azimuthal distortions, targets can also be deliberately widened with
increasing distance, so that narrow, close-range targets too can be seen clearly. This function is used in
the Enhance modes Medium and High. It ensures that the azimuthal distortion corresponds to the
radial distortion over a wide range of distances. Because the radial distortion depends on the pulse
length, the targets are displayed particularly large by the selection of Long Pulse.
1) The pulse length setting Long Pulse thus generates larger radial distortions than Short Pulse.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 229

printed 14.07.15
Width of the beam radiated

Two adjacent targets merge to by the antenna
form one radar echo (azimuthal
distortion)
A spit of land is displayed wider
An entrance is
Two targets behind one displayed narrower or
another merge to form one not at all
radar echo (radial distortion)
RADAR video
Land contour
RADAR video
Actual size of the target Azimuthal distortion
Radial distortion
Fig. V / 10 Radial and azimuthal distortions of the radar video
Page 230 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
13.4 Undesirable Echo Displays and Effects
Disturbances of the radar video are caused by

- meteorological processes,
- reflections from the sea surface,
- radar signals from other transmitters,
- false echo displays,
- sectors of reduced radar visibility,
- super-refraction and sub-refraction.
Influences of Meteorological Processes

The influence of meteorological phenomena such as fog, rain, snow or hail on the radar video increases
with the size of the droplets in relation to the radar wavelength, and with the density of the droplets.
The shorter-wave X-Band radar (with a wavelength of 3 cm) is therefore generally impaired more
severely by meteorological influences than is the longer-wave S-Band radar (10 cm wavelength).
The following table describes the influences of rain and the influences on the radar:
S-Band, S-Band; X-Band, X-Band,

Reduction of target detection short pulse long pulse short pulse long pulse
Rain, 4mm/h, close range < 5nm Slightly Severely Slightly Severely
Rain, 4mm/h, medium range Nearly none Up to half Slightly Severely
Rain, 4mm/h, long range > 10nm Nearly none Slightly Slightly Severely
Rain, 16mm/h, close range < 5nm Slightly Severely Up to half Severely
Rain, 16mm/h, medium range Nearly none Severely Up to half Severely
Rain, 16mm/h, long range > 10nm Nearly none Severely Up to half Up to half
Table V / 12 Influences of Meteorological Processes
In general, it is advisable not to use long pulse in rainy conditions and it is better to use the S-band
radar rather than the X-band. If no S-band radar is available, it must be considered that X-band radars
lose 50% of their coverage in heavy rains.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 231

printed 14.07.15
13.5 Reduced Range by Rain in X-Band
Even in the X-Band radar, fog causes practically no disturbances, whereas precipitations with larger drop-
lets attenuate the transmitted radar pulses and thus weaken to a greater or lesser extent the display of
targets situated behind extensive areas of precipitation. Furthermore, throughout their entire extent, rain,
snow and hail reflect part of the transmitted energy and produce echoes in the form of milky areas in
the radar video (backscatter).
Because of the very different signal structures of useful targets and rain areas, rain clutter can be notice-
ably reduced by the rain clutter suppression function.
In the case of strong, extended areas of rain, the losses become so great that the achievable range is
reduced very severely. Useful targets might be completely concealed.
Fig. V / 11 Reduced Range of First Detection depending on Rain in X-Band
Page 232 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
13.6 Reduced Range by Rain in S-Band
The S-Band radar „sees“ through the rain with practically no attenuation losses, and even detects targets
in and behind a rain area. The echo signals caused by the rain are only displayed weakly. Similar
behavior is exhibited in the case of hail and snow.
In this case too, unusually heavy rain can reduce the achievable ranges and thus cause sudden loss of
targets.
Fig. V / 12 Reduced Range of First Detection depending on Rain in S-Band
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 233

printed 14.07.15
13.7 Disturbances by Reflections from the Sea Surface
Clutter echoes from the surface of the sea can be recognised from the fact that a mostly circular but
eccentric area displaced in the wind direction and having non-uniform brightness is formed around the
own ship symbol (sea clutter). These echoes make targets in this region more difficult to detect and
track, but they have no effect on the display of targets situated behind the reflection zone.
These disturbances are more severe in the case of a radar antenna mounted high up than for one
mounted lower down. The area covered by these disturbances increases with increasing sea state, and
is increased particularly by steeper waves.
With the aid of the sea clutter suppression function, the disturbance echoes described above can be
reduced. However, since this also weakens the display of targets and because the target might not be
displayed with every revolution of the antenna, maximum concentration by the observer is necessary. In
the case of automatic target tracking, the sea clutter suppression function can lead to the loss of targets
due to the attenuation of the signals.
Page 234 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
13.8 Other Disturbances
Transmissions from other RADARs

Transmissions from other radars working in the same electrical frequency band occur as disturbances in
the form of small points or dashes. These move in rapid succession along straight or curved tracks to
the center of the screen or in the opposite direction.
These disturbances appear particularly clearly at the larger range settings, but they impede radar obser-
vation to an insignificant extent only. They can be almost completely eliminated by means of the Inter-
ference Rejection function which is activated automatically on the Platinum RADAR but which can be
switched off if required.
False or Indirect Echo Displays

False or indirect echo displays ("ghost echoes") occur as a result of reflection of the radar pulses by the
ship's own superstructures of all kinds and by nearby objects that reflect very well. Therefore, a typical
feature of these echoes is that they appear at the bearing of the reflecting surface, regardless of the real
position of the targets. The false echoes caused by the ship´s own superstructures can be masked out
by Sector Blanking. Refer to page 237 for details.
When two ships pass one another on parallel courses, multiple echoes can often be observed as a result
of pulses reflected to and from several times between the ships' sides. On the screen, a series of equi-
spaced echo displays of decreasing intensity appears at the bearing of the object.
Sectors of Reduced RADAR Visibility

Sectors of reduced radar visibility occur as a result of own ship's superstructures which impair and
prevent rectilinear propagation of the radar pulses. Theoretical determination of the geometry of these
sectors and of their influence on the display of targets is possible to an inadequate extent only. An effec-
tive practical method consists of determining the shadow sectors against the background of disturbance
signals from the sea surface (sea clutter).
Super-refraction - Sub-refraction
If the normal refraction gradient for the radar wave in the maritime boundary layer of the atmosphere
is changed by external influences, sub-refraction occurs when the transmitted beam is bent upwards
away from the earth's surface, and super-refraction occurs when the transmitted beam is bent down
towards the earth's surface.
In the case of super-refraction, false echoes of targets outside the set range of measurement can occur:
the echo of a transmitted pulse is not received within the set range but during the next transmit cycle
or by the one after that. The resulting ghost echoes can occur at any position. Since the position of ghost
echoes depends on the pulse repetition frequency, ghost echoes can be recognised as such by switching
over the pulse length or the range on the master radar.
-> Every pulse length has a particular pulse repetition frequency assigned to it; therefore, when the
pulse length or range is changed, the repetition frequency changes too (Refer to page 188).
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 235

printed 14.07.15
13.9 RADAR Setting for RACON Codes and Target Enhancers
RACON Code
The code of a RACON consists of a radially arranged dash-dot code which is starting in the radar video
closely behind the beacon position. By means of different codes described in the List of Lights, the
approach points equipped with a RACON can be clearly identified.
Most RACON transmit in the X-Band, but there are some RACON installed which transmit in the S-Band.
The majority of RACON change their transmission frequency slowly throughout the entire frequency
band, and so they are not received in every revolution of the antenna.
For the setting of the radar, the same basic principles are applicable as for SART detection (refer to page
238).
Target Enhancers
The target enhancer is an active device on a target vessel which transmits an X-band pulse upon recep-
tion of any X-band radar signal. The pulse length of this secondary radar pulse does not typically reflect
the size of the actual target vessel but is fixed. In general this kind of equipment is used on small boats
which have not a significant radar profile like pleasure boats or wooden boats or lifeboats. There are no
special settings required for detection of target enhancers. They are just visualized like a very well
reflecting target.
Page 236 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
13.10 Sector Blanking
If parts of the own ship´s superstructure do not allow the radar to transmit properly in a certain direc-
tion, these sectors can be blanked in order to avoid false echoes. These sectors are indicated by one or
more highlighted circle sectors.
Display of Sector Blanking (Example):
Sector Blanking is
active from 60 to
110 degrees rela-
tive.(115 to 165
degrees true)
The superim-
posed AIS target
does not show a
radar echo like
The start and stop angle (relative to the ship) are set by the service technician using the NACOS Platinum
L3 Integration Manager tool.
-> The above picture shows a configuration where the sector has been extended more than required
just to demonstrate and visualize the principle.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 237

printed 14.07.15
13.11 RADAR Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only)
The information needed for reliable detection of SART's is described in IMO Circular 161. The content of
that paper is reproduced on the following pages.
ANNEX
OPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION
WARNING: A SART will only respond to an X-Band (3 cm) radar. It will not be seen on
an S-Band (10 cm) radar.
Introduction
l. A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm)
radar within a range of approximately 8 n.miles. Each radar pulse received causes it to
transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band.
When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 sec) through the band before beginning a
relatively slow sweep (7.5 sec) through the band back to the starting frequency. This
process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the
SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of
the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12
slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally
spaced by about 0.64 n.miles will be shown.
2. When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 n.mile, the radar display may show
also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses,
which also are equally spaced by 0.64 n.miles, will be interspersed with the original line
of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
RADAR Range Scale
3. When looking for a SART it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 n.mile range scale.
This is because the total displayed length of the SART response of 12 (or 24) dots may
extend approximately 9.5 n.miles beyond the position of the SART and it is necessary to
see a number of response dots to distinguish the SART from other responses.
SART Range Errors
4. When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART
is at a range greater than about 1 n.mile), the position at which the first dot is displayed
may be as much as 0.64 n.mile beyond the true position of the SART. When the range
closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of these will be no more than
150 meters beyond the true position.
RADAR Bandwidth
5. This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched with the
range scale and the associated pulse length. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used with
long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on
short ranges.
6. A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it
is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART. The
RADAR Operating Manual should be consulted about the particular radar parameters and
bandwidth selection.
Note about item 6: The bandwidth of the radar is not less than 5 MHz. Therefore, the setting described here is not necessary
Page 238 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
RADAR Side Lobes
7. As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the SART
responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of the
anti-clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful to observe the side lobes as
they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the SART
is near to own ship.
Detuning the RADAR
8. To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter conditions, the radar may be detuned
to reduce the clutter without reducing the SART response. RADARs with automatic
frequency control may not permit manual detune of the equipment. Care should be taken
in operating the radar in the detuned condition as other wanted navigational and anti-colli-
sion information may be removed. The tuning should be returned to normal operation as
soon as possible.
Gain
9. For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range detection
should be used i.e., with a light background noise speckle visible.
Anti-Clutter Sea Control
10. For optimum range SART detection this control should be set to the minimum. Care
should be exercised as wanted targets in sea clutter may be obscured. Note also that in
clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be detectable, irrespec-
tive of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case, the position of the SART may
be estimated by measuring 9.5 n.miles from the furthest dot back towards own ship.
11. Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities. Because the way
in which the automatic sea control functions may vary from one radar manufacturer to
another, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been
detected. The effect of the auto sea control on the SART response can then be compared
with manual control.
Anti-Clutter Rain Control
12. This should be used normally (i.e. to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a
SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the anti-
clutter rain circuitry. Note that RACON responses, which are often in the form of a long
flash, will be affected by the use of this control.
13. Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities. Because the way
in which the automatic rain control functions may vary from one radar manufacturer to
another, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been
detected. The effect of the auto rain control on the SART response can then be compared
with manual control.
Note:
The automatic rain and sea clutter controls may be combined in a single ’auto-clutter’
control, in which case the operator is advised to use the manual controls initially until the
SART has been detected, before assessing the effect of auto.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 239

printed 14.07.15
Page 240 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
ROUTE PLANNING AND
MONITORING
RADARPILOT Platinum ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING
Operating Instructions Route Planning
1 Route Planning
This chapter describes the route related functions of the RADARPILOT Platinum. It is applicable to all SW
versions. If menus between SW version 1.x and 2.x are different, this has been documented in the corre-
sponding text.
Route planning is based on sailing routes consisting of waypoints and straight legs between two adjacent
waypoints. These waypoints are defined by their geographical coordinates in WGS-84 format (the stan-
dard format of satellite navigation receivers and electronic charts).
A sailing route can be edited before a voyage takes place and can be checked well in advance against
unsafe depth areas and any obstructions as indicated in the ENC 1).
A number of sailing routes, i.e. all North-Sea Routes can be stored together in a common catalog. Several
catalogs can be managed by the RADARPILOT Platinum.
Once a sailing route has been properly edited and checked it can be used for manual or automatic
steering. If a course has to be changed at a waypoint, a wheel-over point depending on the ships ability
to turn is automatically calculated during route editing and inserted into the route. If the ship reaches
this wheel-over point during the voyage a warning is given to the helmsmen to start the course change
maneuver.
For each leg of a route the navigator can define a maximum possible speed. Based on this input the
RADARPILOT Platinum will calculate either a planned speed in order to reach the final destination in a
given time or an Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) based on the maximum speed settings.
Route planning comprises the following steps:

Before starting with route planning prepare charts for the whole voyage. Please refer to the main chapter
about Chart Maintenance for further details. Then continue as follows:
1. Consider waypoint names, sequence, sub routes, and turning radius for wheel over point
2. Set the display of the route
3. Set the display of the chart
4. Open a catalog for routes or create a new catalog
5. Open an existing route or create a new route
6. Add or insert waypoints in graphical mode
7. Work with the waypoint list
8. Save, rename or delete a route
9. Start check of the route
10. Result of geometrical check
11. Result of ENC check
- These steps are described one by one in the subsequent sub chapters 1.1 to 1.11.
In chapter 2 the route monitoring which is applied during the voyage is described, and in chapter 3
special settings, further information, and variants of SW versions are discussed.
1)
ARCS charts which are based on raster images have no information about depth and obstructions and
cannot be used for checking a route.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 243

printed 14.07.15
ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING RADARPILOT Platinum
Route Planning Operating Instructions
1.1 Consider at the Beginning
Numbering of Waypoints
Each route has a first waypoint and a last one. During editing, all waypoints are automatically numbered
consecutively, beginning at 1 for the first waypoint. All route functions refer to this sequence.
Naming of Waypoints
In addition to the number, every waypoint can be named by an entry in the waypoint list. This will
support later identification of a waypoint.
Sequence of Waypoints
The sequence of waypoints can only be sailed in the direction for which it has been generated.
However, the direction of a route can be reversed by means of a simple operating step during editing
and then processed further.
Dividing a Route into Parts
There is practically no limit to the number of waypoints or to the length of a route. Thus, the entire route
between two ports can be defined as one pre-planned track. But it might be appropriate to divide the
entire distance up into individual routes.
For example, if a port is approached from various directions along various routes, it might be appropriate
to perform separation into the port-related segment that is identical for all routes and the part that is
specific for the route concerned. In this way, the data relating to the port need to be input once only,
and the maintenance of these data only has to take place in one dataset.
WOP
Actual waypoint
(To WPT)
Track
ti on curve
ec
dir
g
ilin
Sa
Radi
Track
line Next
us
Last waypoint
waypoint
(From WPT)
Fig. VI / 1 Shape of the pre-planned track in the case of course changes
Wheel Over Point

For the course change at the waypoint, the radius of the turn must be specified. The default value is 1
NM and can be modified by the user according to the actual maneuverability of the vessel. Based on this
radius the beginning of the maneuver is computed, the track curve leaves the track line 1) at the wheel
over point (WOP), and after completion of the maneuver it goes over to the next track line.
1)
Track line is a line joining two consecutive waypoints, also called leg in these operating instructions
Page 244 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.2 Set the Display of the Route
Browse Mode on ECDIS

If you want to edit the route graphically on the elec-
tronic chart, it is advisable to switch into the Browse
mode in order to be able to show any part of the sea
where the route shall be located.
Route Display Settings

Before route editing is started, the settings for
displaying the route in the chart should be made.
Open the Settings bar and select the Route entry
(Settings->Route in earlier SW versions).
Refer to the following picture to identify the items
that can be superimposed as additional information
to the route. The setting of the safety corridor is
described on page 279. At the beginning you may
just use a default value of 0.5 NM.
Safety corridor, its width is adjust-

able with the glider shown in above
window, there set to 0.5 NM.
During final check of the route all
obstructions registered in ECDIS
and falling within this corridor will
cause a warning
True bearing of the leg from

waypoint W2 to waypoint W3
(can be switched off)
Waypoint number (can be

switched off)
Wheel over point/wheel over

line, select between line or
point in above window (can be
switched off)
Fig. VI / 2 Route Display Settings
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 245

printed 14.07.15
1.3 Set the Display of the Chart
1. Open the Settings bar and select the Draught

entry (Settings->Draft in earlier SW versions). Enter
the actual draft of your vessel (here i.e. 8.5 and 8.8
m). It is required for a correct setting of the safety
depth in the next step.
(Earlier SW versions have a slightly different appearance, first the value for Aft and then for Fore is shown).
2. Open the Settings bar and select the Depth
Contour entry (Presentation->Chart->Depth in
earlier SW versions). Set the appropriate Safety
Depth (here i.e. 14 m) for raising an alarm and the
corresponding Safety Contour for displaying the
safety contour line in the chart.
3. Consider that the automatic route check is
performed in any case against the ENC data inde-
pendent from the chart selected for display. But if
ARCS has been chosen for display, the menu shown
to the right is temporarily not available.
4. Switch on the display of the user made symbols,

lines and areas in the context menu of the PPI/Chart
area under Layer > User Symbols. 1)
5. Adjust the Range so that cells of the electronic
vector chart or raster charts which contain the
nautically relevant information for the planned route
are displayed.
6. Check whether chart cells having the appropriate
navigational purpose are present for the entire
track, at least over the width corresponding to the
Safety Corridor setting or to the Track Limit
contained in the route data-set.
7. For those areas of the planned route which are not covered by suitable ENC data cells, all nautically
relevant objects along the route can be marked by means of Own Safety Lines or Danger Highlights.
8. If raster charts are used, then 2) all nautically relevant objects along the route must be marked by
means of own Safety Lines or Danger Highlights for the entire track, at least over the width corre-
sponding to the track limit.
If no ENC cells are available for a route or parts of a route an actual

paper chart has to be used as the main basis for navigation
1)
The available functions of the context menu may vary with operating mode and SW version
2)
This is prescribed for ships with DNV approval and using raster charts.
Page 246 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.4 Open a Catalog for Routes or Create a New Catalog
Open a Catalog
Open the Tools bar and select the Route
Explorer entry (Tools->Routes->Explorer in earlier
SW versions). In the left menu the list of route
catalogs is shown. Click to one catalog in order to
see the routes contained in this catalog. These
routes are then shown in the right window.
Create, Delete or Rename a Catalog

A click with MORE (right-click) into the window for
catalogs opens a context menu for New Catalog,
Delete Catalog or Rename Catalog. Select one
function with DO (left-click).
The entries Delete and Rename are only possible
when a catalog is selected (marked blue).
The entries New and Rename will open another
window for editing the name of the catalog.
Enter a name from the keyboard and close with
OK.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 247

printed 14.07.15
1.5 Open an Existing Route or Create a New Route
Open and Display a Route

Open the Tools bar and select the Route Explorer
entry (Tools->Routes->Explorer in earlier SW
versions). Select a catalog as shown in the previous
sub chapter.
Mark a route name by clicking on it one time (DO or
left-click, will be highlighted in blue), and then
• click to the Open button,
• or open the context menu with MORE (right-
click) and there click on Open or
• just double-click to the route name.
Once the route has been opened it is shown as an
orange colored line in the corresponding chart.
A route can display its waypoints and additional data

also as a list. For this purpose right-click on the route
name and select Waypoint List from the context
menu (in some versions the list is opened already if the The names of the routes contained in the
route is opened or activated). folder may be sorted ascending or
descending by clicking the Name control.
The route data are then displayed in the lower part of
the chart area in form of a waypoint list.
Create, Delete or Rename a Route
A click with MORE (right-click) into the window for
routes opens again the context menu as above with
further functions for New Route, Save, Save As...,
Delete Route, or Rename Route. Select one func-
tion with DO (left-click).
The entries Save As..., Delete Route and Rename
Route are only possible when a route is selected
(marked in blue).
Enter a name from the keyboard and close with OK.
After having entered the name of a new route the first
waypoint named Initial waypoint appears in the
center of the screen which is also the current ship’s
position if the ship is centered (red arrow).
At the same time, you can select Waypoint List from
the context menu as above so that the waypoint list
appears in the lower part of the chart area showing
already the initial waypoint (next page).
Click on the waypoint symbol to mark it. The marked
waypoint is displayed with a handle and can now be
moved to the desired starting point of the route. Pointing
with the cursor to the waypoint opens an information
window with position, route name, etc.
Page 248 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.6 Add or Insert Waypoints in Graphical Mode
In the previous chapters (see page 248) we have learned, how to create a new route with just one initial
waypoint or how to open an existing route with a number of waypoints. In any case the subsequent step
is to add or insert further waypoints.
The easiest way is the graphical input mode with the mouse. This mode is described here. For the text
input please refer to the subsequent chapter about editing of further route data (see page 252).
Add one or more Waypoints

To add waypoints, click on the first or the last
waypoint symbol of the route to mark it (see
red arrow). Then right-click anywhere in the
chart to open the context menu.
In the context-menu, click on Route->
Continue Route to set the next waypoint.
From now on the cursor is displayed with a
dashed connection line to the previously set
waypoint and each click with DO (left-click)
adds a new waypoint symbol on the screen.
Its position is added at the end or the begin-
ning of the waypoint list.
Stop the sequence of adding waypoints by a click with MORE (right-
click), ensure that the mouse is not moved during right-click.
Insert a Waypoint
To insert a waypoint, click on the nearest
waypoint symbol of the route to mark it (see
red arrow). Then right-click anywhere in the
chart to open the context menu.
In the context-menu, click on Route->
Insert Before or Insert After to add a
waypoint. The position of the new waypoint is
inserted in the waypoint list.
Insert a Waypoint on a Leg The available functions of the context

menu may vary with operating mode
Click on the leg to select it; a marker is shown and SW version
in the middle of this leg.

Via the context menu you then have access to
the function Route->Insert Waypoint here.
In any case the new inserted waypoint will be set in the middle of the leg which then must be moved
manually to the wanted position in the chart.
Move a Waypoint
Click with DO on the waypoint symbol to select it. When the selection mark is shown, click on it and
hold the DO key and then move the waypoint symbol to the intended position on the screen.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 249

printed 14.07.15
1.7 Working with the Waypoint List
The waypoint list provides an overview about all route parameters. Opening of the list has been shown
in the previous sub-chapters. The list has two views, a Planning View with Waypoints and a Sched-
uling View with Legs (or track segments).
The most important parameters are the waypoint number, the name, the position, the turning radius
(RAD) at the waypoint, the time of arrival (ETA) at this waypoint, and the calculation mode for ETA.
They are included in the first view. The name has to be inserted manually. All other data are generated
automatically during the graphic editing mode, but can be changed later.
Most of the data in the second view are generated as well by the RADARPILOT Platinum by using default
values for the parameters, these can be changed later. A detailed list of all parameters is given on page
276.
The columns of both views can be arranged or even hidden by the operator and they can be individually
printed out. More details can be found on the next two pages.
Fig. VI / 3 Waypoint List - Planning View
Page 250 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.7.1 Planning View of the Waypoint List
The screen-shot below is showing the Planning view of the Variable Waypoint List:
Click to View in the headline to change be- Click to Options in the headline to set or clear
tween Planning and Schedule view and the Planned Speed Mode (refer to page 264)
set up a schedule for the opened route for details).
Click here to close the

display of the list
Click to Route in the
headline to Save,
Close, Check or Ac-
tivate the opened
route, see also text
below
The waypoint data are not automatically stored! After having finished the
editing process or even in between, just use Save from the route expander
or top line menu. With Close the list is left without saving.
i
Save is storing the edited route data on the hard disc, details can be found
on page 253. Close is closing the route without saving.
Activate is starting the route monitoring process during a voyage, details can
be found on page 261.
With Setup and Print Passage Plan the columns of the opened waypoint
list can be sorted for print-out and finally printed out on paper, refer to page
274 for details.
With Notes a small editor is opened to enter notes and hints for this route.
The function Reverse Route is changing the sailing direction. Waypoints are
automatically numbered in the opposite direction. Store under another name with Save As... from route
expander.
With Check Route an automatic check of the route for geometric mismatch and ENC objects is started,
refer to page 254 for details.
The position data shown here are inserted automatically based on the position, where the first waypoint
and subsequent waypoints have been graphically set by the operator. For each new waypoint that is set
by a mouse click, a new line in the waypoint list is added.
Click to one of the waypoints in the list with MORE (right-click) and select Edit Waypoint or Edit Leg to
modify data by text input (refer to page 252 and following for details).
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 251

printed 14.07.15
1.7.2 Edit Further Waypoint Data in the Waypoint List
To edit further data of a waypoint, click

with DO on this waypoint in the chart,
then right-click anywhere in the chart
to open the context menu.
In the context-menu, click on
Route-> Edit Waypoint to open the
waypoint editor.
If you want to delete the selected
waypoint, just click to
Route-> Delete in the context menu.
Name of the Waypoint

First give a name to this waypoint to ensure easier identification.
Position of the Waypoint
Check the position which results from placing the waypoint
graphically into the chart, adjust if necessary. Activate the Param-
eter Point if no turn should take place at this waypoint (see also
page 277).
Radius at this Waypoint
Check the required turning radius at this waypoint, default is 1
NM, adjust if necessary (see also page 278).
ETA at this Waypoint
Check the estimated arrival time at this waypoint, set to Specify
if it is a fixed time or to Calculate if it depends on a predefined
speed (default is 25 kn). More details can be found on page 265.
Notes for this waypoint
Enter any notes and hints which are important for navigation at
this waypoint.
Finally press OK and the waypoint list will show the following
updated line for waypoint no 5:
Page 252 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.8 Save, Rename or Delete a Route
Routes as shown in the waypoint list are not automatically stored to the file system on the RADARPILOT
Platinum. Be sure to Save all your changes at the latest after completion of route editing. During long
editing sessions intermediate saving of data is recommended 1).
Save in the WP List
Select the Route pull-down menu in the headline of the
waypoint list by clicking with DO (left-click) to the text
Route (see red arrow)! Then click with DO to Save.
Save in the Route Expander

A route can also be saved from the route expander. Just
click with DO (left-click) into the right window of the
expander, a context menu is opened. Then click with DO
to Save.
If you want do discard your changes made to the
selected route, use Save As to store the version with the
changed dataset under a new file name. The initial route
remains with the old data set under the old name.
You may also delete the selected route with Delete or
rename the selected route with Rename. If you rename
a route the old name and the old route content is deleted
from the route list.
1) Refer to page 269 for details on storing data on USB devices.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 253

printed 14.07.15
1.9 Start Check of the Route
Before a route can be used for sailing it has to pass an automatic check of the geometrical shape, i.e.
minimum turning radius and only if this check was successful a second check for obstructions or shallow
water areas contained in the ENC takes place.
Start the Check in the WP List

Select the Route pull-down menu in the
headline of the waypoint list by clicking
with DO (left-click).
Then click with DO to Check Route
(green arrow).
☞ If the route has been reloaded, the check results from a previous check are lost and the check must
be done once again. In this way it is ensured that the check is repeated with the actually valid draft
dependent depth contour settings of the most up-to-date electronic chart.
Comment on the Results

The possible results of the check are described on the next two pages, but in general it can be stated
as follows:
- When the entire preplanned track is shown without red ring symbols along the route and no alarm
icons are shown any more in the waypoint list, the check program did not find any violations.
- It may happen that errors or warnings remain displayed but in reality there is no serious problem
going along that route. The quality of the check-results is mainly depending on the contents of the
electronic charts.
Page 254 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.10 Results of Geometrical Check
If the check of the geometrical shape was not successful, a message

window as shown here to the right appears.
The corresponding waypoint is marked in the waypoint list with a
yellow warning sign (depending on SW version, the sign may be
slightly different).
Just point with the cursor to this sign and a small tool-tip comes up
with more details about the violation of the geometrical shape.
The yellow sign is by default in the first column of the list but can be set by
the user to any position as required (depending on SW version the sign may
be slightly different, in later SW versions a yellow square is used).
open tool-tip
In this case the position of waypoint 6 has to be modified such that the next waypoint can be reached
with the set minimum radius of 0.50 NM.
The part where the set minimum radius is too large compared to
the geometric shape which has been edited, is also marked in the
graphic presentation of the route (see red arrow in the small
picture to the right).
- This marked line and the corresponding yellow warning sign
are also already shown during editing.
Adjust the waypoint so that the marked line disappears or decrease
the set minimum radius in the waypoint list. The lowest value which
can be input here is 0.3 NM.
In addition a minimum distance of 200 m between two waypoints
should be fulfilled.
• Start with a new check after correction of the route.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 255

printed 14.07.15
1.11 Results of the Check against ENC Chart and User Symbols
The check against the ENC chart comprises:

- check against the Safety Contour which has been set by the operator, see page 246
- check against the chart objects with a depth less than the Safety Contour Value
- check against Own Safety Lines and Danger Highlight Areas
- in addition all navigational warnings for this area are listed
The results of the route verification are shown in the waypoint list by small icons.
The yellow sign is by default in the first column of the list but can be set by the user to any position as required
(depending on SW version the sign may be slightly different, in later SW versions a yellow square is used).
Pointing on it with the cursor, gives again additional information on the check-results as a tool-tip. An
example is given below (cursor pointed to WP 5):
The results of the verification process are also made visible in form of red rings shown along the
route, an example is given below. Here the cursor has been set one after the other to the red rings of
the anchorage area, the depth area and the wreck. In this picture all three tool-tips are shown at the
same time to give an overview. On the RADARPILOT Platinum only one is shown at a time:
For the verification of the route, the chart cells with the highest precision available on the system are
used as the basis. They might therefore differ from the cells used for the display. Because of this,
messages might occur which initially are in contradiction to the presentation of the pre-planned track in
the vector chart 1).
If the check showed passages which can not be sailed, the route has to be re-directed and checked
again. But typically a few warnings will still remain. In any case the route can be activated after check
independent from the results and number of warnings.
1)
To clarify supposed contradictions of this kind, it is helpful to switch to a different range setting and to use
the Chart Info box where required.
Page 256 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Route Monitoring
2 Route Monitoring
During the voyage, the RADARPILOT Platinum performs a number

of nautical checks. This process is running on all workstations with
RADARPILOT Platinum application independently from each other.
If defined criteria, based on the ECDIS performance standards,
are infringed, an appropriate alarm is given when the respective
monitoring function has been switched on by the user.
The monitoring functions are based on the look-ahead sector as
set by the user. An example is shown in the screenshot to the
right. If a waypoint, a wheel-over point, any obstacle, danger area
or shallow water area are falling into this sector, an alarm or a
warning is raised. The look ahead sector can be set such that an
alarm well in advance is given.
The monitoring function can be divided into chart monitoring and
track monitoring as follows:
Chart monitoring
- raises an alarm if any dangerous chart object or user symbol 1) contained in the ENC are falling into
the look ahead sector
- raises an alarm if the safety depth (required for the own vessel and set by the user), is larger than
the depth indicated in the chart taking into account the length and the width of the look-ahead
sector
- is performed in any case independent from an activated route, monitoring is just based on the look-
ahead sector checking the area in front of the own ship independent from sailing on a route or
somewhere else
- is performed in the background and always based on ENC charts independent from chart as
selected by the user (i.e. ARCS, or C-Map Prof.).
- If no ENC is available the check is carried out only against user symbols which have been placed by
the operator in advance on the planned route.
Track monitoring
- raises an alarm if the own ship is deviating from the activated route (also called System Route)
more than the XTD limit which has been set by the user for the actual leg
- raises an alarm if the next wheel-over point is touched by the look-ahead sector
- can be performed independent from the selected chart (ENC, ARCS, or C-Map Prof.) and also if no
charts are available for a certain area
1)
Only those user-made symbols which are classified as obstructions (like own safety line, danger highlight, buoys,
beacons, lighthouses, landmarks, etc.) generate an alarm in the monitoring process.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 257

printed 14.07.15
Route Monitoring Operating Instructions
2.1 Preconditions for Chart and Track Monitoring
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

- The best possible sensors for position and speed over ground must be selected.
- By means of a comparison between the available position sensors, a check must be performed to
ensure that the selected position sensor is supplying correct and accurate position data.
- If an ENC vector chart is used, it must be available for the entire navigated area. Otherwise, own
safety lines and danger highlights must be placed by the operator as User Symbols along the
planned route where the vector charts are missing.
- If a raster chart is used, own safety lines and danger highlights for all potentially dangerous areas
and objects must be placed for the entire navigated area.
- The safety contour value must have been set correctly - see following sections.
- The used route must have been successfully checked and reasonable settings for the track limit (i.e.
the monitoring strip for the deviation from route alarm) must have been made for each leg.
- The latest relevant nautical warning information received by radio must be taken into account,
possibly by the editing of own safety lines or danger highlights or by manual ENC update (see main
chapter about Chart Maintenance).
- The check of the used planned route should, if necessary, be repeated after incorporation of the
received warning information.
- The alarm criteria must be correctly set - see the following sections.
In the case of doubt and once per year, the monitor performance must be checked. Please refer to the
main chapter about HW and SW Maintenance.
Page 258 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.2 Settings for Chart Monitoring
Safety Contour
Open the Settings bar and select the Depth Contour
entry (Presentation->Chart->Depth in earlier SW
versions).
Set the safety contour by shifting the safety depth glider
with the cursor to a safe value depending on the actual
draft (see also page 246), i.e. a value of 2.0 to 3.0 m
below keel.
Look-Ahead Sector
Open the Settings bar and select the ECDIS Alerts entry
(Alarms->Own Ship in earlier SW versions).
Set the look-ahead sector to a value which gives enough

time for any measures in case of an alarm, use the
combined setting of time and distance, whatever comes first
will raise the alarm. Activate Show on Chart to see the
sector as a yellow beam.
ECDIS Alerts
Open the Settings bar and select the ECDIS
Alerts entry (Alarms->ECDIS Alerts in earlier SW
versions).
Set the ECDIS alerts to the actual nautical
requirements of the passage, if in doubt activate
all of them.
The first three are part of the chart monitoring as
described on page 262
The next two are part of the track monitoring as
described on page page 263
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 259

printed 14.07.15
2.3 Additional Settings for Track Monitoring
Cross-Track Limit
The cross-track limit is set in the
waypoint list, the default value is XTD Limit in the Planning View of the WP List
1.000 m.
Open the list and enter a value
which is adapted to your naviga-
tion. In open sea a value of 1.000
m might be appropriate. In narrow
waterways a value even as low as
100 to 200 m might be useful
depending on the accuracy of the Ensure that the XTD column is set to
selected position sensor. visible, see ........ Click with MORE
(right-click) into the waypoint line
For each leg of the route an indi- and select Edit Leg. Open the editor
vidual value can be entered. If the and enter the new value under XTD
route is continued with further Limit.
waypoints the last setting is copied
to each new line.
Page 260 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.4 Activate a Route for Monitoring
System Route
Select a route from the route expander (it is marked in
blue), and click to the Activate button 1).
If the route was already open and has just been
checked, it is activated at once, otherwise an auto-
matic check takes place.
In any case the activated route will change its color
from orange to red and will from now on be distributed
to other RADARPILOT Platinum (or workstations) for
system-wide use.
The route is displayed with all warnings (red rings)
inside the safety corridor resulting from last check. If
no corridor has been set, or if the corridor is changed
during monitoring, no warnings will appear.
The activated route is treated as System Route until it
is deactivated again or until another one is activated.
The System Route has the following properties:
- it cannot be deleted from the screen,
- it cannot be modified or reloaded,
- it is used for chart and track monitoring
- it is used for calculation of all data shown in the
Route Monitoring window,
Alternative Routes
Even if you have activated a route, it is possible to
load other routes from your catalogs and to display
them as well as to edit, modify and save them without
interfering with the activated System Route.
All loaded routes can be displayed with their waypoint lists in the lower part of the application area. Each
route has an own tab showing the route name. Clicking on the respective tab of a route brings the
selected waypoint list into the foreground. If another route shall be used as activated route, it must be
loaded and checked beforehand.
Previously used waypoint lists can be switched off from being displayed by clicking on the small cross in
the Route Name tab of the waypoint list. But they still have to be closed with the button in the headline
of the route expander.
Copy a Route
If you want to create a copy of a opened or activated route, use Save As... in order to store it under
another name to the same catalog.
1) As described earlier, the route can also be activated from the buttons in the top line of the WP list, see page 251.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 261

printed 14.07.15
2.5 Chart Monitoring
Warning against Sailing into an Area of Insufficient Depth

When a Safety Contour or
another area with insufficient depth Safety contour
Look ahead sector moves
(less than the set safety contour along with the ship, its direc-
value) is touched by the look ahead Ship's position when the tion is always the same as
sector, e.g. an object belonging to the ship's direction of move-
Crossing Safety Contour
ment (the guard sector can
the object class Land Area, the alarm occurs
be displayed on the screen)
Crossing Safety Contour alarm
appears in the alarm list.
Look ahead sector width, set
The safety contour is formed from in the Alarms > Own Ship
all objects of the object classes menu
Land Area and Inter-tidal Area and
from the objects of the object Ahead Sector Length as set in
Alarms > Own Ship under
classes Depth Area or Dredged Area Distance
whose depths are equal to or the
next size greater than the value
entered as Safety Contour.
For this monitoring, the cells with the highest precision available in the chart database are used. They
might be different from the cells being used for display. It is therefore helpful to use another display
The output of the safety contour alarm can be generally suppressed by means of the Safety Contour
Alarm check box under Alarms > ECDIS Alerts.
Monitoring against Chart Objects

If the look ahead sector touches an ECDIS object such as Restricted Area, Caution Area, Traffic
Separation Zone or Buoys, Beacons, etc., the alarm Area with Special Conditions or Crossing a
Danger appears in the alarm list. These alarms also appear if objects are touched which belong to
particular object classes and are provided with depth information (e.g. Underwater Rocks, Wrecks) and
whose depth is less than the value entered as Safety Contour.
Again the output of these alarms can be generally suppressed by means of the check boxes Special
Area and Obstruction ahead indication.
For the Special Area alert monitoring, the priority in the alarm list can be set to alarm or to indication
level. Indications are announced without activation of the buzzer.
Monitoring against User Symbols

If an Own Safety Line is touched or crossed by the guard sector, the Obstruction Ahead alarm
appears in the alarm list. The alarm appears only if the own safety line is touched from within the safe
area. The own safety line is indicated by a hachured line, where the non safe side of the area behind is
indicated by a series of short small lines.
The same alarm is issued if one of the user-made Symbols (e.g. buoys, beacons, wrecks or other under-
water hazards) is touched by the look-ahead sector.
If an area belonging to the object class Danger Highlight is touched by the look ahead sector, the
alarm Area with Special Conditions appears.
Again the output of these alarms can be generally suppressed by means of the check boxes Obstruction
ahead indication and Special area.
Page 262 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.6 Track Monitoring
Monitoring of the Track

Open the Tools bar and select the Voyage
Monitoring entry (Tools->Routes->Monitoring
in earlier SW versions).
Open the Route Monitor and use the actual track
data to keep the vessel on track.
The monitor is showing the cross track deviation
as well as distance and course to the next wheel
over point and to the next waypoint.
see footnote
Alarm on Deviation from Route
If the deviation of the own ship's position from
the pre-planned track is greater than the Cross-
track alarm limit set in the System Route under
XTD LIM for the current leg, the alarm message
Deviation from Route appears. 1)
Open the Settings bar and select the ECDIS
Alerts entry (Alarms->ECDIS Alerts in earlier SW
versions) to activate the relevant alarm function.
The off-track limit value currently valid for the
actual leg is displayed in the XTD LIM column of
the waypoint list.
see footnote
Alarm on Approaching the next Waypoint
When the remaining traveling time to the next
wheel over point (WOP) becomes less than the
value of the look ahead distance or the time
displayed in the ECDIS Alerts menu (Alarms->
Own Ship in earlier SW versions), the alarm
message Approach to Waypoint appears. 2)
By switching off the function Critical point on
route alarm, the output of this alarm can be
suppressed for this workstation, even if the other
route related alarms are not suppressed.
2) as above
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 263

printed 14.07.15
Route Scheduling Operating Instructions
3 Route Scheduling
The Time Schedule function provides the Calculated Speed for reaching the final waypoint of a route
within a given time frame defined by Departure Time and Arrival Time (also called ETA, estimated
time of arrival).
Alternatively the time frame is calculated for a Planned Speed. The time frame can be defined either
by a given Departure Time or a given Arrival Time. The missing parameter is calculated.
Time Schedule with Planned Time Frame

The default setting for a new route is the actual time used as the Departure Time at WP1. It is shown
in the field ETA/ETD. The default ET Mode is set to Calculated.
For each new waypoint which is added to the route, the arrival time at this waypoint using the default
speed of 25 kn is calculated.
The time frame can be defined by setting the departure time (ETA/ETD field) at WP1 and the arrival time
at the last WP to the required time (again ETA/ETD field). Further-on the ET Mode has to be set to
Departure at WP1 and Arrival at the last WP.
Now the Time Schedule function calculates the required speed considering the maximum speed limit
which can be set for each leg individually.
Time Schedule with Planned Speed

The default setting for a new route is the actual time used as the Departure Time at WP1. The default
ET Mode is set to Calculated.
For each new waypoint which is added to the route, the arrival time at this waypoint using the default
speed of 25 kn is calculated.
The resulting Arrival Time is shown for each waypoint and also for the last WP in the field ETA/ETD
without any further operating steps.
In many cases the default speed of 25 kn has to be adjusted to the individual performance of the vessel
which might be in addition different for each leg of the route.
The general setting for all legs of the route is done in the top line of the WP list, an additional setting
for selected individual legs of the route is done in the corresponding field for calculated speed (calc.
SPD) in the selected data line.
- In both cases the computation is done each time again when you enter a route parameter which is
changing the route distances, the relevant speed values or the ETA/ETD values.
- In both cases the calculated speed for each leg is displayed under calc. SPD in the waypoint list,
and can be used by the operator as the current speed setting during manual speed control. The
calculated speed values are in any case limited to the MAX SPD values which may be defined differ-
ently for each single leg of the entire route.
- Additional to the time and speed data the entire sailing time will be displayed to the right of the
Planned Speed controls or at the bottom of the WP list.
- If you load or reload a route, or a new one has been created, the program will set all calc. SPD
values to the MAX SPD values contained in the route. At the same time a time schedule will be
calculated based on these speed values and the first and last waypoint will contain the implicitly
resulting departure and arrival time.
Page 264 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Route Scheduling
3.1 Enter Time Schedule in WP List
Planned Speed Mode - This mode is the default mode. The two larger screenshots below are showing
the initial settings after having entered a new a route. The ETA times are automatically set to the actual
time, the arrival time in the last ETA field is calculated based on the Planned Speed setting of 8 kn.
ETA Mode - Change to this mode by setting the Mode in the waypoint editor menu at bottom left from
calculated to specify. Enter a new time for the first waypoint and a new arrival time for the last waypoint.
The Speed is automatically updated, here from 8 to 2.6 kn. Refer to the two small screenshots to see
the difference between the two modes.
Click to View and Click to Options and Set Use Cancel to empty the
Planned Speed Mode Select a waypoint, highlighted
Planning to show Planned Speed box, the de-
to open this sub-menu in blue, open the context menu
the Planning part fault speed is applied again
and set a speed. with MORE (right-click) and se-
of the WP List!
lect Edit Waypoint, the way-
point editor as shown at
bottom left is opened. Set from
Calculated to Specify and enter
a departure time, select last
waypoint and repeat for arrival
time!
Total distance and

sailing time Click to View and
Schedule to show
the Schedule part
of the WP List
Automatically updated Speed

field after having entered new
departure and/or arrival times
Fig. VI / 4 Time Schedule on WP List
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 265

printed 14.07.15
3.2 Monitoring the Time Schedule During a Voyage
The Time Schedule Monitor 1) is a visual tool supporting the oper-

ator in the accurate execution of a planned schedule.
The Time Schedule Monitor is based on an orange rectangle
starting at the planned time at waypoint 1 of the activated track and
running along this track with the pre-planned speed. As long as the
own ship symbol is inside the box, it is sailing according to the plan.
The monitor is started as follows:

First activate a route, than check the box Show Schedule Box in
the Options menu of the waypoint list as shown below.
If the activated route has a time
schedule with a departure time for
the first waypoint and arrival times
(ETA) for the subsequent
waypoints a rectangle with an
orange outline will be shown at
departure time enclosing the first
waypoint. The display of the rectangle is independent from the actual position of the ship. The rectangle
will move along the track according to the time schedule. It will arrive at the last waypoint at that time
which has been entered for ETA at the last waypoint. This is again independent from the own ship posi-
tion.
As long as the own ship is sailing on schedule the rectangle will enclose always the own ship symbol.
Both objects, own ship symbol and the rectangle will move along the track matching as long as the
schedule is matched.
If the ship is sailing too slow, it will be caught up by the back of the rectangle, if it is too fast, it will
touch the front line of the rectangle.
By observing the graphical presentation the operator can easily adjust the speed so that the planned
arrival time will be met.
If a route is activated i.e. half an hour later than the departure time the rectangle is placed at the loca-
tion where the ship should be after half an hour of sailing.
If a route is activated earlier, the rectangle will start to move at the planned departure time only.
The length of the rectangle is equivalent to the distance which the own ship can sail in two minutes. The
width is identical with the safety corridor of the route which has been set during the editing phase. It is
typically a value between 0.5 and 3 NM.
At the same time the actual deviation from schedule is displayed in the headline of the waypoint list.
In the example shown below the arrival waypoint is Las Palmas Pilot, this is WP (15), and the distance
is 1692.5 NM with an ETA of 19th Aug 2013 02:30 with 10.8 kn. The actual delay is two days and 8:30
hours.
1) The Time Schedule Monitor is available in later versions of SW 1.x and all 2.x versions
Page 266 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Route Scheduling
Actual Delay
Actual Delay
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 267

printed 14.07.15
3.3 Automatic Rescheduling of a Voyage
The Time Schedule Monitor function as described in the previous chapter can be combined per config-
uration setting with an automatic rescheduling function. This automatic function has to be activated
during system commissioning by a service engineer (latest SW version).
If available it initiates an automatic re-scheduling whenever the ship is caught up by the monitoring rect-
angle. The rescheduling will change the speed settings for the upcoming legs either slowing down or
speeding up but taking into account any speed limitations and the maximum speed of the ship.
Page 268 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Route Export and Import (Back Up and Printout)
4 Route Export and Import (Back Up and Printout)
Routes can be exported from the RADARPILOT Platinum system by three different ways:
• The complete set of routes which are stored on the
RADARPILOT Platinum system can be stored on an USB
memory stick for later back up purpose. The export can be
carried out from any workstation on-board. All worksta-
tions are using the same data base.
• Selected routes and directories can be exported from

RADARPILOT Platinum system to an USB memory stick in
order to process them on third party systems. The routes
are exported with a basic data format describing just
waypoints and legs but sufficient to be used directly for
track control.
• The passage plan for a selected route can be printed out

on paper or into an XPS file.
Routes can be imported into the RADARPILOT Platinum system by two different ways:
• The complete set of routes which have been backed up
earlier can be loaded again into the RADARPILOT Platinum
system in order to restore the route data base. Each route
is loaded with its full data set with all RADARPILOT Plat-
inum specific data. It is important to note, that all routes
which are on the system already, are overwritten by this
procedure. The back-up can originate from your current
workstation, from any other workstation on your ship, or
from any other ship with a RADARPILOT Platinum system.
• Selected routes and directories can be imported into the
RADARPILOT Platinum system in order to add routes
which have been generated on third party systems. The
routes are loaded with a basic data format describing just
waypoints and legs but sufficient to be used directly for
track control. Those routes which are on the RADARPILOT
Platinum system already, are not overwritten by this
procedure.
The different ways are described in detail on the following pages.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 269

printed 14.07.15
Route Export and Import (Back Up and Printout) Operating Instructions
4.1 Backup of Routes
User-defined Routes can be saved on USB memory stick. This is important for backup i.e. if a display
electronics unit has been exchanged and all routes shall be restored.
Further-on the routes can be distributed to other ships fitted with Platinum systems as well.
1. Navigate to the Super Home menu and click
on Maintenance > Nautical Charts.
2. As a result, the world chart together with a
main selection sidebar and a protocol
window appear.
☞ If the chart maintenance is started for the first
time after power-on, the database will be checked
automatically. This will take some minutes but is
not indicated, please just wait. Any errors will be
displayed in the protocol window underneath the
world map.
3. In the Tool bar chose to Backup/Restore

Routes. In earlier SW versions operating is
similar with the expander.
4. In the Function group, select Backup

Routes.
5. Under Backup to choose the device which is
to be used as backup media, typically an USB
memory stick which has to be inserted
before.
6. Click to Browse to open a window in which the archive directory and/or path can be selected.
Existing routes in this archive directory will be overwritten. A warning is given before.
-or-
7. If a new archive directory is to be added, check New Archive and enter the desired directory
name.
8. Click on Start: Backup Routes.
☞ The backup may take some minutes depending on the number of routes.
When the backup is completed a corresponding message is

shown.
In an integrated system with several MFDs (workstations)
connected to each other by the network, each MFD has
stored the same route data. Backup is only required from
one of these MFDs. Restoring is overwriting the route data
of all MFDs (workstations).
Page 270 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.2 Restoring of Routes
User-defined Routes can be restored from USB memory stick. This is important if i.e. a display elec-
tronics unit has been exchanged and the route directory shall be built up again with exactly the contents.
Further-on the routes can be distributed to other ships fitted with Platinum systems as well.
☞ The restore step will always overwrite all existing routes on your system. After any restore activity
your display electronics shows exactly a one-to-one copy of the contents on your USB memory stick.
☞ If sets of routes from different sources shall be combined, they have to be merged first on the USB
device and afterwards the complete set of routes can be copied to your workstation. Routes from
former NACOS systems XX-4 and XX-5 with Radar 1000 and 1100 can be imported as well.
1. Navigate to the Super Home menu and click

on Maintenance > Nautical Charts.
2. As a result, the world chart together with a
main selection sidebar and a protocol
window appear.
☞ If the chart maintenance is started for the first
time after power-on, the database will be checked
automatically. This will take some minutes but is
not indicated, please just wait. Any errors will be
displayed in the protocol window underneath the
world map.
3. In the Tool bar chose to Backup/Restore

Routes. In earlier SW versions operating is
similar with the expander.
4. In the Function group, select Restore

Routes.
5. Under Selected Path: choose the device
which is to be used as restore media.
6. Click to Browse to open a window in which
the archive directory and/or path can be selected.
7. Click on Start: Restore Routes.
☞ The restoring procedure may take some minutes depending on the number of routes.
When the restoring is completed a corresponding message is shown.

In an integrated system with several MFDs (workstations) connected to each other by the network, each
MFD has stored the same route data. Restoring is only required to one of these MFDs. Restoring is over-
writing the route data of all MFDs (workstations).
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 271

printed 14.07.15
4.3 Exporting Routes to Third Party System
Later SW versions (starting with 1.0.14) of the NACOS Platinum system come along with a route data
export function. It is achieved by exporting selected routes in XML file format or a whole directory to an
USB memory USB stick.
1. Insert an USB memory stick to the display elec-

tronics.
2. Select a route catalog.
3. Select with DO (left mouse click) the route to be
exported, here Amsterdam-Hamburg.
4. Select further routes by pressing CTRL and
clicking at the same time with DO to further
route file entries.
5. With the More key (right mouse key) open the
context menu and select the entry Export
Route.
6. The selected routes are exported as XML file
containing the most important route data.
7. Alternatively select a route directory in the left column.
8. With the More key (right mouse key) open the context menu and select the entry Export Route.
The routes are stored in the directory "RouteExchange" on the USB memory stick. If not existing, it is
automatically generated. A typical route data format is shown in the following example:
The Header data block introduces each route data file:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>
<RouteModel
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema"
xmlns="http://www.sam-electronics.de/2010/reducedRouteModel.xsd">
<Name xmlns="">Rostock Seekanal</Name>
The Waypoint data block is repeated for each waypoint:

<Waypoints xmlns="">
<Name>Pagenwerder</Name>
<Latitude>0.94538441945694</Latitude> (=54°09.992’ N)
<Longitude>0.21119316376426958</Longitude> (=012°06.029’ E)
<Notes>Keep STB</Notes>
<SailMode>1</SailMode> (=RL or rhumb line)
<Radius>1852</Radius> (=1 NM)
</Waypoints>
Page 272 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.4 Importing Routes from Third Party System (also NACOS xx-4 or -5)
Route data import is achieved by loading selected routes in XML or text file format from an USB memory
stick into the RADARPILOT Platinum system.
1. Insert an USB memory stick to the

Platinum display electronics and open
the Explorer Menu under Tools ->
Routes.
2. Select the route catalog where the
imported routes shall be stored.
3. Click with More key (right mouse key)
into the left Route Explorer window to
open the context menu and select the
entry Import Routes.
☞ This entry is only selectable, if a
RouteExchange directory is on
your USB stick. 1)
4. A sub-menu for Select Routes for

import into the Ships Database is
opened. It shows the available catalogs
(directories) under RouteExchange.
5. Select one of the catalogs, here Baltic Sea, and all routes in this catalog are shown and highlighted.
Just press the Import button to transfer all these routes.
6. Otherwise click to the desired routes one by one to delete the default selection and select those of
interest, then press the Import button.
1) The routes on your USB stick have to be kept in a top level directory named RouteExchange. This directory has
to be structured in further sub-directories (named e.g. Baltic Sea, North Sea) where the routes are stored. The
RouteExchange directory can be created on the Chartpilot of a NACOS xx-4 or -5 system during the route export
procedure, use Edit New Folder and Apply, or automatically on a Platinum system by exporting any route to
your USB stick, or finally also on any host PC with a Windows explorer. The necessary sub-directories are gener-
ated automatically by a NACOS XX-4 or -5 system.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 273

printed 14.07.15
4.5 Printing out a Passage Plan
The waypoint list provides a

function to print out the actually
presented route as a passage
plan. An example is shown to the
left.
The print-out can be directed either to a network printer

connected to the RADARPILOT Platinum, to an XPS-file
which is stored on a default directory on the RADARPILOT
Platinum, to an external device such as an USB stick, or to
a fax address.
WP List
The version with the variable WP list is combined
with a variable passage plan. Click to Route->
Set-up Passage Plan to arrange the print-out as
shown below.
Afterwards click to Route->Print Passage Plan
and choose one of the options. For each option a
corresponding sub-menu is opened for the selec-
tion of the directory or fax address.
Customize Variable Passage

Plan
The columns of the plan can be
arranged individually before print-
out. Select A4 or US letter paper
and portrait or landscape format.
Drag the columns as required, right
click on a column to add or remove
them, or use the Add button to add
another parameter to the right. In
the last position the actually avail-
able space on the paper is shown in
percent.
Page 274 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Further Information for Route Planning
5 Further Information for Route Planning
The following sub-chapters are describing further special functions for route planning which are not
initially required during first editing and first application of the route monitoring function:
- Overview of route parameters
- Parameter points
- Predefined radius
- Setting the safety corridor
- Repetition of alarms
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 275

printed 14.07.15
Further Information for Route Planning Operating Instructions
5.1 Overview of Route Parameters
Waypoint Parameters
1 No. Waypoint sequence number, starting with 1, automatically increased
2 Name Enter a name for this waypoint to identify it during the voyage, i.e. lands end
3 LAT Latitude of this waypoint (in WGS-84), automatically set by shifting the waypoint
4 LON Longitude of this waypoint (in WGS-84), automatically set by shifting the waypoint
5 RAD Radius in NM of the planned turn at this waypoint, default 1 NM, set as required
6 ETA/ETD Estimated Time of Arrival or Departure for this waypoint, set as required
7 ET Mode Select Calculated, Arrival, or Departure as method for calculating ETA/ETD
8 PP Set to PP if no course change shall take place at this waypoint 1)
9 Notes Enter hints, cautions, warnings which are displayed during the voyage at this waypoint
1)
Parameter Points are points where only additional parameters like speed, notes etc. are changing. See page
277 for details.
Leg Parameters
10 From - To The two waypoints enfolding this track segment or leg, automatically inserted
11 DIST Length of the leg in NM including length of any curved track line, calculated
12 BRG Bearing of the leg, also course over ground to be steered on this leg, calculated
13 calc. SPD Calculated speed for a leg, in ETA mode autom. updated, for manual speed setting
14 MAX SPD Maximum speed set by the operator as an upper limit for the calculated speed
15 CRS LIM Course limit valid on this leg (option not used here)
16 XTD LIM Alarm limit for deviation from planned route, used for ECDIS monitoring
17 Sail Select sailing mode RL or GC on this leg (default is rhumb line with constant course)
18 ECON Rudder economy on this leg (not used, option in combination with Trackpilot)
Table VI / 1 Overview of Route Parameters
Page 276 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
5.2 Parameter Points
Select the leg of the route displayed on the screen and by a click with MORE open the Route context
menu in the application area. A click on Insert a Waypoint Here first inserts a normal waypoint in the
middle of the leg.
Select the new inserted waypoint in the list (check the waypoint number) and activate the PP (Parameter
Point) check box. This waypoint will now be displayed with a small square symbol.
With the graphical cursor on this symbol and pressing down the DO key you can now move the param-
eter point along the preplanned track line. Releasing the DO key will fix the Parameter Point's position
on the leg.
- Do not shift the parameter point into the curved part of the displayed route.
Repeat the above procedure in order to add more parameter points on a leg.
- Do not shift a new parameter point across already available parameter points.
Note:
The insertion of parameter points on a leg does not create any course change at these points.
With other words, a parameter point is not part of the course change alarm management (No Waypoint
Approach and no Wheel Over Point alarms).
But by use of parameter points you can easily add changes of route parameters like
- Off Course Limit (CRS LIM) and Off Track Limit (XTD LIM)
- Sailing Mode (Sail Mode)
- Rudder Economy (ECON)
- Planned Speed (MAX SPD)
on different parts of a leg.
Changing the planned speed on a leg is done by changing the MAX SPD value, which then also changes
the Calc. SPD value in the Route List.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 277

printed 14.07.15
5.3 Predefined Radius
- Already during editing of the route, it is advisable to check and adjust the radius for the first
waypoint. The default value is 1.00 NM. This radius will be copied to all other added waypoints until
you set another radius. In this way it can be verified "on-line" during editing if geometric constraints
(matching of length of the legs, radius, and amount of course change) are violated.
- It is recommended first to use an initial radius for sailing with nominal speed which could later be
adjusted for your needs and depending on the results of the verification of the route on the chart
display. The initial radius should create a rate of turn far below the maximum rate of turn you would
normally accept for your ship under the planned loading conditions.
- The predicted steady state turn-rate at a waypoint caused by the planned radius can easily be esti-
mated by the calculation:
ROT [°/min] ~ sailing speed [kn] / radius [NM]
Speed Radius ROT

[estimated]
25 kn 1.00 NM ~ 25 °/min
25 kn 0.50 NM ~ 50 °/min
12 kn 1.00 NM ~ 12 °/min
10 kn 0.10 NM ~ 100 °/min
Be sure not to plan too small radius values at high speed which might guide your
helmsmen to apply too high and possibly dangerous turn-rates on your ship.
Page 278 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
5.4 Setting the Safety Corridor
The pre-planned route can roughly be checked during editing already if an appropriate Safety Corridor
is selected under Settings > Route. The displayed corridor around the route helps to support the oper-
ator during creation of the route when the display area covers the sea area of the route or of parts of it.
At any time during editing the width of the safety corridor can be adjusted for the visible part of the
route. In any case it is then valid for the complete route.
If you use a new route for the first time it could be sufficient to define a general minimum passing
distance (for instance 250 m or another safe value) in order to be on the safe side when the program
checks the route for the first time.
Details, like adapting the radius, the track limit and other values could be adjusted following the
messages about violations after the route checking function has been executed.
5.5 Repetition of Alarms
An alarm is only repeated if an object belonging to a different object class is

touched or if the same object class is touched within a smaller distance or time.
If, for example, the ship is sailing along a line of buoys and is too close to them, the alarm Crossing a
Danger appears only for the first buoy, but it can be acknowledged and remains in the alarm list until
this type of violation is no longer found within the guard sector. Thereafter a new violation can activate
the same alarm again.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 279

printed 14.07.15
Page 280 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
ANCHOR MONITORING
RADARPILOT Platinum ANCHOR MONITORING
Operating Instructions Setting the Anchor Watch Sector
1 Setting the Anchor Watch Sector
1.1 Overview
Later versions of the ECDISPILOT are offering an

optional function for anchor monitoring.
In this case the tab expander is showing under Tools
one more menu card named Anchor.
This monitoring function is based on an anchor watch
sector, which is set at the position where the anchor
is dropped.
As soon as the anchor chain has been brought out by
drifting or maneuvering backwards, the number of
used shackles and the water depth are entered into
the monitoring menu.
At the same time the own ship should be displayed

fully inside the anchor watch sector and you can set a
drift speed limit and activate the watch area.
Now if the speed of your vessel exceeds the set

speed limit (typically 1 or 2 kn), or if your vessel is
moving a certain distance from the anchor position
(calculated from number of shackles and water
depth), or if your vessel touches the contour of the
sector, a corresponding alarm is raised.
In addition if the vessel finally is leaving the anchor

watch sector, a further alarm is raised. 1)
The detailed operating steps are described in the

subsequent chapters.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 283

printed 14.07.15
ANCHOR MONITORING RADARPILOT Platinum
Setting the Anchor Watch Sector Operating Instructions
1.2 Set the Anchor Position
The anchor watch sector is placed with its end at the

position where the anchor will be dropped or has been
dropped. The center line follows the ships heading.
The anchor position can be set as follows:
1. By clicking to the button At Current Position
2. By clicking to the button At New Position
3. By placing a User Symbol at a planned position
4. By Shifting the anchor watch sector
These four options are described further below:
At Current Position
The end of the watch sector is set to the position of

the PRT or STB anchor hawse pipe depending on the
setting made under Used Anchor (see red arrow in
above screenshot). 1) The end of the watch sector is
marked with an user symbol for anchorage area. If
you move the cursor to this symbol a tool-tip is
opened showing the length and direction of the watch
sector. If the anchor is shifted in between, just click to
the AT Current Position button again.
At New Position
Click to the button At New Position and enter the
planned anchorage position into the menu shown at
the right.
At User Symbol
Place a User Symbol for anchorage area (see ECDIS
functions, any of the different anchorage area symbols
can be used), or just use an anchorage area symbol
which is still in place from your last anchoring
maneuver, click to this symbol to mark it, open the
context menu with MORE (right-click) anywhere in the Anchor Watch
chart and click to Select for Anchor Watch. Symbol
Shifting the Anchor Watch Area

Just click to the area until the end of the sector is
marked with a small handle, click and hold, and shift
the end of the sector to the planned anchor position.
1)
The location of the anchor hawse pipe has been entered by a service engineer during system commissioning into the
ships configuration. If no entry has been made, the end of the anchor watch sector falls into the conning position, and
you may shift it to the desired location manually.
Page 284 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Setting the Anchor Watch Sector
1.3 Perform the Anchoring maneuver
Enter Chain Length and Water Depth

During the anchoring maneuver the anchor is dropped
out and the vessel is moving slowly backwards into the
anchor watch area.
During the maneuver the distance and bearing indica-
tions on the top right position of the menu are
displaying the actual values for distance and bearing
to the anchor position (distance is starting with 0
when anchor dropping is initiated).
As soon as the anchor is home, the number of
shackles and the actual depth should be entered (here
9.5 shackles and 21 m).
If in doubt about the shackle length just move with
the cursor to the word Shackles in the menu. A small
tool-tip opens showing the configured length in
meters. 1)
The depth can be set also automatically if a depth
value is available from a connected echo-sounder. In
this case the Take auto. Depth button is highlighted
and not shaded in gray. Just click to the button and
the actual depth is used for monitoring. If the depth
changes afterwards, just click to the button again to
take the actual value again
The length of the anchor watch sector is then adjusted
automatically according to the length of the chain and
the water depth.
Adjust Angle Size of Sector

Depending on wind and tidal current forecast the
angle size of the sector may be adjusted as well.
Click to one of the sector contour lines to mark them.
Then click and hold to one of the small handles. Move
the cursor to adjust the angle size. Any asymmetric
setting can be chosen.
1)
The length of one shackle is a configuration value which has been set during the commission by a service engi-
neer.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 285

printed 14.07.15
Anchor Monitoring Operating Instructions
2 Anchor Monitoring
2.1 Activate and Deactivate Anchor Monitoring
Activate Area
Once the own ship is fully inside the anchor watch
sector, the semi-transparent orange background color
of the sector changes slightly to more intensity.
Insert a speed limit for drift control.
If no speed limit alarm is required, just leave it at zero
speed (0 = speed alarm OFF).
Now the anchor monitoring function can be activated.
Just click to Activate Area, the monitoring function is
started and all input fields are blocked.
The semi-transparent background color changes again
to more intensity and to a more red color.
Change the Area

If during monitoring the size or angle of the sector has
to be changed, click to the Deactivate button, apply
the changes and click again to activate the area.
Page 286 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Anchor Monitoring
2.2 Delete the Monitoring Sector
When the anchor is heaved up again, the monitoring

sector can be deleted.
First deactivate the area if not already done, then click

to the button Delete.
A message window opens. If you would like to delete

the anchor watch area only, but keep the user symbol
for the position for your possible next anchoring
maneuver, then select the first option.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 287

printed 14.07.15
Anchor Monitoring Operating Instructions
2.3 Alarms During Anchor Monitoring
As already listed in the introduction, there are four alarm conditions associated with anchor monitoring.
They are listed in the screenshot to the right 1):
1. The speed of your vessel exceeds the set

speed limit
2. The vessel is exiting the anchor watch area,
which means is touching the contour of the
sector at one of the sides or at the back
3. The anchor is dragging, which means the
vessel is touching the contour of the sector at
the back 2)
4. The vessel is out of the anchor watch area see footnote
1)
The alarm symbol may be slightly different, other versions could have red triangle with figure 1
2) The sector length is used to monitor dragging of the anchor. The length is calculated by applying the Pythagoras
theorem. One side of the triangle is the straight length of the chain and the other one is the water depth. The
curve of the chain (the catenary), which is a hyperbolic cosine function is approximated here by a straight line.
So the alarm will appear a little bit later providing a small safety margin against false alarms.
Page 288 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
DATA MAINTENANCE
RADARPILOT Platinum DATA MAINTENANCE
1 Overview
This volume describes the chart and route maintenance related functions of the RADARPILOT Platinum.
It is applicable to all SW versions. Most screenshots have been taken from SW 2.x but they are applicable
to 1.x as well, the main difference is the selection of functions from the toolbar and not from tab
expander.
Navigate to the Super Home menu and click on Maintenance > Nautical Charts or Data Base.
As a result, the world chart together with a main selection sidebar and a protocol window appear.
The main selection sidebar provides access to the electronic charts (i.e. ENC, ARCS, C-map), and to the
back-up and store routines for routes and user symbols. These are described in the subsequent chapters.
If the maintenance is started for the first time after power-on, the database will be checked automati-
cally. This will take some minutes but is not indicated, please just wait. Any errors will be displayed in
the protocol window underneath the world map.
Main Selection Graphic View of World Chart
Protocol Window Screenshot shows earlier SW version with tabs, later

versions are slightly different in the left sidebar
Fig. VIII / 1 Maintenance Entry Page
Background operation
To use the RADARPILOT Platinum for other purposes while prolonged maintenance sequences are
running automatically, just navigate to the main menu and choose the appropriate application. As soon
as the maintenance program running in the background needs an operator action, a message is shown.
Any workstation in the system can be used for maintenance, but it is recommended to use always the
same one, i.e. the planning station.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 291

printed 14.07.15
DATA MAINTENANCE RADARPILOT Platinum
Overview Operating Instructions
1.1 Chart Maintenance Application Area
After having selected a mode and a func-

tion, and depending on this action two Select mode
subareas are opened in the application area here
as shown below.
The bottom information area provides a
protocol window. Several protocols can be
opened at the same time, but only the
protocol selected in the top expander row is Open toolbar
displayed at one time. here ( in
earlier SW
The action area on the right side provides versions
lists of cells or permits. Again several lists select a func-
tion from the
can be opened at the same time, but only tab
the list selected in the top expander row is expander)
displayed at one time. Buttons are available
for sorting, deleting, or updating list
elements. Click to the column header of the
appropriate detail to sort the list in
ascending/descending sequence.
Pan and
Zoom Control
Action
area:
List of
cells/
permits to
be deleted
Information
area:
Protocol and/
or actual list
of cells/
permits
Page 292 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.2 Display Expander
The display expander is used to set up the Click here to open the
graphic view of the world chart as shown in toolbar
chapter 1.1. Alarm
indica-
In addition it provides an overview of the tions
number of installed cells for different naviga-
tional purposes (coastal, harbour etc.) and
the total numer of cells.
For access to the Display Expander open the
toolbar and select Display (in earlier SW
versions select Display from the tab
expander).
If an alarm indicator, a small triangle, is
displayed in front of one of the navigational
areas, an error has been found at least in
one cell of this category.
Select one or more navigational areas by The above menu shows the purposes for
checking the small box in each line and ENC cells, for ARCS and C-Map Profes-
sional the menu is slightly different
restrict the display to those cells which are of
interest.
Detailed information is available by selecting Display -> Functions -> Show Installed Charts (See
chapter 1.7).
Coloring by
The cells displayed in the graphic view are shown with a colored frame.
Depending on the settings in coloring by (see red arrow in above screen shot),
the cell status or the licensing status is determining the frame color.
Cell Status
Red An error has occurred while the data have been checked
Green Chart is okay
Source of Licensing (not ARCS)

Dark Green IHO ENC license
Blue C-Map ENC license
Yellow ENC cells not requiring a license (i.e. US coast from NOAA)
Red Error
Hint: ARCS charts do not have the coloring by license function!
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 293

printed 14.07.15
Maintenance of IHO ENC and ARCS Charts Operating Instructions
2 Maintenance of IHO ENC and ARCS Charts
The electronic charts for your RADARPILOT Platinum are stored separately on each RADARPILOT Plat-
inum. They have to be updated in regular intervals.
After initial installation from the base media (from CD/DVD, USB stick, or portable USB drive) the charts
are updated typically in a weekly schedule from the update media. During the update process the already
installed charts are checked and it might be necessary to insert the base media again if requested by
the update application during the update process
The update can be carried out by using again update media like CD/DVD, USB stick, or portable USB
drive. The procedures will take some time, because the chart cells are processed on the RADARPILOT
Platinum, in case of ENC they are also decrypted and converted into an internal file format. This improves
the chart presentation speed during later ECDIS operation. Some points have to be considered when
carrying out maintenance:
1. The initial installation can take several hours. Even an update may require a considerable length of
time. Therefore, perform this task in good time before the start of the voyage.
2. The chart maintenance work must be carried out so that the databases of all RADARPILOT Platinum
always have the same status. This is ensured if the notes given here are observed and the
sequences described are followed.
3. An easily determined indication of unequal states of the databases of the RADARPILOT Platinums is
when the number of cells/ charts displayed for one RADARPILOT Platinum is different from the
others.
4. An update of an installation can only be performed if the corresponding base installation has been
installed before. Update CD/DVD, which are issued typically each week or sometimes every few
weeks, are cumulative. They contain all previous updates starting from the latest issued base CD.
Today the version date of the corresponding base CD is often written on each update CD.
5. If any errors are occuring during operation or update which can not be solved by deleting single
cells, it is recommended to remove the database completely. The corresponding function is available
in the mode Maintenance as Remove complete ENC database. The new installation will take several
hours and the ship should stay in harbour for a longer time!
6. In addition to the IHO ENC which has been described above, it is alternatively possible to install the
C-Map ENC. The database on your RADARPILOT Platinum system for IHO ENC cells and C-Map ENC
cells is one and the same. Please refer to page 306.
-> If an installation shall be changed from C-Map ENC to IHO ENC or vice versa it is strongly recom-
mended to remove the data base completely on all workstations (MFDs) one by one with the corre-
sponding maintenance function Remove complete ENC database (see also page 313) 1).
1) Has to be carried out for each workstation separately.
Page 294 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Maintenance of IHO ENC and ARCS Charts
2.1 Permits and Certificates
Permits
The ENC cells and ARCS charts are protected against unauthorized use by permits. The permits are indi-
vidual for each vessel. They are supplied by the chart distributor in a permit file called PERMIT.TXT (in
case of ENC) or GB.LCN and GB.NCP (in case of ARCS). These files have to be stored on the
RADARPILOT Platinum system together with the cells or charts by the user.
SAM Electronics as the manufacturer of ECDIS equipment is generating an individual user identification
(UID) per vessel. This UID is hidden and stored in the Platinum dongle, which comes along with each
MFD (workstation). The hidden UID is used by SAM Electronics to create a public User Permit which
allows the customer to request a Permit File from the chart distributor. Once the license has been
bought, the Permit File is sent to the customer.
Typically the Permit File is received via email from the chart supplier and has to be stored on an USB
stick for further use at the ECDISPILOT workstations. The cells or charts are typically delivered on CD/
DVD or USB stick.
Certificates (only IHO ENC)

The chart cells are further-on signed to provide assurance that chart data are from approved source and
are not manipulated. The signature will be checked during the installation of the chart cells and will fail,
if anybody has changed the data contents of the cells which come along on CD, DVD, USB stick, or via
Ethernet.
The signature of the chart cells is checked against the IHO certificate. This certificate can be downloaded
from the IHO website (IHO.CRT). This certificate must be installed on your RADARPILOT Platinum.
Until the end of the year 2013 the main chart distributors deliver a private certificate on each IHO ENC
media, those chart cells are checked against this private certificate. If a chart distributor is using a private
certificate and do not deliver this certificate on the IHO ENC media, it is possible to install such a private
certificate on the RADARPILOT Platinum too.
During installation of cells the RADARPILOT Platinum will check the cells against the certificate as follows:
1. Check against IHO certificate (IHO.CRT). If the IHO certificate is already stored on your computer,
the check will be carried out against this certificate.*
2. If the above check fails, a second check against any distributor certificates (XYZ.CRT) on your
RADARPILOT Platinum will be carried out.
3. If no certificate is installed or is valid, the search will be extended to the actual IHO ENC media.
4. If no valid certificate can be found, the installation process is stopped.
*Hint: The check 1) against IHO certificate will fail, if cells protected by a private certificate from the
individual distributors are installed (all cells until the year 2013). After this check a warning with the iden-
tification SSE26 is given. This warning is repeated for each CD or DVD again and can be ignored at this
time.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 295

printed 14.07.15
2.2 Installation of IHO ENC and ARCS Permits
Insert your media with the permit.txt file (in case of ENC) or the corresponding ARCS permit file, typically
it is an USB stick or a portable USB drive. This file will contain one permit for each chart cell, typically
some hundred permits. You may have different permits for charts or cells from different chart suppliers
on your system.
Open the Functions menu from the toolbar.
Check Chart Database, set to IHO ENC or ARCS.

Select Mode, the default is Display, set to Update.
Once the Mode has been set to Update the Functions

menu is modified with subgroups for Source and Desti-
nation as shown in the next screenshot.
Select the Functions, the default setting is Choose
Function, set to Install and Update Permit Data-
base.
Select the Source for the permits update. It could be
either a removable USB Stick, or USB drive. In the
example here a removable stick has been selected. If the
media has a label, it is shown here.
Check the Selected Path. The RADARPILOT Platinum
will display any permit files laying on top of the directory
automatically. If nothing is found, open Browse to
search manually for the subdirectory with the permit file.
Ensure that you select the one which belongs to the rele-
vant permits. Finally click to Select "Data Set".
The Destinations entry is set per default to the present workstation (this one), where the update is
carried out. No other selection is possible and required.
Press Start to activate the update if it is not started automatically.
A protocol of the update is shown in the bottom of the main application area.
Finally the USB stick can be removed without any further steps!
Hint for ENC and ARCS: Expired permits are not deleted automatically. They remain and have to be
deleted manually.
The reason is i.e. in case of ENC that they can be used to install old cells even if they have been expired
and new permits have not been received yet (issue date of cell is older than expiry date of permit). An
expired permit does not allow the installation of a new cell.
Page 296 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.3 Installation of Certificates (only for IHO ENC)
Licensed IHO ENC cells are protected by a public key according to the S-63 standard from IHO. This
public key is part of a certificate. Until the end of the year 2013 the main chart distributors delivered
chart cells protected by a private certificate on each IHO ENC media.
With the transition to the new IHO S-63 1.1 specification, distributors of official IHO ENC data will change
over to the IHO certificate step by step. The certificate is no longer delivered together with the licensed
cells. To obtain this new certificate it is recommended to visit the IHO website and download the file
"New IHO Certificate Expires 2033". It might be also available from your chart distributor.
The Installation Procedure is as follows:
Insert your media with the IHO.CRT file, typically an USB
stick. Open the Functions menu from toolbar.
Check Chart Database, set to IHO ENC.
Select Mode, the default is Display, set to Update.
Once the Mode has been set to Update the Functions
menu is modified with subgroups for Source and Loca-
tion as shown to the right. Select Functions, the
default setting is Choose Function, set to Install
Certificate.
Select the Source for the certificate. In the example a
removable stick with the label "GEMISCHT" has been
selected. If the media has a label, it is shown here.
will display any certificate laying on top of the directory.
If nothing is found, open Browse to
search manually for the subdirectory with
the IHO.CRT file. Ensure that you select
the IHO.CRT file. Finally click to Select
"Data Set".
The Location entry is fixed to your MFD.
Press Start to activate the update. A
confirmation request is shown. Compare
the public key of the certificate shown in
the protocol window at the bottom with
the information in IHO publications if
available. Confirm the installation. The
message window for successful update is
shown.
Now the USB stick can be removed
without any further steps!
If during the IHO ENC update the certifi-
cate can not be found, the message SSE
05 is shown. In this case carry out the
procedure as described above. Private
certificates stored on your MFD can be
deleted. The IHO certificate can not be
deleted. It can be overwritten by a more recent IHO certificate.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 297

printed 14.07.15
2.4 Update of Charts from Media or from another Workstation (MFD)
Insert your latest update media, either CD/DVD, or USB stick, or portable USB drive. It may be either a
base update (all chart cells) or a weekly update (a few chart cells only).
Set Chart database to IHO ENC or ARCS (or other)
depending on the charts which you want to update.
Select Mode, the default setting is Display, set to
Update. Once the mode has been set to Update the
Functions menu is modified with subgroups for
Source and Destinations as shown in the next
screenshot (see red arrows).
Select the Functions, the default setting is Choose
Function, set to Update IHO ENC Database or to
Update ARCS Database.
Select the Source for the update. It could be either a
CD/DVD, a removable USB Stick, or USB drive. In the
example here a CD ROM has been selected. If the
media has a label, it is shown, here it is V01X01.
will display any chart data laying on top of the directory
automatically. If nothing is found, open Browse to
search manually for the subdirectory. For IHO ENC the
directory name is ENC_ROOT, for ARCS there are three
directories named CHARTCAT, MISC, and RASCHTS.
Another workstation (MFD) may be selected as a source as well, but only, if on that work-
station the update has already been performed by applying the latest update media.
The Destinations entry is set per default to the present workstation (this one), where the update is
carried out. No other selection is possible and required.
Press Start to activate the update if it is not started automatically.
A protocol of the update is shown in the bottom of the main application area. Message windows as
described on the next page will appear in the overview chart to inform about the progress and any obsta-
cles.
During the update you might be asked to insert one after the other the base media (i.e. ARCS RC 1 to
RC 11), insert media of interest, and after that the update media will be requested again. Just follow the
instructions given on the screen.
Some of the above steps like selecting the Update Mode will be started automatically if an appropriate
update CD/DVD is inserted. Just follow the instructions on the screen.
After the update those cells which have been marked as cancelled by the update medium or where a
permit is missing are presented for manual deletion, refer to page 301.
Page 298 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.5 Messages during Chart Update
IHO ENC or ARCS (or other) Data Exchange Set found

If a media is inserted and a function has not yet been selected or if
a data exchange set is found which is not known to the system, the
Chart Update Wizard appears. It informs the user that chart data
are available on the media. Select either Show Contents or Update
and the procedure is continued as before.
Base Media are Needed

If the weekly update comprises information
for cells, which can not be found on your PC
(wrong edition, not installed, etc.) the base
media for those countries, which are listed
in the bottom of the protocol window have
to be inserted. In case of ARCS you are
asked to insert one of the base media CD
(RC1 to RC11).
Insert Next Base Media

During the update process for the base
media this message will appear if another
base media (CD or other) with the
remaining base cells has to be inserted.
Update Cells can not be

Installed
If an update media is inserted and
base cells are still missing or have
not been updated to the previous
update, a warning is given. Load
the corresponding base cells.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 299

printed 14.07.15
2.6 Display Contents of Your own MFD or another MFD (workstation)
Insert your media, either CD ROM or USB stick or portable USB drive as shown under Update of Charts
from Media.
Verify that Chart database is set to the correct chart
type, IHO ENC or ARCS (or other).
Verify that Mode is set to its default setting (Display),
just leave it to Display.
Select Functions, the default setting is Choose Func-
tion, set to one of the shown options.
Select Apply on to choose the own MFD (workstation) or
another connected MFD.
Click on Start to confirm the settings and open the list of
cells, or permits, or certificates. At the same time the
related cells are shown as green 1) squares in the world
chart.
If an MFD (your own or other) has been selected before,
the installed cells, permits, or certificates will be shown in
a new tab of the protocol window in the list. This list is
not available for CD drive or USB stick.
Select a single cell here, it will

be highlighted blue and it will
be marked in the world
diagram as well
1) Colouring depends on cell status or source of licensing as selected in the Display menu, see page 293.
Page 300 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.7 Maintenance of Charts on your Workstation

Verify that Chart Database is set to the correct chart
type, IHO ENC or ARCS.(or other)
Set Mode, to Maintenance.
tion, set to one of the shown options.
Location is set per default to the drive of your workstation
(MFD). It can not be changed. Maintenance can only be
performed for this workstation
Click Start to activate the maintenance

procedure. Depending on your selection
the cells, permits, or certificates are
listed on the right top side of the screen
and can be deleted individually.
For sorting by name or status click to
the corresponding field in the header
row.
It is recommended to delete all those
cells, permits, and certificates which
have been expired, or cancelled or are
no longer valid.
Select the cells which shall be deleted,

and click to Continue. A warning will
appear that the selected items will be
deleted. Confirm the step and the items
are deleted.
If a mistake has been made, the

missing items can be installed again
from your media.
Finally the list is closed by pressing
Cancel.
Further-on Functions are available for
• Deleting Manual ENC Updates (see page 303)
• Verifing installed cells. The result with actual cell status is displayed in the protocol window.
• Deleting a list of known media
• Remove complete database (ENC or ARCS whatever is selected above)
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 301

printed 14.07.15
2.8 Installation/ Maintenance of Admiralty Information Overlay
The Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) is available as an option for the NACOS Platinum Navigation
system. It contains all Admiralty Temporary & Preliminary Notices to Mariners (T&P NMs) and provides
additional preliminary information that is specific to ENCs, such as reported navigational hazards that
have been incorporated on paper charts but have not yet been included in ENCs. The overlay is available
only for Admiralty Vector Charts!
2.8.1 Installing Overlay Permits
The Overlay data is protected in the same way as ENCs and requires a permit to unlock the data. Please
notify your Admiralty Chart Agent if you wish to use the Overlay on your RADARPILOT Platinum system
so that the Overlay permit can be added to the Chart Permit files issued to you.
The Overlay permit will be loaded at the same time as your ENC permits when the Chart Permit files are
loaded (see page 296). When the Overlay is added to your AVCS licence the Overlay permit will be added
to the Chart Permit files issued for all ECDIS registered on the licence.
2.8.2 Installing Overlay Data
The Overlay data is provided on a single weekly CD that contains both base data and all updates up to
the date of issue. Therefore only the latest CD is required for installation and all others can be discarded.
The Overlay data is loaded in to the display system in the same way as ENC data.
2.8.3 Updating the Overlay
Updates to the Overlay are issued weekly on CD, along with the weekly AVCS Update CD, and are also
available over the Internet through e-Navigator. Updates on CD should be loaded in the same way as
loading ENC updates (see page 298).
The data volume in each weekly update is normally small. However it is necessary to issue a New Edition
of the Overlay every 6 months, which consolidates all update data into a base data set. This New Edition
may be over a hundred megabytes in size which will make it impractical for most users to download over
the Internet and an Admiralty Information Overlay CD should be used.
When an Overlay new edition is issued (see above), the new edition must be installed before any further
updates can be applied. For users who normally update over the Internet this means that an Overlay
update CD will need to be installed before further Internet updates can be applied.
Page 302 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Manual ENC Update Editor
3 Manual ENC Update Editor
It is possible to edit the IHO or the C-Map ENC cells and only these by means of a chart editor. The
edited elements of the cells are stored as a separate file. The ENC cell itself is not modified. If a manually
updated cell is opened, the corresponding chart area is displayed and in addition the ENC Manual Update.
3.1 Opening the Chart Editor
In Super Home click on Nautical Charts.

The Overview of the installed charts is opened. This may take some time, because the database is
checked before the charts are displayed.
If no installed charts are displayed (no rectangles appear on the screen), open the Functions expander
and set Destination to MFD n (this one).
Fig. VIII / 2 Nautical Charts Editor - Overview
If the database is changed in between, the editor is closed without storing.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 303

printed 14.07.15
Manual ENC Update Editor Operating Instructions
3.2 Select Cell to be Updated
Use the Pan and Zoom control and/or the Set Chart center function in order to navigate to the cell
that is to be updated. As already known, the chart can be shifted using the drag-and-drop functionality
by means of the More button.
As soon as the desired cell is displayed, click it with More and choose Manual ENC Update Editor >
Select ENC Cell > and click the cell that is to be updated.
If more than one ENC cell is available at this place, a list of cells is presented., select one of them. It
will be marked in dark red. Click to it with More and continue as above.
Fig. VIII / 3 Selecting a cell
The cell is displayed then. If it is not already opened, open the Updates expander.
Page 304 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Manual ENC Update Editor
3.3 Start Update Session
The cell and its chart data can be updated now.

Click on Session Setup in the Update expander and
enter the Manual ENC Update Session Data. Then,
click on Set. A click on Clear will erase all entered data,
Cancel will close the window without any further action.
In the editor window the entries for the categories of

objects which can be edited are now active.
A new object can be placed now or existing objects can
be modified. This works in the same way as the usage of
User Symbols. See page 159 for details.
The display of the cell can be zoomed in for easier
editing, afterwards a click on View Cell will display the
cell in full size again.
The update session can be ended without any changes
by clicking on Undo and Abort.
All actions are stored in the session log, as long as the
session has not been ended by a click on Save and Exit.
If the operator activates another application while the

manual ENC update is done, the performed actions of the
manual update do not get lost, in fact, all alterations will
still be present when the operator returns to the manual
update editor.
To view the session log, click on Show Session Log. This func-
tion is only available as long as the current setup has not been
left with Undo and Abort or Save and Exit.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 305

printed 14.07.15
Maintenance of C-Map Charts Operating Instructions
4 Maintenance of C-Map Charts
Two types of C-Map chart products are supported by your RADARPILOT Platinum system, C-Map Profes-
sional and C-Map ENC. Both are delivered in CM 93/3 format. The maintenance procedure for both is
nearly identical, and described in the following chapters.
C-Map Professional is a private database and C-Map ENC contains the official ENC data like IHO ENC.
The maintenance procedure for C-Map ENC is different from that one for IHO ENC cells. It is especially
different from that one for IHO ENC charts which has been described in the previous chapters. The differ-
ences are mainly caused by the handling of the media and the licenses.
The database on your RADARPILOT Platinum system for IHO ENC cells and C-Map ENC cells is one and
the same.
In principle both cell types can installed and maintained together in this single database. But if a cell for
a certain area, either IHO ENC or C-Map ENC, has been installed already, the other type can not be
installed on top. The earlier one has to be deleted first.
-> So it is strongly recommended in order to keep the maintenance work on an acceptable level, to
install one type of ENC cells only on your system.
If an installation shall be changed from C-Map ENC to IHO ENC or vice versa it is strongly recommended
to remove the data base completely on all workstations (MFDs) one by one with the corresponding main-
tenance function Remove complete ENC database (see also page 313) 1).
1) Has to be carried out for each workstation separately.
Page 306 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Maintenance of C-Map Charts
4.1 Request of C-Map Permits
C-Map charts are protected by C-Map permits. They

have to be requested from your chart supplier. For this
request the C-Map ID of your RADARPILOT Platinum is
required. It is identical for all RADARPILOT Platinum
installations on one ship. It can be read out from any
RADARPILOT Platinum installed on your ship. This
section shows you how to export this ID. Just follow the
steps below:
1. Insert an USB stick into one of the USB sockets of
your workstation (MFD).
2. Set Chart Database to C-Map Professional/C-
Map ENC
3. Set Mode to Maintenance
4. Select Export C-Map System ID under Func-
tions.
5. Select your USB stick under Export media if not
already pre-set. Use the Browse function to switch
over to a certain directory on your stick.
6. Click to Start to write the C-Map ID to your USB
stick.
7. It is stored in an ASCII file named USER.USR on the selected path on your stick.
8. Send this file to your chart distributor to identify your vessel for any C-Map chart order. Indicate the
area you are interested in and the type of database (ENC or Professional).
9. You will receive the C-Map permits in a file named PASSWORD.USR (typically per email) and the C-
Map charts on exchange data media (typically DVD).
The protocol window to the left is shown

after successful completion of the
Request C-Map Permit procedure.
A C-Map Professional chart is organized
in zones and areas, for each zone and
area a permit with the corresponding
zone and area number is required.
E.g. zone 0 is the whole world but with
little detail, zone 1 is Europe, and zone 2
is the Mediterranean.
A C-Map ENC comes along with one
permit for each cell.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 307

printed 14.07.15
4.2 Installation of C-Map Permits
After having received the C-Map permits and the C-Map

database media from your chart supplier at first the
installation of the C-Map permits has to be done. Copy
the C-Map permits file to your USB stick and insert it
into an USB socket of the planning workstation. Insert
further-on the database media with the cells.
Select C-Map Professional/C-Map ENC and Update
as shown in the right figure and set Functions to
Install and Update Permit Database.
The database media are also required to install
the permits!
1. Insert the latest database media into the drive.
2. Select the database media (in Display or Update
mode) first, if this has not been done already
before.
3. You may be asked by the system to insert the
second C-Map update CD/DVD and finally the first
one again. Just follow the advices.
4. Select your USB stick as the source and if necessary browse to the path on your stick where the
latest password.usr file is stored.
5. Start the procedure.
-> Everytime when the database supplier has provided a new password.usr file, this file has to be
installed first before any new cells are installed.
-> The permits for C-Map Professional are covering a whole zone.
-> The permits for C-Map ENC are covering single cells only. If a new database media is installed it is
important to update the permits as well. Otherwise a new cell contained in the update data-
base would not be covered by a permit.
Page 308 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.3 Installation of C-Map Charts
After having installed the C-map permits the C-Map cells

can be installed. The USB stick with the permits can be
taken away now; it is not required for the following
steps. Just keep the latest C-Map DVD in the drive or
insert it again and follow the next steps 1):
1. Select C-Map Professional/C-Map ENC and
Update as shown in the right figure and set Func-
tions to Update C-Map Professional/C-Map
ENC Database.
2. Select the CD-ROM drive as the source.
3. You may be asked by the system to insert the
second C-Map update CD/DVD and finally the first
one again. Just follow the advices.
5. The number of cells for installation can be quite
comprehensive and the procedure can take an hour
or two.
The protocol window above is shown after successful completion of the C-MAP data base installation.
-> It is important to note that the permits have to be installed first before any update of cells can be
carried out.
-> For C-Map and especially C-Map ENC the latest permit file has to be installed together with the latest
database media version.
-> After having installed the licensed C-Map cells this initial data base has to be updated in regular
intervals.
1) The actual C-Map Professional media comes along as a single DVD, the C-Map ENC is distributed
on two DVD’s. The user is asked during the loading procedure to insert the second DVD if necessary.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 309

printed 14.07.15
4.4 Request of C-Map Real-time Update (RTU)
After having installed all licensed C-Map cells the data

base has to be updated in regular intervals. This can
be done for small changes within cells in real-time by
email (typically every week or more often). This
section and the following one describe the real-time
update (RTU). The RTU starts with a status check of
your current system. The result is sent to Jeppesen by
email. After a few minutes you will receive an update
file, which has to be loaded into your RADARPILOT
Platinum. Just follow the next steps:
Maintenance as shown in the right figure and
set Functions to Export RTU request.
2. Insert your USB stick and check the Export media
which should show your USB as destination for
export, select if required.
3. Browse to destination if required.
5. The RTU request file, which is named Prof_
YY.MM.DD_hh.mm.ord is written onto your stick
and has to be sent by email to Jeppesen chart service ([email protected]). This email must not
have any entry in the subject line and also not in the text area.
Hint: The RTU update should be applied to fill in the gap between two versions of the base database.
As soon as a new database version is available on-board it should take priority over the RTU update.
The reason is that the RTU update is providing only limited patches to existing cells. A complete update
is available only from the new base media.
In any case after each update from the latest base media an RTU update should be done to
receive the latest updates.
Page 310 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
4.5 C-Map Real-time Update (RTU)
After having sent the RTU request file to Jeppesen you have received a few minutes later the RTU update
file named *.ans. Load this file to your USB stick. Just follow the next steps:
1. Insert your USB stick with the received *.ans file into your RADARPILOT Platinum and check the
Source media which should show the USB stick as the source for update, select manually if neces-
sary.
2. Select C-Map Professional/C-Map ENC and Maintenance and set Functions to RTU Update of
chart data base.
The information from the RTU answer file is used to update the cells installed on your RADARPILOT Plat-
inum system. No further action is required. If no answer file from Jeppesen has been received, contact
the support service of your chart supplier.
Please
refer also
to the hint
on the
previous
page about
RTU
update
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 311

printed 14.07.15
4.6 Update of Charts with new Version from base media
As soon as a new version of the base media is available

on-board, the update from this DVD has to be performed.
This is typically the case after some weeks for C-Map
Professional or each week for C-Map ENC.
In case of new C-Map permits (if new password.usr
received) the new permits have to be installed first. Then
just follow the next steps:
1. Insert the new DVD into the DVD drive.
Update and set Functions to Update C-Map
Professional/C-map ENC Database.
4. Sometimes a list of cancelled cells for replacement is
shown. They have to be deleted. Just confirm dele-
tion of the listed and marked cells.
5. The update is performed and finally a protocol with
the updated cells is shown.
The below screenshots show the update protocol with the list of cells which have been installed and the
final message window that the update is completed.
In any case after each update from the latest base media an RTU update should be done to
receive the latest updates.
Page 312 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Remove Complete Database
5 Remove Complete Database
This function is removing the complete chart

database for all types of charts (IHO ENC, C-
Map ENC, ARCS, C-Map prof. etc.) with all
cells, permits and their related status on one
single workstation (MFD).
It should be used carefully after having
checked all alternative options.
Especially it should be ensured that all neces-
sary media as well as the permits are available
for a complete new installation.
This new installation will take several
hours and the ship should stay in
harbour for a longer time.
This remove function is typically used i.e. if
the sailing area is changed or if the database
is in a faulty condition arising from cells which
can not be deleted.
It is also used if the complete database shall
be changed from IHO ENC to C-Map ENC or
vice versa. In this case it is recommended to
remove the old database first before loading
any new cells.
1. Select C-Map Professional/C-Map
ENC and Maintenance and set Func-
tions to Remove complete ENC data-
base.
3. A window appears showing the number of
cells that will be deleted.
4. Read the information of this window and
confirm. The ENC cells and corresponding
permits are deleted.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 313

printed 14.07.15
Remote Update of Workstations Operating Instructions
6 Remote Update of Workstations
Once an update from CD/DVD or USB stick has been

carried out on one workstation (see page 298), i.e. the
planning station, this updated database can be loaded
from any workstation in the network.
The Remote Update is providing a powerful function
for the update of a number of workstations in one oper-
ating step.
Set Chart Database as required (ENC, ARCS, C-Map or
other).
Select Mode, the default setting is Display, set to
Update.
tion, set to Update Remote ENC Databases.
The Source for the update is this workstation (this
one). No other selection is possible.
The Destinations entry can be set as required. Select
all workstations from the list which shall be updated.
Press Start to activate the update.
An overview protocol of the update is shown in the
bottom of the main application area. It comprises a list
of all MFDs with their actual update status, and after
having finished the update, the final result of the update.
Detailed protocols can be requested from each MFD by
pressing the corresponding Show Protocol button.
The number of cells should be identical for all workstations (MFDs). On the source workstation (MFD)
use the Display Expander to find out the number of cells (please refer to page 293). If the numbers
are different, please check and if in doubt, especially if the number of cells on the target workstation is
larger than that one on the source workstation, remove the complete database on all workststations
(refer to page 313).
Page 314 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Backup/Restore of Routes and User Symbols
7 Backup/Restore of Routes and User Symbols
The user-defined Routes and also the User Symbols can be saved to devices like USB HDD or USB
memory sticks. This makes it possible to transfer those data to other systems or replacement modules.
Start Backup/Restore Procedure

In order to backup routes or user defined
symbols, follow these instructions:
1. In the tabs of the expander, chose
whether to backup Routes or User
Sym
2. In the Function group, select whether
the data are to be backed up or
restored. (The following example refers
to the backup-function. The restore-
function works similar, but the Archive
group is then inactive.
3. Under Backup to: choose the device
which is to be used as backup/restore
media.
4. Click Browse to open a window in

which the backup file and/or path can
be selected. Select the path and, if an
existing archive is to be used, choose
that archive, in which the data are to
be stored. Existing files are overwritten.
-or-
5. If a new archive file is to be added,
check New Archive and enter the
desired name.
6. Click on Start: Backup <data>.
(<data> represents the chosen type of
data, Routes or User Sym)
Browser window with content of selected path
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 315

printed 14.07.15
Backup/Restore of Routes and User Symbols Operating Instructions
Page 316 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
WORKSTATION
MAINTENANCE
RADARPILOT Platinum WORKSTATION MAINTENANCE
Operating Instructions Hardware
1 Hardware
1.1 Display Electronics
The display electronics is based on a HP Compaq PC mounted on a shock damping frame. Periodically it
is recommended to check the following points:
Checkpoint Period Procedure

Shock
damping yearly Check free movement of frame
frame
Power cable yearly Check tight fitting and proper connection
Network cable yearly Check tight fitting and proper connection
USB cables yearly Check tight fitting and proper connection
Cooling air
inlet at the half-yearly Release from dust with vacuum cleaner, if necessary repeat at
shorter interval
front
Table IX / 1 Periodical Maintenance Work for Display Electronics
1.2 Monitor
The color reproduction produced by the monitors must be correct. In the case of doubt and once per
year, the monitor performance must be checked based on the Chart1 presentation. Please refer to
CHART FUNCTIONS.
1.3 Sensor Interface, Network Switch, 24 VDC Power Supply
No special recommendations, network cables are separately fastened and power cables are screwed to
terminal clamps.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 319

printed 14.07.15
WORKSTATION MAINTENANCE RADARPILOT Platinum
Software Operating Instructions
2 Software
2.1 SW Version
The SW version can be accessed from the Super Home page by opening the Menu on bottom left side
and clicking on About.
The information window shows data as
follows:
- Designation of the equipment with
NACOS Platinum series
- Name and IMO number of the vessel
as configured in the data base
- SW version number
- Build number of the NACOS Platinum
application
- SW version of the sensor interface PLC
- Data base build number
- Machine name of the display elec-
tronics, i.e. MFD-01
- Operating time since power on
- Module version information about
various connected units like ECDIS
chart data base, radar transceiver, and
AIS (both if connected)
2.2 SW Updates
Software updates can only be carried out by authorized service personnel. For more information with
regards to software updates of RADARPILOT Platinum Systems please contact:
[email protected].
For ECDIS compatibility please refer to the following link:

http://www.sam-electronics.de/dateien/navigation/broschueren/nacosplatinum.pdf.
Page 320 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
ALARMS
RADARPILOT Platinum ALARMS
Operating Instructions General Information
1 General Information
Alarms or more precise alerts are characterized by their priority:

1. An indication of a limit which has been exceeded is marked with an i for information on a blue back-
ground.
2. A pre-warning is marked with a yellow triangle showing a 3.
3. A warning that requires immediate action is marked with an orange triangle showing a 2.
4. An alarm caused by a serious event that has not been solved yet, is marked with a red triangle
showing the number a 1.
The symbols will be used in the following manner:
Placed in front of the alarm line in the alarm list

as shown in the right example
Placed in front of a label in the navigation

sidebar, i.e. to indicate the status of a sensor.
Alarms and Warnings are accompanied by a permanent sound signal emitted by a buzzer located in the
front frame of the monitor or a separately installed one in the console.
For navigation warnings with priority 3 the sound

can be deactivated by the operator.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 323

printed 14.07.15
ALARMS RADARPILOT Platinum
General Information Operating Instructions
1.1 Color Code for the Alarm Indications
Blue
Indication of an exceeded limit that shall not raise an alarm (priority 4),
in ECDIS an information about a area with special condition
Yellow Incidents and (pre) warnings, usually priority 3. For alarms of this priority, the acoustic alarm
can be switched off,
in ECDIS a crossing danger, obstruction ahead, wreck, or own safety line warning
Orange
Warnings and alarms that require immediate action, usually priority 2,
in ECDIS no valid position sensor
Red
A serious event that has not been solved yet, usually priority 1,
in ECDIS a crossing a safety contour alarm due to shallow water
Red
A sensor signal is missing
Yellow
A sensor signal is missing and the value has been entered manually by the operator, also
applied in combination with the above prioritized symbols
Table X / 1 Color Code for the Alarm Indications
A flashing symbol for any alarm means that this alarm has not been acknowledged yet. A steady symbol
indicates an acknowledged status of an alarm, but that the cause for the alarm is still present.
Page 324 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.2 Overview of the Alarm List
Alarm Line:
(The alarm with highest priority is indicated here)
Buttons for operator reactions Alarm List.
Visual indication to the indicated alarm To open, click on
for the horn this icon.
Oldest unacknowledged
alarm with priority indi-
cation
To show the alarm source

and state, click on this line,
Alarm List: see also next page
Alarm list in opened
state.
Alarm List.
To close, click on
the small triangle. Selection and indication of alarms
to be listed (click to text)
Visual indication Buttons for stop horn, acknowl-

for the horn edgment, and print
Oldest unacknowledged alarm,

See page 326 for details
Equipment and application that

have originated the alarm, alarm
number and status
Number of alarms, 6 out of 8

alarms are visible in the list
List Criteria:
By means of the list criteria, the

clearness of the list can be
improved. Only alarms with the
criteria/sub criteria chosen will be
displayed here (click to the text
and not to the file symbol)
Fig. X / 1 Overview of the Alarm List
If the alarm list is opened by the Alarm List icon (see above) or by a click on the Alarms Tab, it always
shows the complete list of alarms, warnings and indications, independent of the previously made selec-
tions of filters or priorities in the list. The list then shows the newest alarm entry at the bottom of the
alarm window.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 325

printed 14.07.15
1.3 Example of an Alarm
Additionally to the alarm designation, supplemental information is displayed for each alarm in the list. In
the above example, the ECDIS application (EI) on system -01 has originated the alarm. Another example
is given below:
Designation of the
alarm
Date and time of first

occurrence of the
alarm
PC-Id, Application Id
and Alarm number Status
The alarm number is M01AI061, where M01 is the number of the PC or workstation, AI is the indica-
tion for the AIS unit, 061 is the internal fault number. See list of alarms for further information.
The status is Alarm, which means that the alarm is still active (in alarm state).
Status indications can be for example:

- Normal
- Alarm
- Sens Fail (Sensor Failure)
- Dev. Fail (Device Failure)
- Comm. Error (Communication Error)
- Ch. Error (Channel Error)
- SW. Error (Software Error)
Page 326 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
1.4 Behavior when an Alarm comes up
Whenever an alarm is raised, the processing is a two-step action:

1. Switch off the acoustic alarm, if there is one. Use the Stop Horn button in the alarm line or just
press F11 on the keyboard.
2. Immediately obtain information about the causes of the alarm or warning, about the system state
and about possible system reactions, and - if necessary - immediately perform all necessary actions
for the avoidance of possible danger.
3. Remove the cause of the alarm or warning: If an alarm has occurred due to a cause that can be
removed, that cause must be removed as quickly as possible; see also the list of alarms in the
following chapter. An information with priority 4 disappears when the cause disappears, an acknowl-
edgment is not required. Alarms and warnings with priority 1, 2 and 3 must be acknowledged in
any case.
4. The alarms with priority 1 and many alarms of priority 2 and 3 must be acknowledged if the situation
allows or requires such acknowledgment. There are two possibilities to acknowledge alarms:
- Click on Acknowledge in the alarm line or press F12 on the keyboard
- Click on Acknowledge All in the heading of the Alarm list
In case alarms or warnings are also distributed to a second system i.e. a back-up RADARPILOT Platinum,
or if the system deviates from the behavior described above, e.g.
- if the alarm cannot be acknowledged at all or throughout the entire system, or
- if acknowledgment causes something to be initiated or enabled, or
- if an acknowledged alarm is repeated for as long as the cause of the alarm continues to exist,
than please refer to the list of alarms in the following chapter for further details.
Removing acknowledged alarms from the list is done automatically by the system, in case the alarm
reason is no longer valid, or the application or operating mode has been switched off.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 327

printed 14.07.15
Page 328 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions List of Navigation Alarms
2 List of Navigation Alarms
This chapter lists and describes all alarms, warnings and indications of the navigation system, as well as
optional subsystems.
Legend:
In front of each entry in the alarm list the priority is shown with the respective symbol ... .
Indications (events) are marked by the symbol on the screen.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 329

printed 14.07.15
List of Navigation Alarms Operating Instructions
2.1 Navigation Sensor Alarms
This chapter describes the navigation sensor alarms available in the system. The main navigation sensors
used for the heading, speed and position are monitored depending on the configuration. Those sensors
which are redundant can be supported by an automatic selection mode.
The automatic selection mode is the default setting after start or restart of the
system.
- If the selection mode is AUTO the switching over to another sensor of the same type is done
without any alarm or warning.
- If an individual sensor is chosen the switching over to the backup sensor must be done manually
after the respective alarm or warning has been given.
- In the meantime (until a new sensor has been selected) the system is using the latest valid values
of the disturbed or faulty sensor which produced the alarm.
- Switch over to the new sensor a soon as possible, but not before its data have been checked for
plausibility and correctness. Just move the cursor to the new sensor in the selection list to see a
small information window with the actual sensor data.
Page 330 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Depth Limit Exceeded

The pre-set depth limit has been exceeded.
Ground Speed Invalid

The selected COG/SOG speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another speed sensor will have to be
selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used.
Dashes are shown in the speed display field.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgment is possible on
any ECDISPILOT or other workstation.
Ground Speed Timeout

Data are no longer being received from the selected COG/SOG speed sensor. Another speed sensor
will have to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed
is being used,
-or-
The sensor interface connected to the system has failed. The alarm is distributed over the entire
system. Acknowledgment is possible on any ECDISPILOT or other workstation.
Ground Speed Valid

The speed sensor which had given the Ground Speed Invalid or Ground Speed Timeout alarm
is again sending valid data.
Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgment is possible
on any ECDISPILOT or other workstation.
Heading Invalid 1)
The heading sensor system has failed, or is reporting incorrect data, -or-
The sensor interface connected to the system has failed.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgment is possible on
Remedy: Check the compass system, the signal transmission and the sensor interface.
Heading Timeout 1)
Data are no longer being received from the selected heading sensor or from the sensor interface.
Another heading sensor will have to be selected by the operator if available.
Heading Valid
The compass system is again sending valid data.
1)
All display objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are no longer shown
or are inactive, tracked targets are deleted.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 331

printed 14.07.15
Low Position Quality 1)

The selected position sensor has reported a greater position-deviation than is usual for this type of
sensor.
Special feature: The warning is distributed over the entire system.
Remedy: Check the position sensor; select some other position sensor.
New POSN Sensor Selected (or HDG, SOG, STW)

The sensor selection for the connected position sensors is operating in AUTO mode and the previ-
ously used sensor is invalid or data are no longer received via the sensor interface. The new selected
sensor is indicated with its data, status and mode in the position instrument display.
-> If you want to use another sensor than the automatically selected one, you must go to manual
selection mode by a click on the required sensor in the position sensor menu. A reactivation of AUTO
mode can only be done by the operator (Click on AUTO in the menu).
No Valid Position Sensor

The position sensor selection is working in AUTO mode and has temporarily switched to dead reck-
oning (DR) mode,
-or-
The sensor interface connected to the system has failed. Acknowledgment is possible on any indi-
cator.
Special feature: As soon as possible the system will automatically switch to a valid position sensor
and deactivate this warning.
Remedy: Check/repair the connected position sensors.
No WGS84 Position in Use

The selected position sensor
• is no longer reporting the WGS84 position datum
or
• is reporting another position datum than WGS84.
As a consequence the indicated and plotted positions could have deviations to the WGS84 system.
Remedy: Check the position sensor and the data sentences transmitted to NACOS. Ensure correct
transmission of the position datum sentence.
Position Invalid
The selected position sensor is sending invalid position data. Another position sensor will have to be
selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by dead
reckoning (i.e. is internally switched to Estimated Position).
1) Option for DNV NAUT-AW ships
Page 332 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Position Status Changed to Lower Accuracy

The position status changed i.e. from DGPS to GPS).
Position Status Changed to Higher Accuracy

The position status changed i.e. from GPS to DGPS.
Position Timeout
Data are no longer received from the selected position sensor,
-or-
The sensor interface connected to the system has failed. Another position sensor will have to be
selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by dead
reckoning.
Position Valid
The position sensor which has given the Position Invalid or Position Timeout alarm is again
sending valid data again.
on any ECDISPILOT or other workstation.
ROT Limit Exceeded

The preset limit for rate of turn has been exceeded.
Redundant Gyro Differs (or Position)

The difference between the heading (or position) of the selected sensor and of the redundant sensor
exceeds a specified alarm limit.
Special features: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one ECDISPILOT or other
workstation.
Remedy:
• Check the available sensors, their mode and data
Redundant Gyro Lost (or Position)

No valid heading (or position) is received from the redundant sensor. The monitoring no longer
takes place while the cause of the warning still exists.
Water Speed Invalid

The selected STW speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another water speed sensor will have to be
selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 333

printed 14.07.15
Water Speed Timeout

Data are no longer received from the selected water speed sensor. Manual water speed input has
to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was latest sent as the valid speed is being
used.
Water Speed Valid

The speed sensor which had given the Water Speed Invalid or Water Speed Timeout alarm is
again sending valid data.
on any ECDISPILOT or workstation.
Page 334 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.2 Target Alarms
ACQ Zone Overflow

A target has been acquired automatically in the guard zone. It cannot be tracked, because the
maximum number of targets 1) are already being tracked.
Remedy: Check the acquisition/guard zone; delete targets.
ARPA TGT Capacity Limit

100% of the maximum number of ARPA targets are being tracked.
Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant target.
Check ARPA Target Capacity

95% of the maximum number of ARPA targets are being tracked.
Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant target
Dangerous Target
The target which is flashing in red has become a dangerous target, because the CPA and TCPA
values are smaller than the set limits.
Lost Target 2)
The tracked target situated at the displayed lost target symbol has got lost.
Special feature: For this warning it is possible to switch off the acoustic signal.
• If the antenna is not rotating: check the ship's mains and/or the antenna fuse or circuit-
breaker. If the antenna is rotating: request service.
• Select another radar transceiver
Target AUTO-Acquired
A target which is not yet being tracked has been acquired automatically in the acquisition/guard
zone.
TGT Entered Guard Zone

A target which is already being tracked has entered the acquisition/guard zone.
1) ARPA targets and AIS targets together

2) For AIS targets the Lost Target warning can be disabled in the Settings - Target menu.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 335

printed 14.07.15
2.3 AIS Alarms
Depending on the type of AIS connected to the system, not all alarms and warnings listed below may
be supported. If no AIS is connected, none of the alarms will appear.
AIS Ch.Man. Not Accepted

The settings made for the channel management have not been accepted by the system.
Remedy: Check the settings.
AIS Check TGT Capacity

95% of the maximum number of AIS targets are being tracked.
Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant AIS target.
AIS External POSN Lost

The AIS system does not receive a valid position sensor information and falls back to its internal
position sensor.
Remedy: Check the sensor and the cabling.
AIS General Failure

The AIS has stopped the transmission caused by an internal fault.
Remedy: Call service as soon as possible.
AIS GPS Antenna Failure

The GPS antenna of the AIS does not work correctly.
Remedy: Check the GPS antenna and the antenna cabling (short circuit or missing contact at the
connectors). No immediate action is required, AIS is normally fed by an external GPS receiver from
the integrated bridge system.
AIS GPS ANT Short Circ.

The internal check of the GPS receiver has detected a short circuit in the coax wire between the
antenna and the receiver.
Remedy: Check the GPS antenna cable.
AIS Receiver Fault

The receiver of the AIS has detected an internal malfunction.
Remedy: Call service at the next possible harbor. The transmitter is still operable, your vessel will
still be visible for other ships, but you might not see other AIS targets.
AIS TGT Capacity Limit

100% of the maximum number of acquired AIS targets are being tracked.
Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant AIS target.
Page 336 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
AIS New Safety Message

The AIS has received a safety message.
The safety message can be read under > Tools > Target > RX Msg.
AIS No Valid COG

The AIS system has no valid course over ground information.
Remedy: Check the connected sensor and cabling. (The COG information is computed by an inte-
grated bridge system using GPS sensor data, the AIS will continue to work but will transmit less
information to other ships.)
AIS No Valid Heading

The AIS system has no valid heading information from the sensor.
Remedy: Check the heading sensor. (Typically the heading information from an integrated bridge
system which is derived from the gyro, the AIS will continue to work but will transmit less informa-
tion to other ships.)
AIS No Valid Position

The AIS system has no valid position information from internal position sensor
Remedy: Check the cabling and the antenna of the GPS sensor which is integrated into the AIS
system.
AIS No Valid ROT

The AIS has no valid rate of turn information from the sensor.
Remedy: Check the sensor and the cabling. (Typically the rate of turn information from an inte-
grated bridge system which is derived from the gyro, the AIS will continue to work but will transmit
less information to other ships)
AIS No Valid SOG

The AIS has no valid speed over ground information.
Remedy: Check selected speed sensor. (Typically the SOG information from an integrated bridge
system which is derived from a GPS sensor, the AIS will continue to work with its own sensor, but
the speed, which is sent out to other ships might not be as accurate as before)
AIS Offline
Remedy: Check the AIS system. It might be possible to eliminate the fault by switching the voltage
supply to the AIS electronics unit off and then on again at the ship's mains.
AIS Oper. Unit Offline

The indicator electronic does not communicate with the AIS electronics unit. The AIS continues
operating.
Remedy: Check the cabling and connection between RADAR and AIS system.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 337

printed 14.07.15
AIS RX Ch. A Malfunction

The AIS stopped the transmission on the channel A.
Remedy: The AIS system must be exchanged.
AIS RX Ch. B Malfunction

The AIS stopped the transmission on the channel B.
AIS RX DSC Malfunction

The AIS stopped the transmission on the channel 70.
AIS TX Malfunction
The AIS system stopped transmission.
Remedy: Check the AIS system. Check the antenna and the antenna cabling (short circuit or
missing contact at the connectors). Call the service at the next possible harbour, be aware that your
ship might not be visible for other ships as an AIS target.
AIS VSWR Limit Exceeded

The AIS system continues operation: The VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) checked by the AIS
is out of range. The distance from where your own ship is visible for other ships a an AIS target is
significantly reduced to a very few miles only.
Remedy: Check the AIS system. Check of the AIS UHF antenna, antenna cabling and connectors.
Page 338 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
2.4 ECDIS Alarms
Approach to Waypoint
The ship is approaching a WOP (wheel over point), it is indicating the approach to the next course
change maneuver on the pre-planned route.
Special feature: This alarm can be activated or suppressed in the Alarms expander under ECDIS
Alerts with the selection of Critical point on route alarm.
Area w. Special Condition

The chart monitoring detected an area with special conditions (for example a user made Danger
Highlight Area) ahead of the own ship’s position.
-> For this alert it is possible to select whether it is an alarm (red 1) or an indication (blue).
Crossing a Danger
An obstruction, a wreck, a rock with depth below the user selected safety depth or Aids to Naviga-
tion or a user made Safety Line will be crossed soon.
Crossing Safety Contour

The ship will cross a depth limit for which this alarm has been activated in the Alarms > ECDIS
Alerts menu.
Deviation from Route

The current position of the ship deviates from the planned position. The limits of the cross track
deviation can be altered in the XTD LIM column of the waypoint list.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 339

printed 14.07.15
Page 340 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions RADAR Transceiver Alarms
3 RADAR Transceiver Alarms
This chapter lists and describes all alarms, warnings and indications of the radar part, as well as optional
subsystems.
Legend:
In front of each entry in the alarm list the priority is shown with the respective symbol ... .
Indications (events) are marked by the symbol on the screen.
Magnetron Fault
The selected transceiver is reporting magnetron over-current.
Special feature: Acknowledgment is performed by switching the radar over to stand-by.
Remedy: Switch the transceiver over to stand-by, and then switch it back to radar operation. If the
warning occurs repeatedly, request service.
No Antenna Azimuth
The azimuth angle information of the antenna is missing.
Remedy:
- If the antenna is not rotating: check the ship's mains and/or the antenna fuse or circuit-
- Select another radar transceiver
No Headmarker
The antenna's head-marker signal is missing.
Remedy:
- If the antenna is not rotating: check the ship's mains and/or the antenna fuse or circuit-
No Radar Video
The system is in a faulty condition, such that the radar video cannot be generated.
Remedy:
- Check the radar transceiver
- Check the antenna
Request service.
No Trigger
The radar transmission trigger is missing, the radar video cannot be displayed.
Remedy:
- Check the radar transceiver.
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 341

printed 14.07.15
RADAR Transceiver Alarms Operating Instructions
Page 342 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
LISTS AND INDEXES
RADARPILOT Platinum LISTS AND INDEXES
Operating Instructions List of Tables
List of Tables
Table I / 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Table I / 2 Applicable Standards for Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table I / 3 Applicable Standards for ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table I / 4 Additional Standards for MULTIPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table I / 5 Additional Standards for TRACKPILOT (HCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table I / 6 Additional Standards for TRACKPILOT (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table I / 7 Types of clicks in RADARPILOT Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Table III / 1 Range Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Table III / 2 Integrity Marking for Heading/Speed Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Table III / 3 Integrity Marking of Position Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Table III / 4 Monitoring Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Table IV / 1 Symbols of ARPA Targets in ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Table IV / 2 Symbols of AIS Targets in ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Table IV / 3 Maximum Number of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Table IV / 4 Latitude-Dependent Errors of the EBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Table V / 1 Radiation Danger Zone of Radar Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Table V / 2 Categories of RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Table V / 3 RADAR Failure Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Table V / 4 Pulse Length and Repetition Rate of RADAR Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Table V / 5 Qualitative Description of Enhance Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Table V / 6 Symbols of ARPA Targets in RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Table V / 7 Symbols of AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Table V / 8 Manual Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Table V / 9 Differences between Chart Radar and ECDIS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Table V / 10 Scheme of RADAR Video Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Table V / 11 Achievable RADAR Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Table V / 12 Influences of Meteorological Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Table VI / 1 Overview of Route Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Table IX / 1 Periodical Maintenance Work for Display Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Table X / 1 Color Code for the Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 345

printed 14.07.15
LISTS AND INDEXES RADARPILOT Platinum
List of Tables Operating Instructions
Page 346 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions List of Figures
List of Figures
Fig. I/ 1 MFD console design ............................................................................... 25
Fig. I/ 2 Minimum installation – IMO set ............................................................... 26
Fig. I/ 3 Example of a small-ship installation ......................................................... 27
Fig. I/ 4 Example of a large-ship installation ......................................................... 27
Fig. I/ 5 MFD ...................................................................................................... 29
Fig. I/ 6 Possible pointing devices ........................................................................ 30
Fig. I/ 7 Keyboard of a console ............................................................................ 32
Fig. I/ 8 On-screen keyboard ............................................................................... 32
Fig. I/ 9 The Optional ASCII Keyboard .................................................................. 33
Fig. I / 10 The RADAR Keyboard ............................................................................. 34
Fig. I / 11 The TRACKPILOT Keyboard .................................................................... 35
Fig. II / 1 Overview of the S-Mode for ECDIS .......................................................... 41
Fig. II / 2 Man Overboard Function ........................................................................ 43
Fig. III / 1 CCRP on ECDIS ...................................................................................... 51
Fig. III / 2 Super Home Page .................................................................................. 53
Fig. III / 3 General Screen Layout of the RADARPILOT Platinum ................................ 54
Fig. III / 4 ECDIS Title Bar ...................................................................................... 55
Fig. III / 5 Color Schemes of the Color & Settings ..................................................... 56
Fig. III / 6 Date and Time Display ........................................................................... 57
Fig. III / 7 The Navigation Sidebar .......................................................................... 59
Fig. III / 8 Display in the Modes True Motion and centered Display ............................ 66
Fig. III / 9 Display in the Modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM .......... 67
Fig. III / 10 The Chart Status Line ............................................................................. 89
Fig. III / 11 Vector Display in Trial Maneuver Mode .................................................... 93
Fig. III / 12 Delay in Trial maneuver .......................................................................... 95
Fig. III / 13 Checking the Trial Maneuver ................................................................... 97
Fig. III / 14 Opened MULTIPILOT Main Menu ............................................................. 99
Fig. IV / 1 Display Functions and Tools Expander ................................................... 103
Fig. IV / 2 Settings for the Route Display ............................................................... 116
Fig. IV / 3 Application Area with superimposed navigation tools .............................. 149
Fig. IV / 4 Set a Clearing or Danger Bearing Line ................................................... 166
Fig. V/ 1 IMO-Set installation .............................................................................. 181
Fig. V/ 2 Layout with Five Workstations and Conning ........................................... 182
Fig. V/ 3 Radar Picture Cut Due to Master with Smaller Range Compared to Slave .. 187
Fig. V/ 4 Example for the Effect of Video Emphasis .............................................. 194
Fig. V/ 5 The RADAR Keyboard ........................................................................... 196
Fig. V/ 6 PPI with Superimposed Elements .......................................................... 197
Fig. V/ 7 Zoom and Pan Control .......................................................................... 198
Fig. V/ 8 Chart Radar Application Area with superimposed elements ...................... 212
Fig. V/ 9 Example for Multi-Antenna Operation Radar Video .................................. 222
Fig. V / 10 Radial and azimuthal distortions of the radar video ................................. 230
Fig. V / 11 Reduced Range of First Detection depending on Rain in X-Band .............. 232
Fig. V / 12 Reduced Range of First Detection depending on Rain in S-Band .............. 233
Fig. VI / 1 Shape of the pre-planned track in the case of course changes ................. 244
Fig. VI / 2 Route Display Settings .......................................................................... 245
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 347

printed 14.07.15
List of Figures Operating Instructions
Fig. VI / 3 Waypoint List - Planning View ............................................................... 250

Fig. VI / 4 Time Schedule on WP List ..................................................................... 265
Fig. VIII / 1 Maintenance Entry Page ....................................................................... 291
Fig. VIII / 2 Nautical Charts Editor - Overview .......................................................... 303
Fig. VIII / 3 Selecting a cell ..................................................................................... 304
Fig. X/ 1 Overview of the Alarm List .................................................................... 325
Page 348 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Index
Index
A Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . 200

Acquisition/Guard Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 conventions in this manual . . . .. . . . .. . . 19
Adaptive STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 course up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . 67
Aids-to-Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Course-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . 61
AIS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Critical point on route alarm . . .. . . . .. . 108
AIS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 critical target . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . 144
AIS targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Cross Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . 152
AIS True Scaled Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Cross-track alarm . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . 108
alarm horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Cross-Track Limit . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . 260
Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 D
alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Danger Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
danger zone, of radar antennas . . . . . . . 177
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Dangerous Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
alive indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Date Dependent Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ambient light conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
date setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
application area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Depth Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ARPA targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Auto ACQ. AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Display Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
automatic sensor selection mode . . . . . . . 68
Display Functions and Tools Expander . . . 103
autonomous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Display of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
B Display of the Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
brilliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Display Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 59
DO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
C double-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Catalogue for Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Draft Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Category Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Drop Position Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
CCRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
E
Centred display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 ECDIS Alerts . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . 108, 259
Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 edition number . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . 88
Chart Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Electronic Bearing Lines .. . . . .. . . . . . . 156
Chart monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 ENC Update Editor . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . 303
Chart Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Events and Text . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . 167
Check of the Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 F
Class A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Class B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Clearing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 G
click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Ground / Water Stabilisation . . . . . . . . . . . 83
clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
C-Map Permits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 H
C-Map Professional Charts . . . . . . . . . . . 306 head up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Color Code for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Heading Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Color schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Head-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
compass control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
I
conning position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Consistent Common Reference System . . . 51 IMO set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Initial waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 349

printed 14.07.15
Index Operating Instructions
Integrity Marking of Sensors . . . . . . . . . . 69 position monitoring . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 79

Position Offset . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 80
K
Position Sensor . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 77
Known Bearing and Range . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 77
L Predefined Radius . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 278
Predict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 87
Latitude-Dependent Errors of EBL . . . . .. 156
Print out of Passage Plan . .. . . . .. . . . . 278
left mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 30
legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 243 Q
light conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 56 qualification of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Limits for CPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 113
Limits for TCPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 113 R
Lines of Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 150 radar, radiation . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 177
Look Ahead Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 109 radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 177
Loss of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 142 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 62
Real-time Update (C-Map) .. . . . .. . . . . 310
M
Reference Position . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 64
Man-over-Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 117 Repetition of Alarms . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 279
Manual DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 right mouse button . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 30
Maximum number of targets . . . . . . . . . 143 Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 63
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Route Parameters . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 276
menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Route Scheduling . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 264
minimum installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Route Settings . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 116
mouse, scroll wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
S
N
safety
NACOS Platinum, system description . . . . . 25 radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 turning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Navigation Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 59 Safety Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
newest alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Safety Contour Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
north up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Safety Corridor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
North-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Safety corridor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
O Safety Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
safety notes, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Obstruction ahead indication . . . . . . . .. 108
sailing routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 61
Scheduling View of WP List . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Own MARPOL Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 165
screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Own Safety Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 165
Screen Stabilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
P scroll wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Sensor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Parallel Index Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Sensor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Parameter Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Set Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Permits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Set Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
personnel, qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Set Estimated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
picture freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Settings for AIS Transmitter Status . 125, 126
Planning View of WP List . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Show Schedule Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 shutdown, of Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Position Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 single click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Sleeping Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Page 350 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Index
S-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 41 W
Special Area alert . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . 108 Waypoint List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Speed over Ground . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 72 waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 72 Wheel Over Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Speed through Water . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 72
startup, of Workstation . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 37 Z
Status Field . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 89 zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Stop Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . 327
Structure of the Sidebar . . . . .. . . . .. . . 104
Switching on chart display . . .. . . . .. . . . 88
system description . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 25
System Route . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . 261
T
Target Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Target enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Target Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 138
Target Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
target list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Target Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Target Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
TFT monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Track Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Track Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 263
Transferred Base Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Trial Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
True Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
true motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
True Motion Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
True/Relative Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
turning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
types of clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
U
Update of Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
User symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
User’s Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
User’s Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
UTM Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
V
Variable Range Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Variable Waypoint List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 351

printed 14.07.15
Index Operating Instructions
Page 352 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
Operating Instructions Abbreviations
Abbreviations
A
AtoN . . . . . . . . Aids-to-Navigation
B
BCR . . . . . . . . . Bow Crossing Range
BCT . . . . . . . . . Bow Crossing Time
BIOS . . . . . . . . Basic Input/Output System
C
CCRS . . . . . . . . Consistent Common Reference System
CPA . . . . . . . . . Closest Point of Approach
CTW . . . . . . . . Course Through Water
D
DPU . . . . . . . . . Data Processing Unit
DR . . . . . . . . . Dead Reckoning
E
EBL . . . . . . . . . Electronic Bearing Line
ETA . . . . . . . . . Estimated Time of Arrival
G
GPS . . . . . . . . . Global Positioning System
GUI . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface
H
HDG . . . . . . . . Heading
I
IEC . . . . . . . . . International Electrotechnical Commission
IHO . . . . . . . . . International Hydrographic Organisation
IHO . . . . . . . . . International Hydrographic Organization
IMO . . . . . . . . . International Maritime Association
ISO . . . . . . . . . International Standardisation Organisation
L
LAT . . . . . . . . . Geographical Latitude (from 0 to 90 degree North or South)
LED . . . . . . . . . Light Emitting Diode
LON . . . . . . . . . Geographical Longitude (from 0 to 180 degree East or West)
LOP . . . . . . . . . Lines of Position
M
MFD . . . . . . . . Multi-Function-Display (workstation)
MMI . . . . . . . . Man Machine Interface
MOB . . . . . . . . Man-over-Board
N
NM . . . . . . . . . Nautical Mile
NMEA . . . . . . . National Marine Electronics Association
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 353

printed 14.07.15
Abbreviations Operating Instructions
P
PI . . . . . . . . . . Parallel Index Lines
PPI . . . . . . . . . Plan Position Indicator
PRT . . . . . . . . . Port Side
R
REF TGT . . .. . Reference Target
REL . . . . . . .. . Relative Bearing
RM . . . . . . .. . Relative Motion
ROT . . . . . . .. . Rate of Turn
S
SAR . . . . . . . . . Search and Rescue
SDME . . . . . . . . Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment
SOG . . . . . . . . . Speed Over Ground
STB . . . . . . . . . Starboard
STW . . . . . . . . Speed Through Water
T
T ... .. . . . .. . True Bearing
TCPA .. . . . .. . Time to Closest Point of Approach
TFT . .. . . . .. . Thin Film Transistor, a kind of Monitor
TTM . .. . . . .. . True Target Message
U
UI . . . . . . . . . . User Interface
UID . . . . . . . . . User Identification
UTC . . . . . . . . . Coordinated Universal Time
UTM . . . . . . . . Universal Transverse Mercator
V
VRM . . . . . . . . Variable Range Marker
W
WGS 84 . . . . . . World Geographic System 1984
WP . . . . . . . . . Waypoint
Z
ZDA . . . . . . . . . Central Date and Time Telegram
Page 354 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15
RADARPILOT Platinum LISTS and INDEXES
Operating Instructions Document History
Document History
Revision Author Changed Main Changes

Chapters
09 (2013-07) Ehrke All For SW version 1.0.14:
Generation of complete update including anchor

monitoring, user symbol input with UTM, old
and new WP list format, ENC S-63 1.1 certifi-
cates, system printer, and remote dimming
10 (2014-02) Ehrke For SW version 1.0.15:
(text in American English now)
GENERAL FUNC- Chapter 3.1.1 updated with head stab mode

TIONS
Chapter 3.5 updated with selection Navigate for
AIS sleeping targets
Chapter 3.6 updated with list for 3 simulated

critical targets
DISPLAY FUNC- Chapter 3.6 updated how to delete MOB

TIONS & TOOLS
Chapter 5.4 AIS low power updated
Chapter 5.5 new classes of hazardous goods
Chapter 6.3 with AIS SAR added
Chapter 8.5 updated with user symbol groups
RADAR FUNC- Chapter 4.6 updated with note about STC

TIONS setting if RADAR 1000/1100 transceiver is
connected to Platinum
Chapter 4.7 updated with slider for rain clutter

filter
ROUTE PLAN- Chapter 3.2 & 3.3 about Time Schedule Monitor
NING AND MON added
DATA MAINTE- CHART MAINTENANCE is now DATA MAINTE-

NANCE NANCE,
Chapter 2.7 about remote update added
10W (2015- Ehrke Wärtsilä logo added

07)
ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 355

printed 14.07.15
LISTS and INDEXES RADARPILOT Platinum
Document History Operating Instructions
Page 356 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

printed 14.07.15

Radar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radar

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

Combining the following applications:

RADARPILOT (with transceiver NG 3050 / NG 3051)

X-Band 12.5 KW: Q07NG3050X12-5KW

Radio-frequency radiation exposure information:

© Wärtsilä SAM Electronics GmbH

Wärtsilä SAM Electronics GmbH

QUICK START GUIDE

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 3

2.1 Super Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Page 4 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

4 The Menu Bar with Home, S-Mode and MOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

DISPLAY FUNCTIONS AND TOOLS

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 5

7.1 ARPA Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Page 6 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

2 RADAR Standards and Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 7

9.6 Presentation of Depth Colors in the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

ROUTE PLANNING AND MONITORING

Page 8 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

1.10 Results of Geometrical Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 9

Page 10 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

LISTS AND INDEXES

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 11

Page 12 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

1 About these Operating Instructions

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 15

1.1 Aim, Scope and Validity of these Operating Instructions

Page 16 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

1.2 Structure of the Operating Instructions

The structure of the RADARPILOT Platinum Operating Instructions is as follows:

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 17

1.3 How to Scroll through this Document

Page 18 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

1.4 Typographical Conventions

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 19

[KEY NAME] This convention is used to refer to a key an an onscreen keyboard or a

Main > Sub-menu This is an abbreviated way for:

☞ This symbol indicates a hint.

<variable> Describes a text string of variable length and contents. Example:

DD-MMM-YYYY The date in international format which is used in the system.

Table I / 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions

Page 20 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

2.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating Instructions

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 21

2.2 General Safety Note

2.3 Authorisation and Qualification of Personnel

Only authorized persons may operate the RADARPILOT Platinum.

Page 22 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

DANGER! WORK IN PROGRESS! DO NOT SWITCH!

2.5 Chart Updates and Safety Inspections

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 23

Page 24 ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07)

3.1 What is the NACOS Platinum System

The NACOS Platinum system is the state-of-the-art integrated Navigation-Automation-Control-System

Fig. I / 1 MFD console design

ED 3100 G 130 / 10W (2015-07) Page 25

Fig. I / 2 Minimum installation – IMO set

Orientation: 6HOHFW+HDG6WDE+HDG8S1RUWK8S&RXUVH8S 3RVLWLRQVHQVRUFDQEHVHWWR$8727KHEHVWDYDLODEOHVHQVRULVFKRVHQDXWRPD &OLFNRQWRSOLQHRIUDGDUJURXSVHOHFWDWUDQVFHLYHU7;IURPWKHOLVWWKHFKRVHQ7;DQG